Home

FORMS4WORK Version 1.5 User Manual

1. Rechnung Kopie Ke Nr 106047 Datum 02 05 05 Teile Nummer Bezeichnung Menge E Preis A124 880 1436 LEITBLENDE 1 100 49 100 49 Field Scanner Filter Configuration Mey 618 51 y 16 84 Scan Method 150 58 gt 7 e 21 89 Data stream type is ERU e hs Configure 2189 3 42 PDatafbtora 3 42 q i z 8 94 Recognized Bata is J reported to later components h Configure 6 60 a 1 06 PCL Scanner Configuration R TAT24 Field Name Trigge Sequence Offset Length Trim Find Default gt 1 Kd Nr 3 6 O First Barcode Definition Edite a Definition Nas Kundennr Code Source Barcode Type one page A Position rotation o Properties ncel Barcode definition Kundennr Barcodetype Data Matrix 2D Barcode Position rotation E 7 i Special settings Barcode position lawer left comer of the code Measurement unit measured from the tap left side of the sheet Cinch mm Position 130 H Erek E ple C 1 720inch Notes RA x yPosition 110 Definition name e Left click to edil Right click tola Buiet zone Select Insert minimum values Select Delete Select Copy t hor edge 0 35279 z mm Select Properti ver edge 135278 rim K T nne ests 58093 Testhausen Rotation counterclockwise Harrr no Rotation y relative to the lower left comer of the code PCL Output Kd Nr 106047 Datu BE
2. 6 4 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 5 1 Search for Define Edit Remove one or more trigger s D Unprintable characters or data bytes may be entered as hexadecimal value with preceding i e 0D is interpreted as ASCII CR Definition of a replacement Define a replacement Enter the following information Search for Define character string which is to be replaced when trigger is found see configuration If case is ignored depends on the setting of Ignore Case D Characters that cannot be entered using the keyboard are specified with a preceding character and a two character hexadecimal code The character itself is displayed as Examples e Hello replaces the word Hello _ e A replaces the German umlaut A e 0D 0A replaces the ASCII control characters Carriage Return CR and Line Feed LF Replace with Define character or character string to replace the string defined in Search for Leave empty to delete the searched for character string from the data stream Replacements that cannot be entered using the keyboard are specified with a preceding character and a two character hexadecimal code Examples Search for Hello World Replace with Hey You replaces Hello World with Hey You Search for A Replace with Ae replaces the umlaut A with Ae Search for 0D 0A Replace with 0A replaces CR LF with LF Search for 1BD Replace with removes ESC D Field Scanner Filter A
3. copies does not match compared to the origin system Use PCL jogging command If activated a PCL command depends on given lt Printer type gt will be used to jog OFFSET the page If lt No Specific gt is set the PCL Job Separation Command lt ESC gt amp I1T will be used Printer type Optimizes the data output for the given printer type If lt No Specific gt is set only standard PJL und PCL commands will be used FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 155 Edge to Edge Activates the edge to edge printing feature of the selected printer model 6 3 18 2 2 System Generation JSL File Name The name of the used Job Source Library file The file must contain all job description entries and libraries JDE PDE CME etc to which a report may reference to via DJDE D In contrast to the origin Xerox 4050 4090 the JSL file needs no incremental line numbering The lines are interpreted from top to down and left to right within the given column width JSL Column Width Specifies the maximum column position for interpreting a line If this value is set to O the line will be interpreted up to the terminating line end lt CR gt lt LF gt Treat constant strings without qualifier as ASCIT A Usually a string constant without qualifier is handled as EBCDIC therefore IDEN PREFIX DJDE is the same like IDEN PREFIX E DJDE If this option is activated the system handles a string constant without qualifier as ASCII ther
4. Compress data The print job data will be compressed The compression ratio depends on the data The receiving FORMS4WORK system will unpack and decrypt print job data if the option Decompress and decrypt data automatically is activated at the corresponding input port This option is useful if network load is to be reduced Compress and encrypt data If this option is activated the print job data will be compressed and encrypted The encryption algorithm can be chosen from AES Rijndael Blowfish or DES DES is no longer considered secure but is available for compatibility with older FORMS4WORK versions The receiving FORMS4WORK system will unpack and decrypt print job data if the option Decompress and decrypt data automatically is activated at the corresponding input port This option is useful if network load is to be reduced and or due to security reasons D Use Compress data or Compress and encrypt data only when a second FORMS4WORK System is receiving the data on the other side Zip Output The output data will be zipped Password Password used to encrypt the data The receiving FORMS4WORK must have the same password specified in its receiving input port If there is no password specified FORMS4WORK will use its internal default password Send job information within data stream If sending print jobs to a FORMS4WORK input port additional information about the print job as source name etc can be transferred This informatio
5. Hebrew ISO ASCII 8 Bit 920 Latin5 ISO ANSI 8 Bit 1002 Dcf Rel 2 Compatibility 1003 U S Text Subset 1004 Ibm PC Desktop Publishing 1008 Arabic ISO ASCII 8 Bit 1025 Cyrillic Multilingual 1026 Latin5 1027 Japanese Latin Extended 1028 Hebrew Publishing 1029 Arabic Extended ISO Acsii 8 Bit 1038 Symbols Adobe ASCII 1039 Gml List Symbols 1041 Japanese Extended PC 1042 Simplified Chinese Extended PC 1043 Traditional Chinese Extended PC 1046 Arabic Extended ISO ASCII 8 Bit 1068 Text With Numeric Spacing 1069 Latin4 EBCDIC 1070 Dp United States 1071 Dp Germany Austria 1072 Dp Belgium 1073 Dp Brazil 1074 Dp Denmark Norway 1075 Dp Sweden Finland 1076 Dp Italy 1077 Dp Japan Latin 1078 Dp Portugal 1079 Dp Latin America Spanish 1080 Dp United Kingdom 1081 Dp France FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 84 1087 Symbols Adobe 1091 Symbol Set 7 Modified 1092 Symbol Set 7 Modified PC 1140 U S Canada 37 Euro 1141 Germany 273 Euro 1142 Denmark Norway 277 Euro 1143 Finland Sweden 278 Euro 1144 Italy 280 Euro 1145 Spain Latin America 284 Euro 1146 United Kingdom 285 Euro 1147 France 297 Euro 1148 International 500 Euro 1149 Icelandic 871 Euro 1250 Latin 2 Windows 1251 Cyrillic Windows 1254 Turkey Windows 1300 Generic Bar Code OCR B 1301 Postal Barc
6. 1234 instead of 1234 678 when a space is found between the digits 4 and 6 This is also done for other whitespace characters as Tab Carriage Return Line Feed and Form Feed Trim leading whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace characters are removed from the left end of the data field value string Trim trailing whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace characters are removed from the right end of the data field value string Record entity is defined by Whole print job this treats the complete print job as one data record Number of pages this treats a specified number of pages as one data record FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 181 D Handling of data records also depends of the used storage method If the storage method does not support variable number of records only one record per job will be available Newly recognized field values automatically overwrite past values 6 4 5 2 4 CSV Formatted ASCII Data This scan method will read ASCII data formatted in a CSV compatible format CSV format is database oriented and requires one line for each record A line break means a new record begins All data fields of one record are separated with a separator character and may be enclosed with a delimiter character To recognize data fields the fields names either need to be defined or must be listed in the first data line The table is used to define the list of fields This list needs to be set up in the same
7. Brazil 385 Canada French 386 Denmark Norway 387 Sweden Finland 388 France Switzerland 389 Italy Switzerland Italian 390 Japan Latin 391 Portugal 392 Spain Philippines 393 Latin America Spanish 394 U K Austral Ire H K N Z 395 United States Canada English 396 Dw 370 Sonoran Serif 420 Arabic Bilingual 423 Greece 183 424 Israel Hebrew 437 Personal Computer 500 International 5 803 Hebrew Character Set A 813 Greece ISO ASCII 8 Bit 819 Latin1 ISO ANSI 8 Bit 829 Math Symbols FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 83 831 Portugal 836 Peoples Republic Of China Prc 838 Thailand 850 PC Multilingual 851 Greek PC 852 Latin2 Multilingual PC 853 Latin3 PC 855 Cyrillic PC 856 Hebrew PC 857 LatinS PC 858 Multilingual Latin I 850 Euro 860 Portugal PC 861 Iceland PC 862 Hebrew PC 863 Canadian French PC 864 Arabic PC 865 Nordic PC 866 Cyrillic 2 PC 869 Greece PC 870 Latin2 Multilingual 871 Iceland CECP 874 Thailand PC 875 Greece 880 Cyrillic Multilingual 890 Yugoslavia 892 OCR A 4234 3812 Palomar 893 OCR B 4234 3812 Palomar 897 Japan PC 1 899 Symbols Set 7 ASCII 903 Peoples Republic Of China PC 904 Republic Of China Roc PC 905 Latin3 Multilingual 912 Latin2 ISO ANSI 8 Bit 914 Latin4 ISO ANSI 8 Bit 915 Cyrillic ISO ASCII 8 Bit 916
8. D This parameter can not be changed while configuring a remote system Loading Load only once FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 150 The resources file RESOURCE XES are only converted and sent to the printer for the first job Reload every Job The resources file RESOURCE XES are converted and sent to the printer for every job that is received Profile A profile may be selected from nine possible the corresponding file 1 XES 9 XES is to be selected If no profile has been selected the values set in the configuration dialog are used as the default settings If a profile has been selected the XES commanas in this profile file are also interpreted A profile is executed immediately after each XES reset command lt ESC gt X Using a profile arbitrary additional default settings such as line spacing form overlaying etc can be adjusted to suit individual needs D This parameter can not be changed while configuring a remote system Page Buffer Flags Defines the properties of the emulation in terms of XES matrix graphics windows for example XES command graphic window repeat lt ESC gt gr and the storage of resources Matrix graphic windows are stored in the RAM memory of the printer in the form of PCL macros in other words they can be printed on the page several times but not modified for example no X or Y zoom With Page Buffer Flags you can modify the behavior of graphic windows and combine different types wh
9. In other situations these responses might not be applicable For highest flexibility it can be controlled by this option whether feedback responses are send to the host system or not Default enabled e Send stop code to host after writing lt n gt sec FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 53 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 4 1 6 3 5 6 3 5 1 Define when stop code is sent to host after writing in seconds This applies if a write access to the printer is not successfully completed within this time Some hosts require responses within a specific time If for some reason the printer goes offline or is turned off this might lead to problems with bi directional communication Set to 0 to turn off this option Default O off D The effective time depends on the write timeout set at the output port I e if at the output port a write timeout is set to 10 sec and here 15 sec are used the second timeout after 20 sec will send the stop code This is because the first timeout after 10 sec is still in valid range of 15 sec Resources Settings regarding the resource files to be loaded into the printer can be made here Resource download for the IPDS to PCL5 emulation Resource download for the PCL5 to PDF emulation Resource download for the PCL5 to X Metacode emulation Resource download for the XES to PCL5 emulation Resource download for the X Metacode to PCL5 emulation Barcode Label Software Overview For documentation of FORMS4WORK Barco
10. Japan 2042 Keyboard 100 U S EBCDIC 2043 Keyboard 101 U S EBCDIC 2044 Keyboard 102 U S ASCII 2045 Keyboard 103 U S ASCII 2046 Keyboard 254 U K Special FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 85 2047 Keyboard 265 Germany Austria 2048 Keyboard 269 France Belgium 2049 Keyboard 277 Canada Computer 2050 Keyboard 281 Norway Computer 2051 Keyboard 281 Denmark Computer 2052 Keyboard 285 Sweden Finland 2053 Keyboard 289 France Belgium 2054 Keyboard 313 United Kingdom 2055 Austria Germany F R DABASE 2056 Belgium Swiss Luxembourg DBBASE 2057 Denmark Norway Iceland DDBASE 2058 Finland Sweden DEBASE 2059 France DFBASE 2060 Italy DIBASE 2061 Netherlands Portugal DNBASE 2062 Spain Dsbase 2063 Dcf Rel 2 Compatibility 2064 Dp Canada French 2065 International Set 5 2066 Pi Fonts 2067 Austria Germany Switzerland 2068 Belgium 2069 Brazil 2070 Canada French 2071 Denmark Norway 2072 Sweden Finland 2073 France Luxembourg Switzerland 2074 Italy Switzerland Italian 2075 Japan Latin 2076 Portugal 2077 Spain Philippines 2078 U K Austral Ire H K N Z 2079 United States Canada English 2080 Math Format 2081 Sonoran Display Fonts 2082 Sonoran Petite Font 2083 Lcs 3800 1 Dump Character Set 2084 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic Folded 2085 Def Gp12 Compatibility 2086 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic OCR
11. Therefore mails should be deleted from the mail server manually or by another software after they are processed Default disabled D see also Settings FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 46 6 2 13 6 2 13 1 6 2 13 2 PPD The selection of LPD as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs PPD Settings Sessions Data Data Type Data Capturing Address PPD Input D Microsoft Winsock 2 must be installed on the FORMS4WORK server This is the case with Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or higher and Windows 98 With Windows 95 an update available from Microsoft is necessary Address e Local Address Define the local IP address or DNS name of the network interface that is used to receive the data If the computer has only one local address the field may remain blank If there are multiple local addresses you can limit to a single IP address Leaving it blank in such a case makes FORMS4WORK receive data from all IP addresses Default empty use all available IP addresses e Port Define PPD port on which the data is to be received With PPD connections using no protocol direct socket usually port 5001 is used although selection of the port is free Default 5001 Input Buffer Size Define size of input buffer This is the internal buffer size for storage purposes when data is received If data arrives more quickly than it can be processed it is placed in a buffer Default 256 KB D see als
12. They should not contain German Umlauts a 6 German B or accent characters Punctuation marks and numbers are allowed Any command line starts with the keyword DEFINE for a definition or RULE for a rule Any OEMName Overlay Resources file is assigned via definition to an ID number If you want to use the same resources file at different coordinates on the page using the keyword OFFSET you have to assign several ID numbers Compliant with the rules pasting the overlay resource with the ID number is assigned to certain events Several triggers that were defined over different keywords can be combined as a logical AND operation in one RULE If the conditions should be combined as a logical OR operation you have to use more than one RULE entries FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 103 The maximum number of definitions and rules in one IPDSOVER INI is 40 each The IPDS Overlay Supplement uses its own sheet counter in the IPDS interpreter during procession of a print job At the beginning of a print job or using a RULE with the keyword RESETCOUNTER the sheet counter is reset to 1 Difference between sheet and page To simplify arranging the overlays the IPDS Overlay Supplement counts sheets as they are printed and not the IPDS print pages shown on the host The IPDS counter on the host counts logical pages A page can contain up to eight logical pages When printing simplex one sided single edge without combination outp
13. To remove a copy select the required job directory and click on the Remove button Appendices If this count is greater than 0 it defines the number of copies of the print job which will be added to the output file as serial copies E g the value of 2 will produce a print job file which contains the original print job and 2 copies appended In summary the original print job will be 3 times there Also pass job information data If sending print jobs to a FORMS4WORK input port additional information about the print job as source name etc can be transferred This information will be transferred before the print data To use this feature the option of the corresponding input port must be checked too This option must not be used if the receiver is not a FORMS4WORK input port Add copy no to file name If checked the number of the copy will be appended to the file name If using the same job directory twice this option is forced because the copies must have different file names FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 187 6 4 7 6 4 7 1 6 4 7 2 Job Separator Filter Application The Job Separator filter is used to divide PCL print jobs to several partial jobs depending on criteria present within the print job data Examples e The input data stream contains several constant character sequences which are used to classify each page Using the Job Separator filter the original job may be divided into several jobs where each par
14. Use this setting to achieve the lowest amount of output data Acrobat Reader TM V 5 0 cannot display these images but they can be printed though e Extra Bitmap Set to generate an extra transparency bitmap in addition to the color image This method results in a slight increase of the amount of data Acrobat Reader V5 0 is able to display the images default e Expand To 24 Bit Set to expand the image into a 24 bit full color image without a palette or mask This method has highest compatibility with printers and reader programs at the expense of an increased amount of output data e Paint As Mask Set to transfer the image with its attribute set to image mask For further information about this attribute see Acrobat documentation Default Paint As Mask Page Output Face down printing Select Face up or Face down printing Default Face up Page Output Page order Select Page 1 n to print the job from the first to the last page Select Page n 1 to print the job from the last to the first page Default Page n 1 Stapling Select the stapling command Available options are Off Front Rear or Dual Default Off Output Destination FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 111 Set output destination paper tray These options are device dependent AUTOMATIC Standard output bin determined by the printer UPPER BIN Usually the face down output bin LOWER BIN Usually the face up output bin HC OUTPUT
15. Y y bi MR Y record S 370 byte length record format begin record length length info end record length C i ESS WSs POST aaa TSE WS record S 370 word length record format D The begin record length and end record length bytes must have the same value The record length contains the number of data bytes PCC byte only The PCC is a IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control code Additionally the Barr software reserves 3 special codes for the PCC Code Function hex C6 3211 FCB FD Translate next command FF Start of spool header record Commands reserved by Barr software Line printer Format This format assumes pure ASCII or EBCDIC printer lines Each line must be terminated with lt CR gt lt LF gt or lt CR gt lt FF gt lt CR gt Carriage Return optional lt LF gt Line Feed lt FF gt Form Feed 194 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration Lime termination GC 7 y 1 line 1 record Line printer Format D The line termination lt FF gt will always be translated into a Skip to channel 1 command The line termination code may not be part of the data The line termination code depends on the configured mode ASCII or EBCDIC Line Code Code termination ASCII EBCDIC hex hex lt CR gt 0D 0D lt LF gt DA 150r 25 lt FF gt oc 0c There exists a check box option Scan for TRN code 0x35 for the EBCDIC mode If activated the optional transparent code TRN 0x35 followed
16. any modification of the document will result into invalidating the embedded signature There are two alternate formats for storing public key signatures in the signature dictionary of a PDF file The Raw Signature Format stores certificates and the signed digest directly in the signature dictionary as attributes The PKCS 7 Signature Format encapsulates the signature and the signed digest into a single PKCS 7 object that is stored in the dictionary There are advantages and disadvantages to both formats An advantage of the Raw Signature Format is that the signature is more compact A disadvantage of using PKCS 7 is the more required space for the PKCS 7 object and the containing not required redundant information Digital signature NONE No signature will be inserted Raw Signature Format PKCS 1 The raw signature format stores the signed digest and the signer s certificates directly as attributes in the signature dictionary PKCS 7 Signature Format This syntax use a PKCS 7 object to encapsulate the document signature and signer s X 509 certificates D Both formats can be verified by the Adobe Reader Certificates Currently only an automatically generated self signed certificate is used Appearance Currently the signature will be always invisible and is always attached to the first page These are the user default settings for the PCL environment i e usually the values which can be configured at the printer panel These va
17. color can be mapped either to Xerox Highlight Color or to black or to white Available colors are white yellow magenta red cyan green blue black Default White Prescribe to PCL Emulation Overview This chapter describes all the parameters of the FORMS4WORK emulation Prescribe to PCL5 PRESCRIBE is a registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation 6 3 14 2 Parameters 6 3 14 2 1 Prescribe Defaults FRPO The names enclosed in braces are the FRPO parameter names Firmware RePrOgramm of the origin printer e g IR FRPO C1 0 CMNT set default page orientation to portrait EXIT Page orientation C1 Determines the default page orientation Default Emulation P1 Note The Prescribe emulation does not support the available emulations This option sets only the corresponding default font mode FTMD of the chosen emulation The font mode FTMD command determines which attributes will be changed automatically when a bitmap font is selected by the FONT ALTF or RPF commands character spacing line spacing fixed or proportional spacing portrait or landscape orientation 1 2 4 8 Pi Emulation mode Font mode O Line Printer 15 1 IBM Proprinter O 2 Diablo 630 0 3 Qume Sprint11 13 4 NEC Spinwriter 13 5 Epson FX 80 O 6 HP LaserJet Series II 13 Font number C5 C2 C3 Determines the default font number Escape character P9 Determines the escape character for enter
18. copy count is defined higher This allows performing a single copy print without modifying your job definition Default disabled e Max paper stack size per group To post process printed output on a cutter you might have to keep the limit of sheets given by the cutter Specify this limit as paper stack size per group here to get the complete output divided into groups your cutter can handle The smallest possible value is the number of sheets in a set On the printing device each group will be treated as a separate job The job names will be numbered as e g Sample SampleData_1 Sample SampleData_2 etc Additionally the number of sheets in a set is displayed as also the number of sheets required for printing all tables not yet printed Default O disabled Search external images within directories Images which are not part of the image list can be loaded from one or more central image repository This is just a directory which contains all available images Several of such directories can be listed in the image search path separated by semicolons Default empty Job Definitions This opens the dialog for configuration of the form job definitions You may have several job definitions configured Each of them may have one or more conditions when this definition is to be used All conditions are tested for their appliance by the top down priority Printer Printer Adjustment e Unit Of Measurement The unit used for
19. lt LF gt lt CR LF gt lt FF gt lt CR FF gt e lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt lt CR LF gt lt FF gt lt CR FF gt e lt CR gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt FF gt The Carriage Return command causes a carriage return the Line Feed command causes a line feed and the Form Feed command causes a form feed e lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt FF gt The Carriage Return command causes a carriage return line feed the Line Feed command causes a line feed and the Form Feed command causes a form feed e lt CR gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR LF gt lt FF gt lt CR FF gt The Carriage Return command causes a carriage return the Line Feed command causes a carriage return line feed and the Form Feed command causes a carriage return form feed e lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt lt CR LF gt lt FF gt lt CR FF gt The Carriage Return command causes a carriage return line feed the Line Feed command causes a carriage return line feed and the Form Feed command causes a carriage return form feed Default lt CR gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt FF gt Duplex Mode Select the default simplex or duplex printing from the pull down menu Available options are e SIMPLEX e LONG EDGE BINDING e SHORT EDGE BINDING Default SIMPLEX Output Destination Set output destination paper tray These option
20. to the list Remove Logical Printer Click Remove Logical Printer button or select Remove Logical Printer from the Setup menu to remove a Logical Printer the highlighted row from the list Input interface Shows the type and properties of the input port interfaces and also its description Used to configure the input port for incoming print data Input Filter Shows the input filters Input filters compensate incompatibilities between the host and destination printing system or incorrectly formatted commands of character strings before the conversion Data conversion Shows the name of the assigned emulation for data conversion e g IPDS to PCL5 and also its description Each emulation generally has different settings Output Filter Shows the output filters Output filters compensate incompatibilities between the host and destination printing system or incorrectly formatted commands of character strings after the conversion Output interface Shows the type and further properties of the assigned output port interface and also its description Used to configure the output for outgoing print data Edit Logical Printer To edit a Logical Printer double click on a selected row of the Logical Printers list or click the Edit Logical Printer button above the Logical Printers list The Edit Logical Printer window allows to edit the logical printer consisting of FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 20 e Inp
21. values to define the command ESC amp IxxF are given where xx is the required format of the value for form length FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 56 6 3 6 2 2 6 3 6 2 3 When ESC is selected three options are available e String Header e Format Of Length Information e String Trailer e String Header Define the prefix of the command string i g for ESC8l enter 1b 26 6c or 1b amp l here e Format Of Length Information Define the format of the value required by the printer Available options e Decimal 3 digits e Decimal 2 digits e Hexadecimal Default Decimal 3 digits e String Trailer Define the suffix of the command string e g F Band ID Band ID e EBCDIC The print characters of impact printers are on a steel print band Many print bands for different character sets and national languages are available The print band moves across the print line When the desired print character is at the correct position the hammer for that position strikes to print the character Each print band has an unique ID called Band ID The host system has to informed about this Band ID to recognize which print band is currently mounted on the printer Default 00000000 Translation Table Choose translation Select a translation Available options are e No Translation e EBCDIC to ASCII Default No Translation The code set of data used on a channel interface is normally EBCDIC Depending on the requiremen
22. 118 Xerox POE it A A A A A a aa 119 Trays AA A A ii 120 POMO MANCO siii rl da td lb 121 Cola eta 123 Prescribe to PCL Emulation ci nconcassnicnnnsin sarna inci dinner nine enana rapidas 125 OVGIVIGW iii di E id Di 125 Parame tenseso diie daed dit AA tdi e 125 Prescribe Defaults PRPO ocurra A a AE 125 Page Osio a 126 Duplex OlfsetSitscs ivan A A AA 127 FROSOUNCOS tati td dt e a te 128 Miscellaneous eeen ae enaa dios 128 Program Intern t A OA A A on nn aad raia daia seezenaincicisasidhsceitnsiestsceseesstheis 129 OE Wii Ai E A di T 129 ParameterS citada ii di it AA eb 129 MiSCellANGOUS cocinas O e do ETE REENE 129 Performante IA A A a A 130 RW RAW in 132 OVETVIEW isenana oa edadea id it dd db 132 PATAS ii e E BETERA 132 Common Beavis tt idad dad 132 Performan e inuit ii 132 MES 0 PC NO 134 Contents vV 6 3 18 6 4 Filters 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 4 5 OVAs a T A A AA lad A ad 134 XES COMMANA Sa aii A AA EEAS EE EEEE 134 Supported COMMANdAS io dd dad 134 Not supported command Sirasi as 135 Parameters cuna AE A E tac el 136 Common Page SettingS ahiiinii ei ida 136 OMS Suit aid td tata 136 Sii o AA A es 138 Number Of Copies cta A A eal 139 Duplex Seuings Ai Asatte A A Aa 140 Page LAVOUbs ccedeuvtcudateede len ivddnse da Ls 140 PCLS Printer Type ui AO ane aad cianadaameane 141 Tray Mapping vitral 143 Porro MAN Cia cee Adein ic Ad Aden Aaa Aili dem Abii Aides 145 Emula
23. 50 dots 4 25 mm each where it cannot print A Xerox printer on the other hand can print over almost the entire area of a page ABDEF Non printable margin of a Xerox printer very narrow ABCDEF Non printable margin of a PCL5 compatible printer if all the parameters are set to 0 Neither the visible window nor one of the vectors has been moved To define the print area you can influence the output relative to the short edge in portrait format the horizontal edge of the page using the parameters Visible window short edge offset and Vector short edge offset You can influence the output relative to the long edge in portrait format the vertical edge of the page using the parameters Visible window long edge offset and Vector long edge offset ABCDEF This illustration shows the effect if the parameter Visible window long edge offset is set to a and the other parameters are set to 0 The visible window is moved away from the long edge by the value a 100 inches FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 137 ABCDEF This illustration shows the effect if the parameter Vector long edge offset is set to b and the other parameters are set to 0 The visible window remains unchanged but the vectors have been changed by the value b 100 inches This results in the text being moved horizontally If you only wish to move your output not scale it you can combine these parameters as you wish The available step va
24. 58 ASCII x The used examples are escape control strings known by a HP LaserJet printer There are three print attributes bold underline and overprint i e making text unrecognizable These attributes can be used in any combination The received data normally EBCDIC will be scanned for the code specified as Underline Character to recognize which part of the line should be underlined Overprint Character must contain the code which is used in the output data stream normally ASCII to make text unrecognizable Example is used for a space character blank lst line CMD 01 Normal Bold Bold amp Underline Over Over amp Under 2nd line CMD 01 bs Bold Bold amp Underline YYYY YYYYYYYYYYYY 3rd line CMD 09 will cause the following print line Normal Bold Bold amp Underline XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX y was exchanged by the specified Overprint Character e g x because being unequal to neither the original content nor the Underline Character nor the space character Download This section includes two special features which can be useful in some cases Font amp Graphic Download Enable or disable font and graphic download Default disabled Normally FORMS4WORK converts all received print commands into the appropriate number of carriage control codes like carriage return 0D line feed 0A form feed OC This mode was designed to allow downloads of data streams which have to be composed by several print lines becau
25. A a aa EA aA A a E ARAA Ei 54 B nd ID ouers eeaeee ra e E re a a e Eaa a E a Ea E EE ea oak ER EEEE 56 Translation TAO ii A dd i E E 56 COM Ol AAA e E A 57 Bold PENN tin 58 DOWN a a a a a ratio ceesates sio dale 59 FCB A diia 60 Job Management contada did il tol a ttoidt 62 PerormMaN CO ui ia 63 Forms Overlay Language siirsi A rado 65 OUEN A a Aare A Meee eens 65 Parametros a docto T 66 Printer CapabllitiOS cuiuac diia 66 Paper rt iio eo doler datada 68 Paper ASSIM ici is 70 cd e Nono An 71 FONTS aca a idad 72 EditDefa lt RON asas or rr acesesiesin testa 73 POOL tada 74 A O 75 ForMs ProtesS Or citristo iii ida 76 COV TW asa eh tl ile dress do ria dani caren etre geen eee ot ca 76 Parameters a 76 Miscellaneous tail eaten eee elected tac 76 PAn A Ea eel a ua i An ced eel a 77 JOD DENION Sen o e a a E A E E A EEE E 78 AAPP ANNANS FAET An ARRENE 78 AAA AAA AREA NANESE Naa A HASWAA TENAN AA 78 OVA ias 78 Rarameters ranita older ida 79 IPDS to PCL Emulator cs ia E E E 79 OV SOW ie cS cetacean ea ccc esheets ese tes cee he ce dp recta ees eat linia 79 Parameters anoncan cece tied shee aE teh need etvced deena ita E aoa a aaa aa a ena eanes 79 FOS PNET aa E 0 a amen EEE E E can eeteiseene RASA 79 Tray All Maita 86 Printer Control islas cd addict idiotas 87 PCL Output caian dada 89 INPUETTAY Stanton lira np wae ice eter fai det 91 CONV as 93 ROSQUICAS lleida 95 FORMS4WORK 6 3 11 6 3 12 6 3 13
26. Bitmap no conversion 240 gt 300 dpi method but the pattern is scaled to 300 dpi This method is the slowest but also the most accurate Bit Images PCL Compressed Enable Disable PCL compression of bit images This parameter controls the way in which the IPDS to PCL5 emulation sends PCL matrix graphics to the printer D If disabled the emulation process is faster but more data are sent to the printer which might slow down output Default enabled PCL Color Support Enable Disable PCL color support FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 90 If this option is enabled the IPDS to PCL5 emulation will generate PCL 6 simple color mode commands to show colored IPDS text GOCA bitmap graphics and GOCA shaded area fills on the printer If this option is disabled non white text and bitmap colors will be mapped to black and area fills will be accomplished with gray shaded patterns Default enabled Load IPDS overlay as PCL macro Enable to load IPDS overlay as PCL macro If this option is enabled IPDS overlays are saved in PCL macros to reduce the transfer of the overlays to every page This speeds up processing but may cause data loss in printers with not enough memory Default disabled Use Unit Of Measurement Enable to use unit of measurement With this command you can define whether the conversion of IPDS units into printer units should be completed by the emulation or in the printer If your printer supports this command
27. Default 0 00 mm Output bin mapping The allocation of the FOL output bin assignments to the appropriate PCL output bin assignments can be made here e Host bin 4 Enter the number of the respective FOL output bin Up to 24 different tray allocations are possible 0 23 Default 0 e PCL bin ID Enter the ID number of the associated PCL output bin Paper Size mm All adjustments for the configuration of the default paper size can be done here e Type Select type of default paper size Available paper sizes are Standard Executive Letter Legal Ledger A5 A4 A3 B5 User defined User defined User defined2 User defined3 The respective paper size appears in the fields Width and Height Width enter paper width in mm Height enter paper height in mm e Printable Area Offset Horizontal enter offset in millimeters which the printable area of the paper deviates from the left edge of the page Vertical enter offset in millimeters which the printable area of the paper deviates from the top edge of the page e PCLID Define the PCL identification number of the selected paper size e Paper Assignment Opens a configuration dialog for the allocation of FOL paper name to PCL paper specifications User definable FOL paper names can be assigned to specified PCL paper sizes Additionally a media name can be configured See Paper Assignment for details FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 70
28. Define the delay before next try on read error If a problem occurs at the input port during reading the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next read attempt This prevents a slow input port slowing down the system by frequently repeated read attempts Default 1000 msec e Delay before next try on write error Define the delay before next try on write error If a problem occurs at the output port during writing the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next write attempt This prevents a slow output port slowing down the system by frequently repeated write attempts Default 10 msec e Timeout for shutdown Define the time in milliseconds which the Print process shall wait for completion of the emulation thread If the set time has elapsed before the emulation thread has been terminated correctly by itself it will be terminated by the Print process d Ensure that you set an adequate time to allow the emulation thread to terminate by itself The set value should not generally be changed Default 5000 msec Bidirectional Communication e Produce ACK NAK responses Enable to produce ACK NAK responses When processing print jobs which are received through a Channel Input Port and when processing IPDS FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 123 print jobs usually it is necessary to send feedback responses to the host system In other situations these res
29. EBCDIC Arabic FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 169 20423 IBM EBCDIC Greek 20833 IBM EBCDIC Korean Extended 20838 IBM EBCDIC Thai 20871 IBM EBCDIC Icelandic 20880 IBM EBCDIC Cyrillic 20905 IBM EBCDIC Turkish 21025 IBM EBCDIC Cyrillic Serbian Bulgarian Language specific character sets Arabic Codepage and NLS API support Language support for Cyrillic For european languages with latin fonts Language support for Greek Hebrew Codepage and NLS API support Japanese Codepage NLS API and font support Korean Codepage NLS API and font support Chinese Taiwan Codepage NLS API and font support Codepage and NLS API support for Thai Language support for Turkish Language support for English US Vietnamese Codepage and NLS API support To select the Codepage conversion or to define different character conversions configure the Codepage filter using the configuration dialog 6 4 3 3 Configuration The conversion of the codepage requires the definition of the codepage used for the incoming data and the definition of the required codepage for the outgoing data Input Codepage Use this to set the codepage for the incoming data source data The selection available depends on the codepages installed on the system See the notes on the NT Language Pack Output Codepage Use this to set the required codepage for the destination data Here too the available selection depends on the codepages installed on the system See the not
30. Emulation 161 Barcode Label Software 53 Basic information 18 23 By page count 214 C Cancel job 22 25 Capturing 33 217 Chained Emulations 53 Channel Emulation 54 Band ID 56 Bold Printing 58 Control Codes 57 Download 59 FCB 60 Job End Detection 62 Job Management 62 Performance 63 Printer Type 54 Translation Table 56 34 35 220 165 Channel Input Channel Output Client 14 Code Page 79 Codepage Filter 168 Application 168 Configuration 169 Configuration Patch Table 169 NT Language Pack 168 Color support 89 Common print process settings 18 Common server settings 15 Components 9 The Simply Application 10 Concurrent jobs 18 Conditional Stringchange Filter 170 171 172 Configuration 170 171 172 Replacement 172 Trigger 171 Configuration 26 28 Backup 26 Introduction 28 Restore 26 Configuration Dialog 28 Connecting toaserver 13 Connectivity 15 Conversion 21 Run 21 Start 21 Stop 21 Cycle 214 D Data Capturing 33 217 Data conversion 19 Data Encryption 216 Data Type 32 Debug information 18 Default remote address Delay job output 18 Delayed printing 219 Delete job 22 25 Device Assignment 214 Direct Socket 49 223 DNS 15 DNS name 13 14 DOCUMENTS4WORK import files 223 184 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 173 176 177 179 181 182 E 183 184 185 CSV Formatted ASCII Data 181 PCL Job Scanned For Text Areas 179 Reporting To Later Components 182 Saving To ODBC Databa
31. Enable to enlarge GOCA raster images Sometimes the host system generates raster graphics of the GOCA type with the wrong dpi resolution value Enable this option if these images are printed too small Default disabled Send form and job name via PJL Enable to send form and job name via PJL If a valid names for job user or form have been recognized in a IPDS Group Boundary command they will be send to the printer in special PJL command at the beginning of the job These commands can be used as a trigger for selecting the configuration in an Overlay Manager attached to the IPDS emulation Example A host system is sending job MYJOB123 produced by user USEROO1 with form name STD This will result in a PJL sequence which will be as PJL SET CSP_HOSTIOBNAME MYJOB123 PJL SET CSP_HOSTFORMNAME STD PJL SET CSP_HOSTUSERNAME USEROO1 In an Overlay Manager attached to the emulation a configuration trigger like CSP_HOSTFORMNAME STD could be defined Default disabled Substitute incomplete download fonts Enable to substitute incomplete download fonts If this feature is checked the IPDS emulation will substitute incomplete broken download fonts with a courier font Use only if necessary since this switch might affect logos images downloaded as a font Default disabled Check VPA IPDS can generate Position Check NACK messages if the cursor or an imaging area is out of the Valid Printable Area VPA bounds
32. FCB will be transferred to the printer at the beginning of each job jobs separated either by Job End Detection or Job Timeout even when there was no FCB loaded from the host since the last FCB load e Default FCB Enable to set default forms control buffer Default disabled FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 62 6 3 6 2 8 Enter a file name and path or search for it with the button When this check box is enabled FORMS4WORK will perform an initial load of the FCB with the information stored in a file on hard disk drive every time when a print process which includes a channel emulation is started If the check box Suppress FCB is disabled this default FCB will be replaced by any FCB loaded from the host If Suppress FCB is enabled the default FCB will never be replaced but all loaded FCBs will be ignored instead Job Management Job End Detection Because the data stream which will arrive to the line printers emulated by FORMS4WORK will not have an universal indication for an end of job there exists a timeout to terminate a print job But when there are several print jobs in the spooler of the host the different jobs will not be separated by the timeout Therefore FORMS4WORK offers different methods for job separation e Method Select a job end detection method from the pull down menu The following options are available None Download End Skip 12 Job End Job Start Load FCB Default None None disables the j
33. FORMS4WORK automatically terminates the connection This time can be defined here in seconds No entry or a 0 in this field prevents the automatic termination of a connection at the input by FORMS4WORK Default none empty Job Timeout Enter job timeout interval in seconds If several print jobs arrive at a connection for example a TCP IP session in sequence FORMS4WORK may not recognize these as separate jobs This may cause problems if for example the data are to be output through the PPD PPR protocol since this protocol must have access to the complete print job before it is passed on to the printer Therefore it is necessary to define a job timeout If no data arrive at a connection for a certain period of time the current print job is terminated All further data that arrives at this connection will be assigned to a new print job No entry or a 0 in this box will prevent print jobs from being split automatically D Another possibility of splitting a continuous flow of data into individual print jobs is to simulate the end of the print job after a certain number of pages and to start a new print job with the following pages This setting is a property of the emulation that must support it The appropriate possible settings are given in the configuration dialogs of the emulations Default empty none Look for session every Enter interval in milliseconds when input port shall monitor the input for receiving data polling
34. If the job is split into smaller pieces the time until the first page gets printed is reduced But it must be sure that some queue optimization of the printer is disabled if the partially printed job pieces have to be in the right order Default O no splitting e Reconfigure printer after splitting Enable to re initialize the output device at the start of a print job If this option is enabled the emulation will conduct the initialization automatically each time a print job is split Default disabled 6 3 17 3 7 Emulation Xerox Printer Select No specific for no printer emulation Select Use Following and the XES printer s you wish to emulate The emulation may use the peculiarities of the following Xerox XES printer models 2700 3700 4010 4030 4045 4046 4213 4235 e Xerox 4030 Enable to make the Merge Start Command lt ESc gt ze not terminate a constant page definition Default disabled e Xerox 4045 Enable to emulate Xerox 4045 XES peculiarities Text lines with several different font sizes are treated slightly differently A font is considered even if it is only selected but not used within the line Activation can therefore influence the line spacing between text lines containing different fonts Default disabled e Xerox 4046 Enable to keep an activated user defined table lt ESC gt z1H active even after a reset lt ESC gt x Default disabled Xerox 4213 FORMS4WORK Ma
35. Interface 6 3 15 1 Overview The Program Interface Emulation PIE enables FORMS4WORK to run external programs which emulate process or change print data in any way The so modified data can be sent back to FORMS4WORK default or be put out from the external program itself respectively PIE runs fully automatically and requires no user interventioning or monitoring 6 3 15 2 Parameters 6 3 15 2 1 Miscellaneous Redirect the data to the program Define the external application or search for it using the button Arguments for this program are Set program options The following fields can be used as variables lt tempin gt Name of temporary input file lt tempout gt Name of temporary output file lt dspconfig gt Name of configuration file lt emuid gt Emulation ID lt jobname gt Name of the job lt jobnamenoext gt Name of the job if filename without file extension lt srcaddress gt Address of senders as IP address or Novell queue name lt username gt Name of user lt destport gt Destination port as queue name from LPD protocol lt destaddress gt Specific device if defined in Logical Printer lt jobid gt Job ID lt ticks gt Milliseconds since system start lt date gt Date lt time gt Time lt creationtime gt Start time of job lt starttime gt Emulation time of job Output Define whether the modified data is further processed by FORMS4WORK or by the external program Set priorities depending on t
36. Name of the job if filename without file extension lt srcaddress gt Address of senders as IP address or Novell queue name lt username gt Name of user lt destport gt Destination port as queue name from LPD protocol lt destaddress gt Specific device if defined in Logical Printer lt jobid gt Job ID lt ticks gt Milliseconds since system start lt date gt Date lt time gt Time lt creationtime gt Start time of job lt starttime gt Emulation time of job An asterisk can be used optionally after the variables This will create unique file names Examples e C OUTPUTDIR lt jobname gt PRN will create files as XYZ PRN where XYZ is the job name e C OUTPUTDIR lt jobname gt PRN will create unique files as XYZ1234 PRN D Which variables of the job information really contain values is depending on which Input Port and protocol is used A LPD Input Port for example cannot give a Novell queue name a Novell Input Port does not support a destination port etc Don t overwrite existing file If the output file already exists it is not overwritten The output of the data is delayed until the existing file has been deleted Delete existing file If the output file already exists it is deleted first Append if file exists If the output file already exists the data are appended to this file D If a file has been opened by another program or process FORMS4WORK may not be able to open this file To ensure that dat
37. Orientation Page orientation Select a default page orientation from the pull down menu Available options are e Portrait Landscape e e Reverse Portrait e Reverse Landscape Paper Assignment Define logical papers in this dialog User defined name Enter a name for the paper size Paper Size Select a paper size from the pull down menu Host Input Tray Enter number of host input tray that contains the paper Printer Media Name Enter the printer media name Add Click on Add to add the above defined paper name assignment to the list below Remove Click on Remove to remove the highlighted entry from the list below Edit Click on Edit to edit the highlighted entry in the list below A dialog appears where you can edit e User defined name e Paper Size e Host Input Tray e Printer Media Name Back to Paper FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 71 6 3 7 2 3 Page Properties In this configuration dialog all page related default adjustments can be done Duplex e Default Mode Select a default mode from the pull down menu Available options are e Simplex e Long edge duplex e Short edge duplex Default Simplex e Force Duplex mode Enable to force duplex mode Enabling this feature will convert a simplex and duplex mixed print job to a complete duplex print job Formerly simplex pages are converted now to duplex pages with empty backsides This option must be set if a printer do
38. Print jobs that arrive at the same time are processed in parallel Each print job is allocated a certain amount of processor time for this purpose which it must share with other print jobs This value allows you to enter the time in milliseconds that a print job may be delayed in receiving data so that other print jobs can be completed fluently FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 214 6 6 2 3 Delay if no data received If no data are currently being received for a print job the print job may be delayed and the available processor time can be assigned to other print jobs This value defines the time in milliseconds that a print job can be delayed if no data are currently being received for this print job Execute command after printing It is possible to execute an external program after a job is completed Therefore you have to enter the path and filename of the program file here The specified program is executed after the job is printed Optional placeholders can be used as parameters lt jobid gt ID of the job lt jobname gt Name of the job lt srcaddress gt Address of senders as IP address or Novell queue name lt dstaddress gt Destination address of a job lt username gt Name of user lt destport gt Destination port as queue name from LPD protocol lt starttime gt Time when job started lt endtime gt Time when job was printed lt jobsize gt Size of the job lt filename gt Name of the output file file ports
39. Teile Nummer Bezeichnung E Preis A124 880 1436 LEITBLENDE 1 100 49 100 49 Rechnung Kopie 02 05 05 A124 880 40 70 STOSSFAENGER H 1 618 51 618 51 A124 8800097 REP SATZ 1 16 84 16 84 A124 8851421 SCHIENE 1 150 58 150 8 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 168 6 4 3 6 4 3 1 6 4 3 2 Codepage Filter Application Each operating system uses a certain standard character set to save text The most common character sets are ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange which is a 7 bit system and EBCDIC Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code which is an 8 bit system Many operating systems use the 8 bit with ASCII code for language specific characters for example umlauts and special characters The Windows operating system under which FORMS4WORK works uses the ASCIT character set extended by language specific characters in the form of an 8 bit code table Normally the emulation of print data in FORMS4WORK is transparent in the system in other words FORMS4WORK does not mind which code is used In cases where the data received by FORMS4WORK are supplied by an EBCDIC host however and the output device to which FORMS4WORK supplies the data only understands ASCII code or a FORMS4WORK emulation requires ASCII code the data must be converted This also applies the opposite way round and for different language specific special characters Use the Codepage filter from FORMS4WORK to convert the chara
40. The record termination on variable blocked VB format must be always lt CR gt lt LF gt hex 0D optional hex 0A i e these hex codes may not be part of the data record length into 2 A Pd N record length length info 1 A A 7 g Y N e e A y record IBM Tapes Input Format variable blocked VB 2 byte length info D Instead of a record termination this format has 2 leading bytes containing the length of the record There exists two ways of interpreting the record length info 1 The record length does not include the 2 length byte itself 2 The record length includes the 2 length byte The ANSI control codes PCC for IBM tapes are shown in following table FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 196 US ASCII US ASCII tapes EBCDIC tapes Function graphical code hex code hex character representation Space blank 20 40 Space 1 line before printing 0 30 FO Space 2 lines before printing 2D 60 Space 3 lines before printing 2B 4E Suppress space before printing 1 31 F1 Skip to channel 1 and print 2 32 F2 Skip to channel 2 and print 3 33 F3 Skip to channel 3 and print 4 34 F4 Skip to channel 4 and print 5 35 F5 Skip to channel 5 and print 6 36 F6 Skip to channel 6 and print 7 37 F7 Skip to channel 7 and print 8 38 FQ Skip to channel 8 and print 9 39 Fo Skip to channel 9 and print A 4 Ci Skip to channel 10 and print B 42 c2 Skip to channel 11 and print Cc 43 C3 Skip to channel 12 and prin
41. a page in portrait format Dual Select to insert two staples on the left hand side of the page Enable Rotate to make on the right hand side of the page Front Select to insert one staple on the left hand side of the top of the page Enable Rotate to insert one staple on the right hand side of the foot of the page Rear Select to insert one staple on the left hand side of the foot of the page Enable Rotate to insert one staple on the right hand side of the top of the page Alphanumeric ID Command supported Enable for support of alphanumeric ID command If the PCL printer you are using supports the Alphanumeric ID Command lt ESc gt n w this option should be enabled This command will be used to access fonts which are saved as PCL macro file to a Hard Flash disk of the printer D This parameter usually will be used with parameter Page Buffer Flags Save using HP PJL file system for swapping out resources to the printer D If the printer produces lines of text ending with _cspFM this typically indicates that the printer does not support the Alphanumeric ID Command Default disabled Landscape X offset lt x gt inches Define a value for the Landscape X offset This command moves the entire output of a landscape page by the entered amount This offset does not apply for a portrait page Default 0 6 3 17 3 5 Tray Mapping The two languages XES and PCL5 use different names for tray mapping This allows individual adju
42. a slow output port slowing down the system by frequently repeated write attempts Default 10 msec e Timeout for shutdown Define the time in milliseconds which the Print process shall wait for completion of the emulation thread If the set time has elapsed before the emulation thread has been terminated correctly by itself it will be terminated by the Print process D Ensure that you set an adequate time to allow the emulation thread to terminate by itself The set value should not generally be changed Default 5000 msec FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 132 6 3 16 6 3 16 1 6 3 16 2 Raw to Raw Overview The Raw emulation does not convert the print data but simply passes them on unmodified Parameters 6 3 16 2 1 Common Behavior Count Pages PCL PostScript or ASCII only Enable to count the pages of each processed print job for showing actual page count on the display D This option will only result in proper values if the print job data is in ASCII format using Form Feed ASCII code 0x0C as page break or for PCL print jobs D Input port data type recognition must be enabled This setting is part of the Input Interface configuration dialog tag Data Type Default disabled e Split PCL or ASCII jobs after lt n gt pages Define the number of pages after which the emulation shall split a PCL or ASCII job Default O no splitting Run emulation in static mode Enable to run emulation continuously Dis
43. amp p X data provides printing access to characters with code values lt 32 decimal These characters are normally considered unprintable Use the Transparent Print Data command to print bar codes which contain characters lt 32 decimal Examples Esc s4p2h36v24701T Esc amp p8X20e08e98 no data specified with bar code selection command desired data 20e08e98 8 bytes specified with Transparent Print Data FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 163 command immediately following the bar code selection command where e is the character associated with decimal code 7 in the PC 8 symbol set Compressed data formats Some bar code symbologies such as UPC E and Code 128 use compressed data formats The FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter accepts data for these symbologies in either compressed or uncompressed format The incoming data is analyzed to determine if it is compressed or not and if required compression is automatically performed prior to printing the bar code Checksum calculation Some bar code symbologies define checksum characters as a requirement of the data format When this is the case the FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter performs the checksum calculation and automatically places the character s per the symbology specifications Fixed length data formats can be sent with or without checksum characters Returning to normal text printing To ensure a proper return from bar code printing to normal text printing PCL escape sequenc
44. be controlled by this option whether feedback responses are send to the host system or not Default enabled e Send stop code to host after writing lt n gt sec Define the time in seconds after which a stop code ist send to the host This applies if a write access to the printer is not successfully completed within this time Some hosts require responses within a specific time If for some reason the printer goes offline or is turned off this might lead to problems with bi directional communication Set to 0 to turn off this option Default O off D The effective time depends on the write timeout set at the output port I e if at the output port a write timeout is set to 10 sec and here 15 sec are used the second timeout after 20 sec will send the stop code This is because the first timeout after 10 sec is still in valid range of 15 sec Jobs e Split job after lt n gt pages Enter number of page breaks after which a job shall be split into smaller parts For example a print job with 5000 pages can be split into 50 smaller print jobs each consisting of 100 pages Also if no specific criterion exists for the end of a print job and therefore all print jobs from the FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 147 host system are processed in the FORMS4WORK system as a single job a forced split can be achieved using this parameter This option is helpful if the printer is collecting print jobs completely before starting printing
45. be designed using the FORMS4WORK Form Builder and saved to file These files the are selected during configuration of the Forms Processor emulation Data records to be filled into the forms are received from an ODBC database via the ODBC input port Parameters Miscellaneous Banner Page e Add banner page to each group When printing you might want to have a banner page at the beginning of each group This page contains information about the job data source and record range as also about the group position within the complete job To add banner pages check this option and specify a paper tray to be used for these pages The following is a sample of a banner page Default disabled FORMS4WORK GROUP BANNER PAGE Job Definition Sample SampleData Data Source Name SampleData Data Table Name Address Job Information Start Record ID 000001 End Record ID 000031 Group Information Group No 00001 of 00002 Start Record ID 000001 End Record ID 000020 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 77 6 3 8 2 2 e Use paper tray When printing with banner pages option set here you select the paper tray to be used for the banner pages Tray number 0 is the printers default tray The selected paper tray should almost contain plain paper Default Tray O Sheets e Always reduce number of sheet copies to one If this option is set all sheets defined in your current job definition are printed only once even if their
46. between 1 and 65535 The STEP parameter together with the FROM keyword specifies the increment with which the reference value should be counted from the start counter on If the reference value equals the sheet counter the condition is fulfilled i e if the overlay resource shall be pasted on every second sheet you have to put in STEP 2 For duplex and N Up print jobs that rule is valid for the whole sheet i e the overlay will be pasted to the front and to the back of a sheet If this should not be done the rule must be complemented with the SIDE keyword e g SIDE FRONT see below Example FROM 2 STEP 2 pastes the overlay on every second sheet starting with sheet 2 SIDE SIDE requires a keyword as a further argument FRONT BACK or SIMPLEXBACK SIDE specifies if an overlay resource should be pasted to the front and to the back of a sheet In duplex jobs the overlay will be pasted to both front and back if SIDE is not chosen In simplex jobs you can use SIDE SIMPLEXBACK to paste an overlay to the backside of the sheet To achieve that an additional page will be added to the data stream In print jobs with both simplex and duplex pages there may be two rules required one with the keyword SIDE BACK and one with SIDE SIMPLEXBACK FRONT Pastes the overlay resource when either the front of a duplex sheet is reached or a simplex page When printing simplex SIDE FRONT is redundant Example SIDE FRONT BACK Pastes the overlay reso
47. cancel or restart printing jobs Guest Password Enter password for monitoring access Guest access allows monitoring of printing jobs only D By default no passwords are set on the FORMS4WORK If you do not specifically set passwords all users will have administrator privileges which include access to important functions such as Setup including setting passwords and job control We strongly recommend that you set at least an Administrator password to protect FORMS4WORK from random or accidental changes to Setup FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 17 5 3 2 1 2 Accounting Active When checked the FORMS4WORK accounting system is activated and all jobs are processed within the accounting system Retrieve Popup address from DNS If the username of a print job does not correspond to the account name of the user the address of the Popup Tool may not be determined Use this option to resolve the username by DNS Only use this option if usernames can be resolved by DNS without errors Otherwise DNS requests may take some time and decrease the performance of the FORMS4WORK printing system Notify user when job has been printed The user will be notified if the job has been printed successfully This function is only available if the user address is known by FORMS4WORK This depends on the configuration and the input ports used For displaying the notifications the Accounting Popup Tool must be running on the printing client Not
48. connection timeout in seconds After this interval is elapsed without having established a connection the FORMS4WORK client is no longer searching for a connection An error message is displayed Default 30 seconds FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 48 6 2 14 2 6 2 15 6 2 15 1 Retry connect after Set the time in seconds after which the port will try again to get a connection Default 30 seconds see also Settings Protocol SNA Port LU1 LU3 SNA LU1 LU3 Systems Network Architecture Protocol for Logical Units SNA LU 6 2 The selection of SNA LU6 2 as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs SNA LU6 2 Settings Sessions Data Type Data Capturing SNA LU 6 2 Connection D The Microsoft DLC protocol must be installed on the FORMS4WORK server Host MAC Address Define MAC address of the host system from which data is accepted Ask your network administrator for the correct Host MAC address Default empty none IDBLK Set the IBM product number Hex which defines the type of the control unit and of the attached devices This value must refer to the VTAM definition at host side For IBM printers InfoPrint 60 3130 3160 3935 use value 071 Possible range is 000 to FFF Default 017 IDNUM Define the unique identification Hex of the control unit It must be in conjunction with IDBLK the XID value and refer to the VTAM definition at host side Possible range is 00000 to FF
49. e univers Default line printer e PCL Typeface ID Enter the PCL typeface ID Default 4102 e Spacing Select the character width from the pull down menu Available options e Fixed e Proportional FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 73 Default Fixed e Symbol Set 4 Enter the number of the symbol set i e the ID of the PCL character set of the selected font Default 277 e Size adjustment Enter a balance factor to the character width Default 0 75 e Add Click on Add to apply the new settings e Remove Select a FOL Font name and click on Remove to delete the selected font allocation D You can undo this deletion by clicking Cancel e Change Select a FOL Font name and click on Change to modify an already configured font allocation D This will overwrite existing font parameters Edit default font All assignments of the default font can be changed in this configuration dialog See Edit default font for details Edit Default Font PCL Typeface ID Enter the PCL typeface ID Default 4099 Spacing Select the character width from the pull down menu Available options e Fixed e Proportional Default Fixed Pitch FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 74 6 3 7 2 5 Define the horizontal distances between characters of fixed spaced fonts The value must be entered in number of characters per inch Default 10 Height Define the character height in points 1 72
50. file IPDSOVER INI is a line oriented plain text file in ASCII format Any line is finished with a CR LF Carriage Return Line Feed Any line is a blank line a comment line or a command line respectively The file IPDSOVER INI is opened and evaluated by the IPDS interpreter at the beginning of a print job If there are no current IPDS print jobs to be processed by the FORMS4WORK system the IPDSOVER INI can be edited even when the system is running The changes however do not occur before the next print job is started Is the interpreter in Static Mode it is recommended to restart the referring dispatcher If there is no IPDSOVER INI available for the referring interpreter the IPDS Overlay Supplement for this IPDS interpreter will be disabled If an Overlay Resource file mentioned in the file IPDSOVER INI can not be found the referring rule will be skipped without displaying an error message This does not affect the other resources in the same IPDSOVER INI For a better overview and documentation of the definitions and rules in this file we suggest that you add comment lines to every definition or rule Comment lines start with a semicolon ASCII 59 and should not be longer than 255 characters IPDSOVER INI date for application Example last modified In a command line any keyword and argument is separated by one or several blanks Arguments may not contain blanks Keywords are not case sensitive but arguments are
51. image download If enabled the emulation remembers the images already sent to the printer This prevents the multiple download of one and the same image in the same print job Data volume to be sent to the printer is thus decreased performance is enhanced This optimization works only within a job and not for several jobs FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 118 The emulation deletes any information about downloaded images at the end of the job Default disabled 6 3 13 2 2 Resources Resource Path Define the path from where the PCL5 to PDF emulation can access resources like fonts etc Installation e Installed Resources This list shows the installed resource files e Install Click button to add new resources e Delete Click button to delete the selected resource D Be cautious The selected resource is completely deleted from the disk Undo is not possible 6 3 13 2 3 Default Font These parameters specify the default font for the printouts Spacing Default Fixed e Fixed Select Fixed for the default font to have fixed spacing e Characters per Inch Define the number of characters per inch if the default font is a fixed spaced font Available values are 5 10 12 15 17 20 27 Default 10 e Points Define the height of the characters in points if the default font is a proportional font Available values are 6 8 9 10 11 12 14 16 18 24 e Lines per Inch Define the number of lin
52. image macro after usage Raster images are usually sent as permanent macro to the printer and called on usage If this option is activated the macro will be deleted immediately after usage Print FORMS before page data Usually the variable data is printed first and then the form will be invoked overlay If this option is activated the form will be invoked before the variable data underlay Embedd form name via Alphanumeric ID Command When active the DJDE form name will be embedded into the generated PCL macro via the PCL Alphanumeric ID Command lt ESC gt amp n W using the operation code z e g for the form TEST FRM a lt ESC gt 8n5WzTEST would be embedded This shoud be usually ignored from a PCL interpreter For oversized paper only These settings are only valid for jobs using a paper size where the dimension X gt Y e g PAPERSIZE X Y 17 14 IMAGE Y X Offset Each raster image will be shifted with the given offset relative to the real position TEXT BEGIN vpos error correction On large paper sizes e g 17 x 14 Inch a error correction may be necessary The inserted value must be the expected error at the maximum paper size in 1 10 percent e g 5 for 0 5 Itis a linear error behavior in dependence to the distance assumed FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 158 Positioning error in A 0 5 00 Distance to origin 1 Maximum Paper Size 6 3 18 2 4 Resources These settings affect the treatmen
53. in the directory C FORMS4WORK and all files having extensions IN3 and IN4 in the directory D VINPUT Files can be excluded using a pattern starting with For example txt excludes all files ending with txt FORMS4WORK remembers the last entry you have made D see also Settings Protocol Input File Port No suitable protocols are available for file ports LPD The selection of LPD as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs LPD Settings Sessions Data Data Type Data Capturing Address LPD Input Microsoft Winsock 2 must be installed on the FORMS4WORK server This is the case with Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or higher and Windows 98 With Windows 95 an update available from Microsoft is necessary Address e Local Address Define the local IP address or DNS name of the network interface that is to receive the data If the computer has only one local address the field may remain empty If there are several local addresses set the one that should be used by the Input Port Default empty none Normally this field can remain blank FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 41 6 2 8 2 6 2 9 6 2 9 1 e Port Define LPD port on which the data is to be received With LPD connections using no protocol direct socket usually port 515 is used although selection of the port is free Default 515 Input Buffer Size Define size of input buffer This is the internal
54. lt ESC gt Cn comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt d lt ESC gt e lt ESC gt En comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt F comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt gaT X Y r S1 E1 Sn En lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt gbT X1 Y1 X2 Y2 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt gIT X1 Y1 X2 Y2 Xn Yn lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt gpT X Y r 1 F1 01 n Fn On lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt grM or Mx My I R X Y Xn Yn lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt gwM or Mx My I R X Y Sx Sy lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt h lt ESC gt in lt ESC gt ipn lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt j lt ESC gt k lt ESC gt I lt ESC gt M comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt mH T B L R lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt n lt ESC gt nfont name lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt nform name FRM lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt Nform name lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt p lt ESC gt P comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt q lt ESC gt Q comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt rDnc lt ESC gt s lt ESC gt T comment lt CR gt lt LF gt data record lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt tn1 n2 n8 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt u lt ESC gt U comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt V comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt vn1 n2 n8 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt w lt ESC gt X comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt xX Y L T S lt CR gt lt LF gt Command Font Add Text Placement Absolute Bold Start Font Del
55. media i e the output tray PCL printers do only support output to trays 1 and 2 as a standard The Output Bin Mapping option now enables to assign other output trays to the media destination IDs If the IPDS data stream does not FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 82 contain any media destination command the printer uses the default output tray Code Page Select the code page This parameter controls the use of the correct code page for the EBCDIC data stream from the host system if no other code page has been selected in the IPDS instructions Select the appropriate code page from the following possible values for the correct conversion of umlauts and special symbols 9 Old Icelandic 7 USA Canada CECP 8 US International ASCII 56 Dp International Set 5 59 Symbols Set 7 60 Canadian French 73 Germany F R Austria CECP 74 Belgium CECP 75 Brazil CECP 276 Canada French 94 277 Denmark Norway CECP 278 Finland Sweden CECP 280 Italy CECP 281 Japan Latin CECP 282 Portugal CECP 283 Spain 284 Spain Latin America CECP 285 United Kingdom CECP 286 Austria Germany 287 Denmark Norway 288 Finland Sweden 289 Spain 290 Japan Katakana 293 Apl USA 297 France CECP 310 Graphic Escape Apl Tn 340 4224 Resident Code Page 361 International Set 5 363 Symbols Set 8 367 ASCII 382 Austria Germany Switzerland 383 Belgium 384
56. occurs at the input port during reading the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next read attempt This prevents a slow input port slowing down the system by frequently repeated read attempts FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 146 Default 1000 msec e Delay before next try on write error Define the delay before next try on write error If a problem occurs at the output port during writing the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next write attempt This prevents a slow output port slowing down the system by frequently repeated write attempts Default 10 msec e Timeout for shutdown Define the time in milliseconds which the Print process shall wait for completion of the emulation thread If the set time has elapsed before the emulation thread has been terminated correctly by itself it will be terminated by the Print process D Ensure that you set an adequate time to allow the emulation thread to terminate by itself The set value should not generally be changed Default 5000 msec Bidirectional Communication e Produce ACK NAK responses Enable to produce ACK NAK responses When processing print jobs which are received through a Channel Input Port and when processing IPDS print jobs usually it is necessary to send feedback responses to the host system In other situations these responses might not be applicable For highest flexibility it can
57. of channel codes for any line makes possible direct addressing of those lines by appropriate advance commands The buffer has a maximum length of 255 bytes where each byte is related to one line of the form e Ignore FCB Enable to ignore forms control buffer Default disabled FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 61 When this check box is enabled FORMS4WORK will not verify received advance commands that will address to a channel stop if the desired channel stop is available in the FCB in use When this option is disabled FORMS4WORK will report a data check status to the host when the desired channel stop is not specified in the FCB in use e Suppress FCB Enable to suppress forms control buffer Default disabled When the check box Suppress FCB is enabled all FCBs loaded from the host will be ignored When this function is disabled any FCB loaded from the host will be accepted and used Suppress FCB is only available when Ignore FCB is enabled e Extended FCB Enable for extended forms control buffer function Default disabled Dependent on the used forms the length of a FCB normally will not have the whole capacity possible a 12 inches form has 72 lines when 6 lines per inches LPI density are used or 96 lines when 8 LPI are used If the system programmer is able to modify the FCBs of the host to append further information behind the termination byte this option can be used to download these extended FCB information to the conne
58. only lt filesize gt Size of the output file file ports only Device Assignment It is possible to connect alternative devices to an output port to which data will be sent If the main device is out of order or not available the alternative devices will be used This can be used to realize a simple kind of load balancing or a so called printer pool At maximum 10 alternative devices can be defined D Only devices connected to the same type of output port can be used as alternative devices This means it is not possible to use for example a device which is connected to an output port of type printer as an alternative device of an output port of type TCP IP Use if error occurred The priority of usage depends on the position in the list where high priority is placed on top and low priority on bottom If a print job could not be sent to the first device the second one will be used If the second device is also unavailable the third one will be tried and so on If all devices were not reachable the first one will be tried again Round robin For every print job the next device in the list is used Load Balancing Every print job will be sent to a device which is currently not used The priority of usage depends on the position in the list Use depending on page count For every device a lower limit of the page count can be specified Jobs will be sent only to the appropriate device The jobs have to be spooled so that the total page co
59. only available with ASCII formatted print jobs Using this button you will enter a dialog for paper oriented parameters concerning paper size orientation single side or double side printing Here you also define how your printer is switched to edge to edge printing Default Font D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs Using this button you will enter a dialog for setting up the default font for the printing of the print job data Possible settings are Usual Setting for using a standard PCL Font Font File for using a soft font from a file on disk User Defined for using a special PCL command i e if you want select a font from an additional font cartridge of the printer Using parameters Characters Per Inch and Lines Per Inch it is possible to control the size and the so called horizontal HMI or vertical VMI motion index the printer is using with the selected font PCL User Commands D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs Here you can add your own specific PCL commands which will be send for initialization at the beginning of the print job Page Separation Command D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs The character sequence which is defined here is interpreted as the page separator Using ASCII formatted data it is always the character for form feed FF 0C Other character strings can be used instead D This input field requires ch
60. parity from the pull down menu Available values none odd even mark space Default none e Stopbits Select the number of stopbits from the pull down menu Available values 1 1 5 2 Default 1 e Communication Select the handshake method from the pull down menu Available values none RTS CTS RTS CTS Handshake RTS CTS Toggle XON XOFF unknown printer Default RTS CTS Handshake RTS CTS handshake should be used wherever possible as the handshake method e Communication XON XOFF If the XON XOFF method is used the XON and XOFF character should also be defined e XON Limit Enter the XON Limit The XON limit defines the maximum number of bytes in the input buffer before the XON character is sent Default 65535 e XOFF Limit Enter the XOFF Limit The XOFF limit defines the maximum number of bytes in the input buffer before the XOFF character is sent Default 65535 e XON Character Define the XON Character Default 17 e XOFF Character FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 39 6 2 5 2 6 2 6 6 2 6 1 6 2 7 Define the XOFF Character Default 19 d see also Settings Protocol Input System Device No suitable protocols are available for system devices ESCON The selection of ESCON as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs ESCON Input Device Settings Sessions Data Type Data Capturing ESCON Input Device Define the ESCON device Default E
61. printer choose the print medium automatically based on the media type Fonts e Algorithm Select the font algorithm On printers with recent font headers which support a resolution of 600 dpi for download fonts instead of a conversion of the 240 dpi host fonts into a 300 dpi resolution it is also possible to select a conversion to 600 dpi This improves the quality of the output but adversely affects speed as a result of the considerably greater volume of data The PCL5 Technical Reference Manual recommends the use of the recent font header On printers that only support the older font headers the format of the header can be set using this parameter The possible settings are 300 dpi Old font header 240 gt 300 scaling alg 1 300 dpi New font header 240 gt 300 scaling alg 1 600 dpi New font header 240 gt 600 scaling alg 2 Default 300 dpi New font header 240 gt 300 scaling alg 3 300 dpi New font header 240 gt 300 scaling alg 4 600 dpi New font header 240 gt 600 scaling alg 5 e Outline Font DPI IPDS outline vector fonts are rendered into bitmap fonts by the emulation This value specifies the resolution for that bitmap font Remember The higher the resolution the better the print quality and the larger the amount of data generated Off means the Outline fonts are replaced by a Times Roman font of similar size e Use mass storage for download fonts For debugging purposes only Writes a copy of the incoming fonts into t
62. require only two values for this command Others such as UPC EAN and Code 128 require all four values 1 first narrowest width 2 second width 3 third width 4 fourth width 2 D BARCODES PDF 417 Symbol format parameters 1 Maximum number of rows for the PDF symbol 2 Maximum number of columns for the PDF symbol 3 1 1 and 2 are the mandatory size for the PDF symbol 0 or not specified 1 and 2 are maximum size default 4 1 The PDF 417 symbol is truncated on its right side 0 The PDF 417 symbol is not truncated default Example 8 columns 10 lines mandatory size non truncated 8 10 0b Data Matrix Symbol format parameters 1 Small module height in dots 1 720 inch Command Esc s 1 2 3 4S Selects space widths in dots 1 720 inch Some bar codes such as Interleaved 2 of 5 and Code 3 of 9 require only two values for this command Others such as UPC EAN and Code 128 require all four values 1 first narrowest width 2 second width 3 third width 4 fourth width 2 D BARCODES PDF 417 Symbol format parameters 1 Symbol black white module height compared to the width 1 to 10 Unit minimum module width default 3 2 X parameter for the symbol X Y size ratio default 2 for 2 3 3 Y parameter for the symbol X Y size ratio default 3 for 2 3 4 Symbol module width 1 to 100 Unit 1 100 inch default value 10 Example square PDF minimum module width half module s
63. selected Only available if Accessible is enabled Default 210 A4 Unit Select the unit for displaying the chosen paper size Only available if Accessible is enabled Available units are inch 1 1440 inch centimeters Default mm for paper size default A4 6 3 13 2 6 Performance Data Processing e Max block size for reading Define the maximum size in kilobytes which the emulation shall attempt to read at the Input port by means of one read access If there are fewer data there only so many bytes are read as actually exist If there are already more data there the maximum number of data that will be read corresponds to this value and the remaining data FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 122 are not read until the next read process D Frequent read access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB e Block size for output buffering Define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted The data processed by the emulation are passed to the output port To reduce the number of write access attempts at the output port a value can be entered here to define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted To turn off buffering set the value to 0 Frequent write access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB Timing e Delay before next try on read error
64. should be increased The buffer size of the output is normally 0 Serial Settings The data for a serial connection such as the baud rate number of data bits parity number of stop bits and the handshake method can be defined here If the system device is not a serial device this setting must not be activated RTS CTS handshake should be used wherever possible as the handshake method If the XON XOFF method is used the XON and XOFF character should also be defined the default values are ASCII characters 17 XON and 19 XOFF The XON limit defines the maximum number of bytes in the input buffer before the XON character is sent The XOFF limit defines the maximum number of bytes in the input buffer before the XOFF character is sent FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 221 6 6 5 6 6 5 1 File Filename Output File Port Converted data can be written to a file not only be sent to a printer Default Filename The file output port writes the data into the file defined here including path if Default device has been entered in the Logical Printer editor File patterns may also be entered In this case a new unique file name is then created for each job Entering C FORMS4WORK OUT BIN creates a file called OUTxxxx BIN for each job in the directory C FORMS4WORK Job specific data too can be used for file name creation The following fields can be used as variables lt jobname gt Name of the job lt jobnamenoext gt
65. stream can be configured here PIL e Use PIL Enable to use PJL Default enabled Controls the integration of PJL Printer Job Language instructions in the PCL5 data stream produced by the FOL to PCL emulation These instructions are used for example to control the finishing of the print jobs e Set PJL resolution Enable to set PJL resolution and select a resolution from the pull down menu Default disabled Default resolution 300 dpi With this option the printing resolution of the target printer can be configured Available resolutions are 100 150 200 300 600 1200 2400 Job step default action The finishing options of the print jobs like stitching stapling etc can be configured here e enable Enable one or more of the following options e Jog e Staple e Staple Flag Sheet Jog activates the job based jogging of print jobs Default enabled Staple activates the job based stapling of print jobs Default enabled Staple Flag Sheet Enabling this option will jog and staple the flag sheet of a print job together with the rest of the print job disabling this option will do an extra jogging and no stapling of the flag sheet page Default disabled e at Process label Enable one or more of the following options e Jog e Staple FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 68 6 3 7 2 2 Jog controls the jogging of print jobs while processing a process label of a FOL control file Default disabled Staple contr
66. the database file and the name of the data source This name will be used as database name in the job definition tree e Name This is the name of the data source as defined with the ODBC Manager applet e User Name Enter the user name of the database account for access to the data source e Password Enter the password of the database account for access to the data source e ODBC Manager Open the ODBC Manager to add change or remove data source definitions e Connect Establish a connection to the data source defined by the parameters This is mandatory to view tables Data Table FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 43 6 2 11 6 2 11 1 e Table Select an existing table or enter the name of a database table to be accessed You may also use wildcards as part of the name as e g Jobld_ or Data_Set_ The asterisk stands for any number of unknown characters the question mark represents one single unknown character e Report data to later components If enabled the data records retrieved from the data source are sent as print job data to any emulation configured with this input port Otherwise the emulation is only informed about new records and needs to access the data source by itself Default disabled e Delete records after processing If enabled after successful output the detected data records are deleted from the database table Otherwise all records are left and the data table is continuously growi
67. the login profile thus enabling the system operator to associate certain user groups to their own overlay e g its own letterhead for the marketing dept its own logo for the R amp D If the user does not want to use that form he or she can simply use another form name when printing We recommend to setup a default reply to the operator message prompting to use another form CSPSTRING Requires an alphanumeric argument CSPSTRING is case sensitive CSPSTRING searches the print data stream for the sequence CSPOVERLAY As argument from the data stream it uses the string that stands between the first and another exclamation mark The whole initial string is in the printout replaced with blanks It is recommended to put this command at the beginning or the end of the page Example CSPSTRING Letterheadl1 pastes the overlay if the print data stream contains the identification CSPOVERLAY Letterhead1 The text CSPOVERLAY Letterhead1 will be replaced in the printout with blanks FINDSTRING Requires an alphanumeric argument FINDSTRING is case sensitive FINDSTRING searches the print data stream for the sequence mentioned in the argument without affecting the print data stream The search sequence may not contain any blanks Example FINDSTRING assessment pastes the overlay if the data stream contains the word assessment The word assessment will not be replaced by blanks in the printout FINDSTRING2 Requires an alphanumeric argument FI
68. the source document so we choose Print Job as Code Source Alternatively you can define a static code inside the properties dialog of the barcode definition Code Source Barcode Definition Editor After defining Definition Name Barcode Type and Code Source you should enter the definition properties Dialog via context menue or with button named Definition properties Here you define the properties of barcode type specific parameters like HRT Human Readable Text bar and space width and bar height The options are the same as described above in Chapter 1 Generating a barcode by inserting a font like PCL sequence in your document If you are not familiar with barcode specific things you can use the supplied default parameters which are automaticly generated for every barcode type If the barcode requires a checksum it is calculated automatically For the 2D Datamatrix code showed in the example below the only barcode type specific parameter is the the small module height which defines the width and height of the smallest square entity of this code With 2D barcodes no HRT is printed In addition to the barcode type specific parameters there are some settings which have to be defined for all barcode types In the Position rotation dialog at least the x Position and y Position values have to be specified With this parameters the printing location of the barcode on the page is fixed The values are measured from the left top side of the sheet and
69. to job name 96 Add MVS job class tojob name 96 Analyze Mode 95 Bar Code Adjustment 89 Bit Images PCL Compressed 89 Check VPA 98 Conversion 93 CutLength 96 Cut Offset 96 Cut Sheet Emulation 79 Debug Level 93 Early AOS Trigger 87 Edit Resource Replacement 95 Emulation Loading 95 Enlarge GOCA raster images 98 FORMS4WORK Manual IPDS toPCL5 79 Extract job name from data stream 96 Extract job name from Group Boundary command 96 Face down printing 87 Finisher options 87 Font Algorithm 93 Hole Puncher 87 Host Communication 95 ID number 79 Input Tray 91 Input Trays 91 IOCAFS 79 IPDS Printer 79 IPDS Printer Code Page 79 IPDS Tray 91 Job Management 96 Job Management Split at output bin change 96 Job Management Wait for page confirmation 96 Job separation and finisher commands 87 Media Attributes 91 Media Type 87 Miscellaneous 98 128 Model number 79 Normal Printer Restart after job 95 Normal Printer Restart before job 95 Outline Font DPI 93 Output Bin Mapping 79 Overview 79 Page order 87 Paper Size 91 Paper Size Height 91 Paper Size lgnore Page Offset 91 Paper Size Rotate 91 Paper Size Wide carriage LEF 91 Paper Type 79 PCL Color Support 89 PCL Full Page 93 PCL Output 89 Plex mode 79 Print Direction Offsets 86 Printer Control 87 Printer Type 79 Resource Path 95 Resources 95 Scaling 86 Send IPDS variable spaces as PCL positioning command 87 Simula
70. to the configuration of the FORMS4WORK server which is running as system service You must have administrator access to use this function You can view or modify e Common server settings e Connectivity e Security options e Accounting options Common server settings Start Logical Printers at server start With this option enabled as the FORMS4WORK Server starts it will automatically activate the currently configured Logical Printers Default disabled after a delay of Used to delay the automatic start of Logical Printers by x number of seconds Delaying the start of Logical Printers might be necessary if more time is needed to load device drivers required by the FORMS4WORK Default 0 seconds no delay Restart not responding Logical Printers Enabling this option will cause the FORMS4WORK to attempt to recover lost connections If communication with a print process and its Logical Printers is lost the FORMS4WORK Server will attempt to re establish the connection Default disabled Size of event log files Define maximum size of event log file in kilobytes Default 2048 KB Connectivity Server Address Leave blank when the Print Server which runs FORMS4WORK server has only one IP address If multiple IP address s are used enter the local IP address or DNS name of the network interface which is to be used by FORMS4WORK server D If you enter an IP address for this option and the Print Server s IP address changes
71. valid parameters such as string length and string characters These command structure considerations should be followed when implementing bar code applications using the FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter The typeface parameter must always be specified since it directs processing to the bar code generation Characteristic values other than the default value must be explicitly specified If no value is specified the default value is used Previously specified non default values are not retained To print additional bar code data with the same characteristics as the previous data set a new cursor position and send just the bar code data It is not necessary to re send the escape sequence portion of the command When other characteristics are specified it must be in combination chained with the typeface characteristic The order in which the characteristics are combined does not matter Characteristics not combined chained with a bar code typeface value are processed as standard PCL emulation font text selection sequences Bar codes may be selected using either the primary font selection command Esc s T or the secondary font selection command Esc s T Available typefaces Typeface Barcode Symbology 24600 UPC_A FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 162 24610 24620 24630 24640 24641 24650 24651 24661 24670 24671 24690 24691 24700 24702 24704 24750 24751 24760 24761 24762 24763 24770 24771 24772 24850 248
72. you should activate the parameter This will increase the data throughput of the emulation since in this case the coordinates are transformed in the printer and not by the emulation This saves computer time Default disabled Force Duplex Printing Enable to force duplex printing This is used to define whether print jobs are printed duplex on both sides or not This assumes that the PCL printer you wish to use is capable of this Default disabled Copies By Emulation Enable to generate copies through the emulation Some printers do not support the PCL command Number Of Copies or they do not print the right number of copies If this option is active the IPDS to PCL5 Emulation will generate copies by sending the job data to the printer several times Default disabled Bar Code Adjustment To fine tune bar code output you may adjust the bars and gaps individually by single pixels Add or subtract pixels to the single double triple and quadruple width elements Use e g 2 to make a gap bar 2 pixels thinner Default all values set to 0 PCL offset registration fix Some PCL printers are not fully compatible to HP s specification of the offset registration lt ESC gt amp l U PCL command This is a workaround for such printers FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 91 Enhanced N UP via PCL macros Support for Enhanced N UP can only be done by packing the page partitions into PCL macros You might need to upgr
73. 0 Duplex Same as 3825 300 only advertised ID differs PRN4000 300 Duplex Advertises extended color capabilities and outline download font capability PRN4001 300 Duplex Advertises extended color capabilities FS4x and outline download font capability 3935 240 300 600 Duplex Set default dpi manually see remark Can be used to replace compatible printer running in 3935 mode 4234 240 Simplex Use for line printer data with simple graphics to replace dot matrix printers more features than 4224 Printer advertises resident fonts Default PRN4000 Default dpi Set the printer resolution in dots per inch dpi for the selected IPDS printer type Possible resolutions are 240 300 600 dpi Default Printer default that means default resolution of the selected IPDS printer type Variable dpi If set emulation advertises to the host that it can handle 240 300 and 600 DPI simultaneously in addition to the printer model s default resolution FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 81 Default disabled Plex mode Printer default Simplex Duplex Default Printer default ID number Model number Select an arbitrary ID and model number in variant to the selected Printer Type If ID number and Model number are both set to 0 default the printer ID will not be changed by the emulation Default 0 ID number Model number Example You would like to use features of the 3825 300 printe
74. 1 is to be printed with 2 copies The original page is to be printed using overlay A the first copy using overlay B and the second copy using overlay C Therefore enter at Page 1 Copy 1 the file for overlay A at Page 1 Copy 2 the file for overlay B and at Page 1 Copy 3 the file for overlay C FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 210 Background Overlay Enter name and path of the PCL file here to be added to the page before printing job data Rotation Select the rotation of the background overlay in steps of 90 degrees Foreground Overlay Enter name and path of the PCL file here to be added to the page after printing job data Rotation Select the rotation of the foreground overlay in steps of 90 degrees Paper Source This field controls the paper source for the page using the overlay Select the desired paper source of the printer from the list of paper trays Output Bin This field controls the output tray for the page using the overlay Select the desired output bin of the printer from the list of output bins Horz Text Offset Using this parameter you can move the output of the print job s text horizontally on the overlay The movement will be done relatively to the original position Vert Text Offset Using this parameter you can move the output of the print job s text vertically on the overlay The movement will be done relatively to the original position Duplexing Single side printed sheets can be changed t
75. 158 Resources 158 Ressource Script File Name 158 Run emulation in static mode 158 Index 235 X Metacode to PCL5 153 Split jobs on report boundary 155 Start Command 153 Suppress empty logical skip to channel 1 moves 156 System Generation 155 Target 158 Treat constant strings without qualifier 155 Verbose Level 158 Y X Offset in 1 300 inch 153
76. 2 Logical Printers 12 System Service 12 Program Interface 129 Miscellaneous 129 Performance 130 Protocol 224 Input Port 10 Output Port 11 TCP IP Port 224 Q Quit 24 R Raw to Raw 132 Common Behavior 132 Performance 132 Recordchange Filter 190 Configuration 191 Remove Logical Printer 19 Reprint 23 Requirements 8 Resources 53 95 114 Restore configuration 26 Round robin printing 214 Runconversion 21 S Scaling 86 Scheduled printing 218 219 Serial Settings 37 220 Server 12 13 15 16 17 Accounting 17 Address 15 Automatic start of Logical Printers 15 Common settings 15 Configuration 15 connecting to 13 DNS available 15 list 13 Logical Printers 15 Passwords 16 Port 15 Properties 15 Security 16 Start 15 TCP IP port 15 Timeout 15 Sessions 31 Settings 213 Setup Menu 26 Add logical printer 26 Backup 26 Edit logical printer 26 Print process 26 Remove logical printer 26 Server 26 SMTP Port 222 Confirmation 222 Default extension 222 Force extension 222 From address 222 Receiver 222 SMTP Port 222 SMTP Server 222 Username 222 SNA Port LU 6 2 48 Adapter 48 Connect Timeout 48 IDBLK 48 IDNUM 48 MAC Adresse 48 Remote Control Point 48 Remote Network Identifier 48 Retry connect after 48 SNA Connection 48 Strip 3270 orders 48 SNA Port LU1 LU3 47 Adapter 47 Connect Timeout 47 IDBLK 47 IDNUM 47 MAC Adresse 47 Retry connect after 47 SNA Connection 47 FORMS4WORK
77. 20 Cursor positioning Cursor positioning is set as follows when printing with the FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter Command Esc s P Esc s H Esc s V Esc s B Esc s S UPC_E EAN_8 EAN_13 INTERLEAVED_2_5 INTERLEAVED_2_5_CD INDUSTRIELL_2_5 INDUSTRIELL_2_5_CD MATRIX_2_5_CD CODE_39 CODE_39_CD CODE_93 CODE_93E CODE_128_AUTO CODE_128_B CODE_128_C CODABAR CODABAR_MOD16_CD MSI MSI_MOD10_CD MSI_MOD10_MOD10_CD MSI_MOD11_MOD10_CD POSTNET_5 POSTNET_9 POSTNET_11 PDF417_2D DATAMATRIX_2D Characteristic Determines location of human readable text printed with the bar code Selects the font used for human readable text Selects bar heights Selects bar widths Selects space widths e From the current cursor position bar code printing begins at the bottom left corner of the left bar e The cursor is located at the bottom right corner of the right bar when printing is complete e This cursor positioning applies both with and without accompanying human readable text Human readable text Human readable text can be specified with the bar codes e Six different typefaces are available for the text See the Esc s H command in PCL Emulation Escape Sequences e The specified text is automatically centered on the bar code e Text is automatically scaled based on the width and height of the bar code and on the method of embedding used Transparent Print Data command The Transparent Print Data command Esc
78. 2000 XP Server or NT 2000 XP Workstation Windows NT requires Service Pack 6 or above you can install Data Center on Windows 9x Me but it is not recommended Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Windows 2000 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and or other countries FORMS4WORK uses Info ZIP s compression utility Info ZIP s software Zip UnZip and related utilities is free and can be obtained as source code or executables from various anonymous ftp sites including ftp uu net pub archiving zip All trademarks and tradenames are the sole property of the respective companies O Software of the companies named Installation To install FORMS4WORK on your computer it must be set up using an operating system supported by FORMS4WORK Before installing the software ensure that the hardware components for data communication network adapter cables and other devices have been installed correctly The following supplied components are required for the installation e The FORMS4WORK installation CD e Your FORMS4WORK license number Read the license agreement carefully before you install and use the software If you use the software you declare your agreement to the terms of the license agreement D Follow the listed installation steps to set up FORMS4WORK properly on your computer All the information below refers to the use of FORMS4WORK with Windows NT 2000
79. 4WORK server 1 Double click the FORMS4WORK icon on your desktop or click Start choose Programs then FORMS4WORK and then FORMS4WORK The Connect to FORMS4WORK Server dialog box appears 2 Select a FORMS4WORK Server from the server list 3 Click on the appropriate access level button 4 Enter the password assigned to you by the administrator and click Connect 5 The FORMS4WORK user interface appears Server List Displays the list of the available FORMS4WORK servers found in the same LAN in this particular case in the same IP subnet and which are running Password Access to a FORMS4WORK server can be restricted by means of three passwords In this way the access levels to the server are controlled dependent on the password given when logging in Connect Click this button after you have selected a server from the server list Add Enter DNS name or IP address The Add button opens the Add Server dialog box where you can add an additional server to the server list Enter the domain name or IP address for the server that couldn t be found automatically See Connecting to a server for more information Remove Remove selected server from server list The button will be disabled if you select a server that is currently connected or has been found automatically Access levels The FORMS4WORK server software provides the choice of three access levels Administrator Operator and Guest Administrator Administrator acce
80. 6 2 1 Output Ports Overview Output ports are used as ports for the output of print data Currently two different output types are supported Channel System Device File Printer SMTP TCP IP Local TCP Fiery To define a new output To define a new output port in the system proceed as follows 1 In the main program window select a Logical Printer 2 Edit the highlighted Logical Printer either by clicking on the Edit Logical Printer button or by menu setup edit Logical Printer 3 Select the current output default Fiery from Output Interface 4 Click on Remove to remove the current output 5 Click on Add to add a new output 6 A dialog box appears Select the required output from the list 7 Click OK The new output is now active Properties Fiery Connection IP Address Enter IP Address or DNS name of the Fiery Controller Username Enter username for connecting to the Fiery Controller Default admin Password Enter password for connecting to the Fiery Controller Properties Logical Printer Select logical printer of the Fiery Controller where the print jobs will be sent to FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 213 Possible values are e direct e print e hold Default print Timeout Set timeout for the communication with the Fiery Controller Possible values range from 3 to 120 seconds Default 30 seconds Disconnect after job transmission Enable thi
81. 6 3 14 6 3 15 6 3 16 6 3 17 JODIMAN ATOM A A a e o it 96 MiscOllane0US coi AA a a arD 98 PDS Overlay SUPple Mei id data 101 O Space sites coed E E E tebeaancouaedsedvaeuncecauavapassueneense 101 Generating Overlay ReSOUrCES 4ccra ci tddi bd bes 101 Path tothe IPDSOVERIINI Tle ranas 101 Pathol the RESQUICEOS wis icicds deceive dain ice de clesanditdal in ligt aa eb 102 Structure of the IPDSOVER INI TE cocinas cia ia EET REEE 102 COMME Sci A A cd 102 COMMAND A AAA 102 Sheet and page counter Simplex and duplex printino ooooooocccnnnnonnccccccccnccnnnanaccnanonananancnnnnn 103 Definition Sennaa sates coed yds cet 103 RU OS cin ti di a eee ah ii ales Ee A a eh Alcea ei debi 104 Examples for individual FUNCOMS isise eissidein anadai adriaan eaea aada akaa aa aai 107 Examplefor n applications isenesest lada dl ad 108 PGES to PDE Emulation iaa a A A A S 109 OVEIVIOW aii a 109 Parameters aii A A A AA A AA 109 POF COMMO ctnioididadl id a a ia 109 PDE Miscellaneous ad 110 PDF Ecco A ieee eee 111 PDF Signatures iA cinAtet Aceh aia ai aea aaa ea OE a E TE aE E Aan Adan Amaia 112 PCE Defaults void dd de te 112 RESOURCES ici A A EA pa 114 Job Controller ooo e A Ian 114 POL tO PDF sms maior ada 115 JA AAA 115 O Wi Aro Es 115 A ea rile alee ie ls He le 115 EmUulationivacaiiins decir At ter A ded deta A A TAEA EATE 115 RROSOUMCOS votada did tt ddd ell td A et 118 Default On bess cada o A e
82. 6 ESCON aida ESCON Input va 6 2 7 ile ono e E E A E File pUe saneso as o A deee e daas Protocol Input File Port ves ie er see gt 6 2 8 MSP ii ea 6 2 9 6 2 10 6 2 11 Parallel INput cece ccc ceca cass cece T E E E E E E E Parallel Input System Device Es 6 2 12 POPS E sete ssccsy sues stee sted saabecade ened shone sduersauesdedsaedecadegvenessecsvduesseue E POP Si Ub ti data AA Adi teas 6 2 13 PPD siiis i Addr ss PPD IMput us AAA A Ae tada Protocol PPD INpub iiicn ies Ane eed a A ied Loa aidan A AA 6 2 14 SNA LU1 LU3 00 SN US A asndan ps eiriaa ieaS ar sakane dadia aeaa f iaiia ia daaa raaraa afaa Protocol SNA Port LUTEUS isise AA 6 2 15 SNA LU 6 2 siiis iaiia SNA LU 6 2 Connection Protocol SNA Port LW Gi2 ss 00 es aC a a aagi 49 6 2 16 TCP IP Contents Ill 6 2 17 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 8 6 3 9 6 3 10 Emulations Address TCP IP publi ibi 49 Protocol TCP IP Input jccac Aza teenies a AAA AAA 50 O Ceeueieisssusenansietouacese 50 MP Waite MPUEIP OME in a a A a ata 50 A 51 INtrodUCtON kiinaa raaa reai it 51 Performante ai E a aAa Eaa aAa aANT ESA Ea AEAEE E aaa ER 51 RESOUNCOS CPC OPPDARO Pon TAO 53 Barcode Label SoftWare oia A A AA a aa 53 DU a 53 Chained Emulation iii A A A NENEN NEAKEN 53 OVA tios 53 Channel lEM latioM ooo A A dei A AA AN S 54 DU ii 54 ParametelS otto ea tas eelicn ae teed 54 Printer TYPE kedisine eana aan
83. 8 1 Exclude Macro 1D s This allows individual definition of PCL macro ID intervals that should not be used by the emulation With the default setting the emulation starts for PCL macros by the assignment of the ID O and continues in ascending order to 32767 Split job after lt n gt times XES reset command This setting causes a split of an incoming XES print job after a XES reset command has been detected lt n gt times For example a large print job can be split into smaller print jobs Also if no specific criterion exists for the end of a print job and therefore all print jobs from the host system are processed in the ProductNames system as a single job a forced split can be achieved using this parameter Reconfigure printer after splitting If you use the option Split job after lt n gt times XES reset command it may be necessary to re initialize the output device at the start of a print job If this option is active the emulation will conduct the initialization automatically each time a print job is split X Metacode to PCL Overview This chapter describes all the parameters of the FORMS4WORK emulation X Metacode to PCL5 All The parameters are default values In the configuration dialog for this emulation you will find the following property pages Start Command System Generation Miscellaneous Resources Messages Finisher Options Color 6 3 18 2 Parameter 6 3 18 2 1 Start Command START Command This option a
84. A file port for example checks the specified directory at regular intervals for new data so that it can then process them D Frequent monitoring increases the workload of the computer The value should therefore not be made too low A higher value will only mean that a received job is identified a little later so it is quite FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 32 6 2 2 3 6 2 2 4 acceptable for this value to be several seconds Default 1000 msec Job start sound Define a job start sound At arrival of a print job a sound can be played Therefore the name of a sound defined in the Control Panel a wave file or 1 for a short signal can be entered here Leave this field empty for no sound Default empty no sound Data Input Interface Decompress and decrypt data automatically Enable to let FORMS4WORK decode compressed or encrypted data automatically that comes from another FORMS4WORK system Default disabled e Password Enter password used by the other FORMS4WORK system Use job information within data stream when receiving data from a FORMS4WORK output interface Enable to let the input interface interpret additional job information If data is received from a FORMS4WORK output interface additional information about a job e g job name can be transferred before the print data If this option is enabled the input interface interprets this information To use this feature the corresponding option of the
85. B 2087 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic OCR A 2088 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic OCR A 2089 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic OCR A 2090 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic 2091 6670 Symbol Set Os 6 2092 6670 Symbol Set 12 Pitch 2093 6670 Symbol Set 10 Pitch 2094 Lcs 3800 1 Format Characters 2095 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic Katakana 2096 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic 2097 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic 2098 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic 2099 Lcs 3800 1 Text 1 amp 2 2100 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic 2101 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic 2102 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic Katakana 2103 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic Katakana 2104 Lcs 3800 1 Gothic 2105 Lcs 3800 1 Text 1 amp 2 2116 United Kingdom DUBASE 2117 Keyboard 253 U K Special FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 86 These parameters define the position of the output on the physical page This is done by moving it in the appropriate direction X or Y direction Tray Select the paper tray number for which you the Tray Alignment settings shall apply Default tray number 0 Unit Select the unit for the tray alignment settings Offset Parameters are designed to move the output on the page Positive values move the output away from the origin i e left top Negative values move it closer to the origin Possible settings are e 1 1440 inch e inch e cm Default 1 1440 inch Whole Page Offsets Frontside Duplex back side These parameters are moving the page as a whole For front and back sides for duplex printing of a sheet different values can be chosen X
86. BIN to HC OUTPUTBINS Output bins of a high capacity option Default AUTOMATIC Enable or disable encryption of the document The access permissions of an encrypted document can be additionally specified Encryption NONE No encryption will be used 40 bit compatibility PDF 1 2 Reader 3 x Encrypts the document utilizing RC4 encryption with 40 bit The document may be viewed with Adobe Reader 3 x and above 128 bit compatibility PDF 1 4 Reader 5 x Encrypts the document utilizing a stronger RC4 encryption with 128 bit Additionally there can be more access permissions specified The document may be viewed with Adobe Reader 5 x and above Passwords Specify a user password required to open the document and or a owner password required to change permissions and the passwords e Opening the document with the correct user password or opening a document that does not have a user password allows additional operations to be performed according to the user access permissions specified in the document s encryption dictionary e Opening the document with the correct owner password assuming it is not the same as the user password allows full owner access to the document This unlimited access includes the ability to change the document s passwords and access permissions D The document can be encrypted without specifying any password User When a user password ist set the Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat requests this password b
87. CR gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt FF gt Default Tray Select the default tray for feeding paper Only trays which have been made accessible in the Trays configuration page are available Default 1 Default accessible 1 2 Copies Define the default number of copies for each printed page Values from 1 to 999 are supported Default 1 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 117 Edge to edge Enable to use edge to edge printing Some PCL printer models can print the whole page other models have unprintable areas at the edges of the page This option allows you to select whether the entire page should be used for the output or whether unprintable areas at the edges of the page should be emulated Printing over the entire page should only be enabled if it has been ensured that this option is supported by your application Default disabled Generate JDE entry Enable to generate a JDE Job Descriptor Entry This check box is only available in XEROX META mode If enabled a JDE entry call to the label XASC is inserted into the data stream at the beginning of each job Run emulation in static mode Enable to run emulation continuously Disable to finish emulation after each job This controls whether the PCL5 to PDF emulation is unloaded between the incoming print jobs dynamic mode or whether it remains loaded for the entire duration of the Print processes static mode Default disabled Keep downloade
88. DOC123 DOC744 and others as found within the print job data Default Scan for set of constant triggers Significant size of data This is used with method Scan for one trigger followed by variable data and defines the number of characters or digits to be used for the variable part of the criterion Trigger Sequence Each trigger sequence is used as a criterion to be searched on each page If found the page is assigned to a partial job depending on the selected method Characters which may not be typed in using the keyboard can be entered with a percent sign following a two digit hex code e g 0d for carriage return To use the doubled percent sign type To add lines for further trigger sequences click on the header line of the grid and press the Insert key To remove a line click into a column of the line to be removed the click on the header line and press the Del key With method Scan for one trigger followed by variable data only one trigger sequence is allowed Valid FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 188 6 4 7 3 Until next trigger All pages passing by after the page with the trigger sequence found are classified the same way as the page containing the trigger until another trigger is found This is also done for subsequent pages containing no trigger One page only The next page after the page with the trigger sequence found is classified as unassigned if there is no trigger sequence presen
89. Ei triumph Adier FORMS4WORK Version 1 5 User Manual FORMS4WORK User Manual All rights reserved No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems without the written permission of the publisher Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and or registered trademarks of the respective owners The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document Printed Mai 2006 Contents l Table of Contents 1 Introduction 8 2 Requirements 8 3 Installation 8 4 Principles 9 4 1 COMPONENTS siiin naeran anaa aca 9 4 2 The Standard Application icce ccsscecsecciscesscsscecessceceencasensenseceeeeesasnenoecscerenastanctiectseresactanssiecnreres 10 4 3 Input Interface ln Detail sirsenis nA EE Eaa AA EAEra AAA RRE 10 A A Emulation In Detailseite aaar iaasa an ERA 10 4 5 Output Inter
90. FFF Default empty none Adapter FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 49 6 2 15 2 6 2 16 6 2 16 1 Set the logical adapter number of the network interface in the FORMS4WORK Server system which is to be used for communication with the host system If there is only one network interface this value is to be set to 0 With several interfaces installed here you decide which one is to be used by the input port Default 0 Connect timeout Set the connection timeout in seconds After this interval is elapsed without having established a connection the FORMS4WORK client is no longer searching for a connection An error message is displayed Default 30 seconds Retry connect after Set the time in seconds after which the port will try again to get a connection Default 30 seconds Remote Network Identifier Define the name of the network in which the printer resides For AS 400 hosts use APPN Default empty none Remote Control Point Define the name the host is using for its application control point For AS 400 hosts set the name of the controller to be configured Default empty none see also Settings Protocol SNA Port LU 6 2 SNA LU 6 2 together with SNA port TCP IP The selection of TCP IP as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs TCP IP Settings Sessions Data Data Type Data Capturing Address TCP IP Input D Microsoft Winsock 2 must be installed on the FOR
91. L page size command is sent If User defined format is assigned an arbitrary paper size can be set using the appropriate parameters Default Tray 0 contains Undefined format e Short edge feed paper Enable to allow compatibility to various XES printers for example Xerox 3700 or Xerox 4235 Default disabled If a paper input tray has been defined as a short edge feed paper a portrait font must be selected for example to print a landscape page or a landscape font to print a portrait page D The four extra offset parameters for Short edge feed under Common Page Settings Visible window short edge offset Visible window long edge offset Vector short edge offset Vector long edge offset apply for a page printed in this way The four offset parameters for Long edge feed apply for all others This means that the outputs from different paper trays may be offset independently of each other D If DIN A5 has been assigned the page is printed in landscape PCL page orientation command lt ESC gt amp 1 0 is used In addition the vector offset DIN A5 parameter apply using which the page can be offset D Short edge feed paper should not be used in conjunction with DIN A5 because the orientation has FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 145 already been changed by the page orientation command Defaults e Default Stacker Define the standard output bin The XES tray number is given in other words this number is converted to the appropria
92. MS4WORK server This is the case with Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or higher and Windows 98 With Windows 95 an update available from Microsoft is necessary Local Address FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 50 6 2 16 2 6 2 17 6 2 17 1 Define the local IP address of the network interface that is used to receive the data If the computer has only one local address the field may remain blank For a computer with multiple network interfaces or multiple IP addresses you can limit to a single IP address Leaving it blank in such a case makes FORMS4WORK receive data from all IP addresses Default empty use all available IP addresses Port Define TCP port on which the data is to be received With TCP IP connections using no protocol direct socket usually port 9100 is used although selection of the port is free D If the incoming data was sent by a FORMS4WORK Local TCP Output Port be sure to activate the Decompress and decrypt data automatically option Default 9100 Input Buffer Size Define size of input buffer This is the internal buffer size for storage purposes when data is received If data arrives more quickly than it can be processed it is placed in a buffer Default 256 KB d see also Settings Protocol TCP IP Input e LPD LPR Line Printer Daemon Line Printer Remote printer protocol e PPD PPR AFP IPDS printer protocoll e PJL Printer Job Language for status readback Twain The selection of Twa
93. Manual SNA Port LU1 LU3 47 Strip 3270 orders 47 W SNMP 27 Specimen Application 12 Warning notes 18 23 Spooling 218 219 Watch Print Devices 27 Input Port 10 Wide carriage LEF 91 Output Port 11 Scheduled Printing 219 X Start 21 24 Starting 12 XES to PCL5 134 Stop 21 24 Commands 134 135 Stringchange Filter 202 Common Behavior 152 Configuration 202 203 Common Page Settings 136 Definition of Replacements 203 Duplex Settings 140 System Device 37 43 220 Emulation 147 System Service 12 Not supported commands 135 Number Of Copies 139 T Offsets 136 Page Layout 140 TCP IP Port 49 223 Partial supported commands 135 Buffer Size 49 PCLS Printer Type 141 Default Remote Address 223 Performance 145 Input Buffer Size 223 Resources 149 Linger Timeout 223 Scaling 138 Local Address 49 223 Supported commands 134 Port 49 223 Tray Mapping 143 Protocol 224 X Metacode toPCL5 153 Protocol LPR 224 Category 158 Test Logical Printer 21 Collating Multiple Copies 153 Textextractor Filter 203 Goler 199 Application 203 Copies 153 Configuration 204 Destination Printer Feature 153 Delimiter 204 Edge to Edge 193 Optimize 204 Feed input tray select assignments 155 Theory 9 Finisher Options 159 Threads 11 P Performance 11 Global 188 JDE JOB 153 Timeout 15 31 JDL 153 Tray Alignment 86 JSL Column Width 155 Trays 86 91 JSL File Name 155 Twain Port 50 Messages 158 V Miscellaneous 156 Paper Size 155 Process Mode 153 View job 25 Resource Path
94. NDSTRING2 is case sensitive FINDSTRING2 searches the print data stream for the sequence mentioned in the argument without affecting the print data stream The search sequence may not contain any blanks FINDSTRING2 is to be used in conjunction with FINDSTRING in order to achieve an AND condition when searching for two words on the same page Example FINDSTRING John FINDSTRING2 Doe pastes the overlay if the data stream contains the words John and Doe These two words will not be replaced by blanks in the printout JOG Does not have any arguments The condition JOG is true if the print data stream contains the command Alternate Offset Stacker AOS JOG can also be used to separate print jobs The operator may create it by using the FORMDEF command JOG OUTPUT FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 107 Example JOG pastes an overlay on the first sheet of a new print job If one of the rules contains conditions that scan the sheet counter FROM TO or STEP it is recommended to combine JOG with RESETCOUNTER RESETCOUNTER Does not have any arguments If a rule uses RESETCOUNTER the sheet counter will be reset to 1 when the other conditions in this rule become true In print jobs with a fix number of pages we recommend to combine RESETCOUNTER with FROM and TO In print jobs with a variable number of pages we recommend to combine RESETCOUNTER with JOG FINDSTRING or CSPSTRING Example RESETCOUNTER MEDIASOURCE MEDIASOURCE req
95. Offset D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs Using this parameter you can move the output of the print job s text horizontally on the overlay Vert Text Offset D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs Using this parameter you can move the output of the print job s text vertically on the overlay Fonts D This options are only available with ASCII formatted print jobs Trigger String Here you enter a list of character sequences Trigger String which correspond to fonts or PCL command sequences for font selection If one of these character sequences is found in the print data it will be replaced by the corresponding PCL command sequence or the corresponding PCL soft font which was read from the entered font file will be activated Font File PCL Command Using the button you will enter a dialog for setting up the default font for the printing of the print job data Possible settings are Usual Setting for using a standard PCL Font Font File for using a soft font from a file on disk User Defined for using a special PCL command i e if you want select a font from an additional font cartridge of the printer Using parameters Characters Per Inch and Lines Per Inch it is possible to control the size and the so called horizontal HMI or vertical VMI motion index the printer is using with the selected font FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 212 6 6 6 6 1 6 6 2 6
96. S 370 byte or word record lengths format This is a typical format of a BARR PC spooling system There are two S 370 record formats available S 370 byte length and S 370 word length record format Files in S 370 record format have a 4 byte format header at the beginning of the file MA Ed E E Format of files in S 370 record format The header indicates which format byte or word length is being used therefore the filter detects automatically which format is used based on the header AA Format header S 370 byte length record format FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 193 PAE Format header S 370 word length record format If the format is selected as input format of the Recordchange filter you can configure here whether the filter has to remove the BARR spool header record and or the BARR FCB record from the data stream Details on this data format can be found in the documentation of the BARR S 370 spool software If this format is selected as output format of the Recordchange filter the S 370 word length record format will be used You can configure here the settings for the BARR spool header record the BARR FCB record and the BARR spool trailer record For the possible values see the BARR S 370 spool software documentation The parameter JOB NAME of the BARR spool header record is configured by the filter software automatically with the name of the current print job begin record length length info end record length A A
97. S Bridge SNI 3338 SNI 3348 SNI 3365 Default IBM 3211 This menu allows to select the type of printer which will be emulated by FORMS4WORK to the connected host on the channel interface The printers IBM 3211 IBM 4245 IBM 4248 SNI 3338 39 and SNI 3348 are fanfold impact printers which are equipped with exchangeable print bands The IBM 3825 is an IPDS printer When using this emulation the channel card makes a normal printer restart after the start of the channel driver The IPDS Bridge works with the IBM 3825 driver but makes no normal printer restart after the start of the channel driver The printer SNI 2050 2075 3365 are cut sheet laser printing systems which are able to print simplex duplex from several paper trays and to stack the paper into different output trays Besides those printers are able to use different fonts forms and overlays when the required resources are stored on the printers hard disk drive before Channel Address Enter channel address in hexadecimal code The channel address identifies the byte address of the emulated printer which is used with channel protocol Default AE hex for device 1 AF hex for device 2 Channel Timeout Set timeout of the channel input device in seconds Possible values O 300 sec Default 45 seconds Don t stop channel input service when stopping print process FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 35 6 2 4 6 2 4 1 Enable to keep from stopping the ch
98. S Control File path file name is shown below Centralized Channel 3211 is similar to Channel 3203 The length of the Universal Character Set Buffer is different to the UCSB of a IBM 3203 5 For this output type no data checking is designed Decentralized with CR LF FF is used as a synonym for de centralized printers which are equipped with either parallel Centronics or serial RS232 or LAN interfaces When this output type is selected FORMS4WORK converts paper advance information of the received channel commands into the appropriate number of printer control codes pcc carriage return CR line feed LF and form feed FF The output data stream has the following format data pcc The print data will be converted as specified in section Translation Table Decentralized with PC Code is similar to ASCII In contrast to the ASCII mode FORMS4WORK will not convert the received channel commands into the appropriate number of printer control codes carriage return line feed and form feed but will include the channel command byte in the output data stream to the connected printer The output data stream has the following format pec data delimiter The pcc byte represents the channel command byte and a carriage return x 0D and a line feed x 0A are used as delimiter The print data will be converted as specified in section Translation Table The selection of this output type requires a printer which can interpret the pcc byte VFU Th
99. SCONIN O ESCON Address Select ESCON address in hexadecimal code Default 1A Strip channel commands Enable to strip channel commands This switch controls whether PCC bytes PCC Printer Control Character i e control commands for line feed and form feed are passed to the emulation by the ESCON Input or not The Channel Emulation and the X Metacode to PCL emulation are in need of these PCC Bytes the IPDS to PCL emulation does not know about them because line feeds and form feeds are already present in the IPDS data Default enabled D see also Settings File The selection of File as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs File Settings Sessions Data Data Type Data Capturing FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 40 6 2 7 1 6 2 7 2 6 2 8 6 2 8 1 File Input Enter the file name from which the data is read Click on the button on the right hand side to search for an Input Interface pattern The input interface monitors the specified directory and starts to process the file as soon as it is available and not locked by another process It is also possible to enter wildcards For example if you enter C FORMS4WORK BIN the system will process all files with the extension BIN in the directory C FORMS4WORK Several patterns separated by semicolon can be used For example C FORMS4WORK IN1 IN2 D INPUT IN3 IN4 will process all files having extensions IN1 and IN2
100. SEa EE E E E AEREE 217 A NA 218 Scheduled printing dic A Ai 219 A A ON 220 Channel Ouiput actos a O AAA Aa 220 System Device conmocccccccnnconcccnncnnnnnas w 220 System Device Output Poma Ad AAA 220 Ann O o ssuesndeauee snaasiacaed0saedaues steesnteeaen rs 221 Filename Output File Pob is 221 Printers pusvsicionnoa aia aabagcitcautavaadd saicegeseaanteaduanaiaceapaensieisdaacanaaesidnias 222 O ON 222 SMTP 2 222 SMTP ciar A A a AA 222 APP O 223 Address TCP IP ti 223 Contents VII Protocol TEMP as 224 UPR OUUU cniinne aeaaea Ata iki Aba eee ee eens Absent At aaa 224 6 6 9 UG AE EE nn noe 225 Fiery QUITA ci 225 Index FORMS4WORK Manual Introduction 8 1 Introduction FORMS4WORK connects printing systems of different performance classes to various LAN and host topologies The usage of an emulation enables conversion of various data streams into standard data formats such as PCL and PDF which can be understood by the printing system FORMS4WORK therefore secures investments in expensive hardware and specially developed software Thus high performance printers can be used by non compatible data sources as well Moreover older printer models can be replaced with more powerful printing systems Requirements System requirements for FORMS4WORK Hardware Monitor keyboard mouse CD ROM drive 128MB RAM TCP IP connectivity over Ethernet or Token Ring Operating system Microsoft Windows NT
101. System Device as an input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs Device Settings Sessions Data Data Type Data Capturing System Device Input Port Device Select required device or port from the pull down menu The list contains all the known system devices on the system If the required system device is not included in the list it can be entered manually Default no device selected empty Queue sizes Device internal buffer size for receiving and sending data If read errors occur when data are being received it may be due to the fact that the data cannot be processed quickly enough which causes the device internal buffer to overflow In this case the input buffer size should be increased The buffer size of the output is normally 0 e Input Enter device internal buffer size for the Input Default 128 KB e Output Enter device internal buffer size for the Output Default 0 KB Serial Settings Active Enable to enter data for a serial connection i e baud rate number of data bits parity number of stop bits and handshake method D If the system device is not a serial device this setting must not be activated e Baud Select a baud rate from the pull down menu Available rates 4800 115200 Default empty none e Databits Select the number of databits from the pull down menu FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 38 Available numbers 5 8 Default 8 e Parity Select the
102. There are options for Never no VPA boundaries are checked This is the default setting Auto the VPA boundaries are checked if the host system has sent an Exception handling control EHC command with the Report Position flag set Always the VPA is checked and the EHC flag is ignored The Check VPA feature does not apply to secure overlays IPDS input tracing For debugging purposes only If enabled an IPDS input trace taken directly at the emulation s entry point is written into the emulation s resource folder Useful if IPDS is a secondary emulation e g if it is coupled with the Comparex Line Mode emulation Default Input trace off FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 101 IPDS Overlay Supplement This chapter describes the Overlay Supplement options of the IPDS to PCL5 emulation With the Overlay Supplement the user will be able to add user defined page elements The Overlay Supplement is available in IPDS emulation version 2 00 114 and higher The Overlay Supplement enables the user to add recurring supplements such as standard texts images or forms to an existing print job These supplements will be furthermore referred to as Overlay Resources or Overlays respectively Overlay Resources can be created by any Windows application using the Resources Printer Driver Definitions D Be careful not to confuse those overlays with the overlays that are generated on the host IPDS Page Segment An overlay generated on
103. We doe didn de ti duce Wale deeded Linde 147 RESOURCOS ii A late 149 CommoniBeh avion A AA Ur a 152 X Metacode to POL cio a 153 OVENI OW venaient ds ad oed didaa ti 153 O A O 153 Slant COmMana sis dsssb Avecir ace eect 153 system GeneraliOnin cA ceed deal AG Adee dd iaa 155 Miscellaneous tidad dd Aid diverts dee decker edd 156 RESOURCES iia AA AA ae 158 MESAS ii A ese eee ea a eu 158 Finisher OPON Sisenen iain aie A al en Aden eA Ai 159 COMO stines vcd yeti hele dewewedt esl cold tdanccl daily dled wevedevile ital entered ieee eee dla adie 159 OV OIVIOW iii A AA AAA AA 160 Barcode Eller icons A A 161 PPC ANON sota alertas dot clea 161 Barcode SIMM Emulaci n iaa 161 Barcode and Field Sanne eccccccceeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeesaaaaeeceeesseaaaaaeeseeeeeeaaaeeeeeesseenanaees 165 Codepage Filter sissit nasrni a paai paa naaa rigar Seireadar peaca Aaaa Eanna 168 O CA 168 NT Language Palkia as 168 A O Or PUE oO II restore aera eects ae 169 Pateh Tal it 169 ConditionalStringchange Filter wo ooo ii A TAE RATA AO IAE 170 APpliCA ON tr das 170 GOnTquratiON aries dae ale adeno ne siten E onsen does E Meme see peat sas 170 Definition OF a A0ig GON saat sis os Sere rc tecsieccmce cate E Em Sladen EE EEEE E REAS 171 Definition of a replacement ooooocccccccccncccocccoconanenoncnonononnnonnnnnnnnnnnn nro nn a nn r anne nn rnrn rn nan nen nrnrnrnnnnenennrnrnnannnencnns 172 Field Scanner Filter siissisccicecccasssteescciecev
104. XP The installation of FORMS4WORK essentially consists of six steps dL 1 step Boot your computer Log on with an account that has administrator rights 2 step Insert the supplied installation CD into the CD drive in your computer If the installation program does not start automatically start Windows Explorer to install FORMS4WORK Open the CD directory FORMS4WORK Basis using Explorer and from there start the program FORMS4WORK exe FORMS4WORK Manual Installation 9 3 step Follow the instructions of the installation program Enter your FORMS4WORK license number as soon as you are asked to do so You find the license number on the license card supplied with the software ul 4 step Reboot your computer as soon as you are asked to do so by the installation program Log on again with an account that has administrator rights 5 step Start the FORMS4WORK system service by using the administration applet for Services from the System Control Select FORMS4WORK Server TCP IP from the list of system services and click on Start To start FORMS4WORK automatically after a system start you will have to change the start options of the service from Manual to Automatic 6 step As soon as the system service has been started you can set up the print processes you require using the FORMS4WORK Client application for setting up Input Ports Emulations and Output Ports see Configuration Principles Components The co
105. a manufacturer dependent subset or all of the following types of information FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 28 Information IP Address MAC Address Hostname Model Type System Location System Contact Impressions Running since Input Trays Markers Description IP address assigned to the printer MAC address of the printers network interface Name assigned to the printer for DNS resolution Manufacturer dependent model type description Location of the printer Email contact of the printers administrator Number of printed impressions during lifetime or since last power on of the printer Time when the printer was powered on The amount of paper available in the paper trays Amount of paper is given in remaining percent as far as the printer is supporting this type of information The amount of toner available at the printer Amount of toner is given in remaining percent as far as the printer is supporting this type of information Printers monitored using PJL do not deliver a unique structure of information The amount and extent of information depends on manufacturer and model type Configuration Introduction Set up the FORMS4WORK Server 1 In the Main Window of the Client open Setup menu 2 Click Server 3 In the dialog configure the server options Set up a Print process 1 In the Main Window of the Client open Setup menu 2 Click Print Process 3 In the dialog co
106. a can be written into the file and the job can continue to be processed the external access to the file must be terminated If a file is write protected FORMS4WORK will also be unable to output to this file FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 222 6 6 6 6 6 6 1 6 6 7 6 6 7 1 Printers Printers Default Printer The list contains all the printers known to the operating system Windows NT 9x The required printer can be selected or an arbitrary printer which exists in the network can be specified manually to which the data are to be output If a printer is added in Windows it will appear in the list after the next start of the FORMS4WORK Server If you want to use a printer which is currently not displayed in the list you can enter the name of the printer manually SMTP SMTP D Microsoft Winsock 2 must be installed on the FORMS4WORK server This is the case with Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or higher and Windows 98 With Windows 95 an update available from Microsoft is necessary FORMS4WORK is able to send print jobs as emails using a mail server To do this a mail server using SMTP protocol is required and some parameters which are defined in this dialog page SMTP Server The hostname or the IP address of the mail server which is to be used for sending the print jobs If a hostname is entered here instead of an IP address resolving via DNS must be guaranteed SMTP Port The TCP port which is to be used for communicatio
107. able to finish emulation after each job This controls whether the PCL5 to PDF emulation is unloaded between the incoming print jobs dynamic mode or whether it remains loaded for the entire duration of the Print processes static mode Default disabled 6 3 16 2 2 Performance Data Processing e Max block size for reading Define the maximum size in kilobytes which the emulation shall attempt to read at the Input port by means of one read access If there are fewer data there only so many bytes are read as actually exist If there are already more data there the maximum number of data that will be read corresponds to this value and the remaining data are not read until the next read process Frequent read access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB e Block size for output buffering Define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted The data processed by the emulation are passed to the output port To reduce the number of write access attempts at the output port a value can be entered here to define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted To turn off buffering set the value to 0 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 133 O Frequent write access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB Timing e Delay before next try on read error Define the de
108. ached printer is capable of printing simplex only Default disabled Resource Path See section IPDS Overlay Supplement Host Communication This setting changes the way the IPDS to PCL5 emulation reports initial status first IPDS ACK Reply to the host when the emulation process is started Keep in mind that the Loading parameter controls how often the IPDS emulation gets loaded per Logical Printer If it is set to Static Mode the first IPDS ACK will be returned to the host only once at the beginning of the very first print job When the host system receives such a Normal Printer Restart NPR ACK Reply it considers the printer to be in a state directly after power up i e it has no fonts and resources loaded and the host will re send all necessary resources to the emulated IPDS printer This enlarges the print job but can be necessary under certain system environments Possible settings are e Standard no additional ACK is generated i e the Normal Printer Restart ACK Reply is generated by the channel device driver if applicable default Normal Printer Restart before job the IPDS to PCL5 Emulation will generate one ACK Reply of this kind at the beginning of the print job e Normal Printer Restart after job the IPDS to PCL5 Emulation will generate one ACK Reply of this kind after the print job generating no duplicate NPR ACKs when the transport protocol driver e g channel card also generates an NPR ACK e Simulate pri
109. ade the printer s memory Configure paper handling and installed paper sizes of the IPDS to PCL5 Emulation with these parameters All the values configured here must match with the values configured on the printer IPDS Tray Select the paper input tray of the real printer for the IPDS to PCL5 emulation Up to eight trays are supported IPDS Tray 0 is the first tray shown To change settings for other IPDS tray change this number to select the tray you want Accessible Enable Disable if tray is accessible By activating this parameter the selected tray is made accessible for the emulation Default disabled Identification Enter a character string to identify the tray This character string may have a maximum length of 10 characters Default MAIN Paper size ID Enter paper size ID Using this option allows control of sending an ID defined by PCL for paper size in addition to PCL paper tray selection commands see PCL Output Input Tray Selection This allows usage of special paper formats with the printer Examples These IDs are predefined for all PCL printers some manufacturers are using other IDs in addition 1 Executive 7 25 10 5 Inch 2 Letter 8 5 11 Inch 3 Legal 8 5 14 Inch 6 Ledger 11 17 Inch 26 A4 210 297 mm 27 A3 297 420 mm 80 Monarch 3 875 7 5 Inch 81 Com 10 4 125 9 5 Inch 90 DL 110 220 mm 91 C5 162 229 mm 100 B5 176 250 mm Default 0 no additional ID
110. after which the incoming print job is to be split into smaller parts For example a print job with 5000 pages can be split into 50 smaller print jobs each consisting of 100 pages Also if no specific criterion exists for the end of a print job and therefore all print jobs from the host system are processed in the FORMS4WORK system as a single job a forced split can be achieved using this parameter This option is helpful if the printer is collecting print jobs completely before starting printing If the job is split into smaller pieces the time until the first page gets printed is reduced But it must be sure that some queue optimization of the printer is disabled if the partially printed job pieces have to be in the right order Maximum number of pages is 9999 Default 0 pages e Split job on AOS Enable to split the job when an IPDS Alternate Offset Stacker AOS command has been encountered in the data stream If Printer Control Misc Early AOS trigger is set the job will be split before the current page or after if not set The position of the AOS command within the data stream can usually be controlled via the JOG OUTPUT command in the FORMDEF on the host system Default disabled e Split Job at group boundary Enable to split the job when an IPDS XOH Group Boundary Terminate command has been encountered in the data stream Default disabled e Split at output bin change If enabled IPDS will split the job whenever the host sys
111. age number here Default Value Defines the default value to be used if the defined area contains no text Regular Expression Defines the syntax for a regular expression to extract field values from defined areas using a search pattern Trim Internal Blanks This switch controls internal trimming of the field value Regardless of the optional trimming of leading and or trailing whitespace characters this option will remove space and tab characters within the field value As an example a field value of VALUE with this option enabled will result in a value of VALUE To remove the leading or trailing blanks the options trim leading and or trim trailing whitespace characters need to be used Variable This list contains job information data as job id job name user name etc All this information whenever it becomes available is dynamically set for each job By selecting field type Variable and one of these job information fields you may use job information as a field value Constant This field is used to define a constant value It might be necessary to set a field value always to a constant value To do this select Constant as field type and enter the value to be used here Premature whitespace terminates value When e g the value is defined with a length of 8 bytes there may be spaces within this length With this option set the space character will terminate the value even before the length of 8 is reached The result will be
112. am Interface Raw to Raw XES to PCL5 X Metacode to PCL5 Color Filters can be placed before or after each emulation input filters output filters This allows incompatibilities between the host and destination printing system or incorrectly formatted commands of character strings before and after the conversion to be compensated by the emulation 6 3 2 Performance Data Processing e Max block size for reading Define the maximum size in kilobytes which the emulation shall attempt to read at the Input port by means of one read access If there are fewer data there only so many bytes are read as actually exist If there are already more data there the maximum number of data that will be read corresponds to this value and the remaining data are not read until the next read process D Frequent read access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 52 e Block size for output buffering Define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted The data processed by the emulation are passed to the output port To reduce the number of write access attempts at the output port a value can be entered here to define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted To turn off buffering set the value to 0 D Frequent write access attempts with few data will reduce the system perfo
113. annel input service when stopping a print process When enabled the Windows NT device will not be automatically stopped when closing the input interface If you are using two Channel Input devices it is recommended to use this option for starting and stopping the devices independently Default disabled single device enabled two devices Ignore suppress out Enable to ignore the suppress out signal With channel connection there is a signal called Suppress Out The host computer is using this signal to inform the device that it should not activate the Request In signal by itself The Request In signal usually is used by the device to inform the host computer about a pending state message If Suppress Out is set by the host the host informs about the inconvenience of state messages Using the Ignore suppress out switch may change the behavior of the FORMS4WORK Channel Input concerning the Suppress Out signal set by the host computer Default disabled Strip channel commands Enable to strip channel commands This switch controls whether PCC bytes PCC Printer Control Character i e control commands for line feed and form feed are passed to the emulation by the Channel Input or not The Channel Emulation and the X Metacode to PCL emulation are in need of these PCC Bytes the IPDS to PCL emulation does not know about them because line feeds and form feeds are already present in the IPDS data Default enabled se
114. aracter strings which may contain characters which can not be entered using the keyboard These are usually control characters as lt FF gt You can enter these characters by their hexadecimal value with a preceding sign The sign itself is entered as Lines Per Page D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs If no page separation command can be found within the print job data this limitation of lines per page controls when a page break is added A line is detected by the ASCII line feed character LF 0A D Separating pages by a number of lines has higher priority than a page separator command I e if the configured number of lines is reached a page break will always be added although the real page break FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 209 6 5 2 3 command might be placed later within the data stream Duplicate Page Separation D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs If a print job should be printed as a duplex job but was created as a simplex job on the host system this option can be used to duplicate the page separation If enabled after each frontside an empty backside will be inserted which may also used for insertion of overlays D This switch is enabled only if a duplex configuration is set under Page Definition Skip Empty Pages D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs Activate this field if blank pages should be supp
115. aracters or character strings must be replaced Replace with Shows a list of all the defined destination character strings for replacements in other words the characters or character strings that are to replace the source character strings If the display is empty no replacement will be made and the source character string will simply be removed Add Add and define a new replacement see Definition of a replacement Edit Edit an already defined replacement Remove Delete a previously defined replacement D The number of triggers replacements and the length of each trigger replacement are limited as follows e A trigger replacement character string is limited to 512 characters e The possible number of triggers replacements is calculated using the following formula Total of lengths of all sources number of sources 1 lt 32767 Definition of a trigger Define a trigger Enter the following information If Data contains Define character string s that will trigger a Stringchange D Characters that cannot be entered using the keyboard are specified with a preceding character and a two character hexadecimal code The character itself is displayed as Examples e Hello replaces the word Hello e A replaces the German umlaut A e 0D 0A replaces the ASCII control characters Carriage Return CR and Line Feed LF Add Edit Remove FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 172
116. arting printing If the job is split into smaller pieces the time until the first page gets printed is reduced But it must be sure that some queue optimization of the printer is disabled if the partially printed job pieces have to be in the right order Default O no splitting e Reconfigure printer after splitting Enable to re initialize the output device at the start of a print job If this option is enabled the emulation will conduct the initialization automatically each time a print job is split Default disabled 6 3 13 2 7 Color D The color options are only available for a PCL to X Metacode Color emulation If the configured Xerox Printer is a model 4850 or 4890 the PCL5 to X Metacode emulation can be configured to create color printouts to support the Highlight Color Printing feature of the 4850 and 4890 printers D Please note that to create color output it is essential that you use the FORMS4WORK printer driver in your application programs If you use other printer drivers the correct function of the Highlight color print cannot be ensured FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 124 Enable PCL Color Support Enable or disable creation of Highlight Color data streams for Xerox printers Default disabled Primary Color Select what color should be used by the PCL5 to X Metacode emulation to create Highlight Color printouts Xerox Highlight Color printers support printing with one additional color This color de
117. at Microfocus Cobol files may have a optional 128 byte control block header at the beginning of the file Optional 128 byte record 1 record 2 record n header Format of files in Microfocus Cobol record format The meaning of the complete header was not documented but a header can be recognized within the first 4 bytes bh Laie Microfocus Cobol control block header recognition D The 128 byte header will be recognized automatically and removed A record starts always with the hex code 0x40 record length length info Pa A ll e dl EL v record D The record length 1 byte contains only the length of the data in bytes The meaning of the PCC is following Code Function hex 50 Write and skip to channel 1 after printing 30 3F Write and space n lines after printing where n 0 15 the low nibbles of the codes 30 3F If n 0 gt Write no automatic space Microfocus Cobol PCC control codes FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 198 Bull Input Format This format was a special customer adaptation There was no reliable information or documentation about this format It may be fixed blocked FB or variable blocked VB Each record starts always with 8 control bytes where byte 8 is the PCC Control Control Control Control Control Control Control PCC data byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte5 byte6 byte 7 e lt _ qu A record Bull Input Format fix
118. at a later time You will lose communication with the FORMS4WORK Server This option will need to be updated if the Print Servers IP address changes FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 16 Port Currently used TCP IP port address For internal communication the FORMS4WORK server and client use the TCP port address 49110 Default 49110 not changeable Timeout Set timeout for communication between server and print processes If the FORMS4WORK server is heavily stressed print processes might be displayed as not responding Increase this value to resolve this Default 5000 milliseconds DNS available Enable if DNS is available in the network If enabled DNS is used to resolve names to IP addresses D If enabled although DNS is not available system performance will be decreased Default disabled Security The FORMS4WORK server software provides the choice of three access levels Administrator Operator and Guest Administrator Password Enter password for administrator access Administrator access allows full management of the FORMS4WORK including setup and configuration of print processes as well as starting ending and monitoring of printing jobs Administrator access is only available on one computer at a time You should have Administrator access on the Fiery Operator Password Enter password for operator access Operator access allows starting ending and monitoring of printing jobs As Operator you can
119. ata there the maximum number of data that will be read corresponds to this value and the remaining data are not read until the next read process FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 131 Frequent read access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB e Block size for output buffering Define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted The data processed by the emulation are passed to the output port To reduce the number of write access attempts at the output port a value can be entered here to define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted To turn off buffering set the value to 0 Frequent write access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB Timing e Delay before next try on read error Define the delay before next try on read error If a problem occurs at the input port during reading the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next read attempt This prevents a slow input port slowing down the system by frequently repeated read attempts Default 1000 msec e Delay before next try on write error Define the delay before next try on write error If a problem occurs at the output port during writing the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next write attempt This prevents
120. ata stream Enable to extract job name from data stream If the host does not send the Group Boundary IPDS command the job name might be extracted out of FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 97 the banner or job separator pages Default disabled e Use default job name IPDS_JOB_ If this option is enabled and no other job name is found from group boundary or page data the IPDS emulation will generate a short job name consisting of IPDS_JOB_ plus the FORMS4WORK job number This short name fits into printers LC Displays If this option is disabled and no other job name is found the standard long FORMS4WORK internal job name consisting e g of the sender s IP address is used Default disabled e Trigger Define the trigger for the extract job name from data stream parameter The trigger is a constant character sequence which precedes the variable job name in the banner page You would describe this e g as a field descriptor The trigger string has to be on the same line as the job name and before the job name e Cut Offset Set the number of character positions columns between the last character of the trigger string and the first character of the job name Possible values O to 255 Default 7 e Cut Length Set the length of the job name It describes how many characters starting from the cut offset after the trigger string should be used for the job name Possible values 1 to 30 Default 8 Examp
121. ated or an existing table is used to store the recognized data Only use existing table will not create a new tables An existing table must be selected in the table name field below If data fields are scanned that are not part of the selected table this data fields will not be stored To be stored the name defined within the scanner must match a field defined within the data table If the table does not exist the storage fails Use existing or create new will try to use an existing table with the name given in the table name field below If this table has disappeared or does not exist a new table will be created Saving data fields into an existing table requires field names within the table matching the names at scanner definition as described above For creation of a new table the data type of the fields scanned for need to be defined in the data fields page Drop existing and always create new will drop any existing table with the name given in the table name field below Then a new table is created according to the definitions done at scanner setup The data type of the fields scanned for need to be defined in the data fields page FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 184 6 4 5 2 8 Table name If using an existing table just select the required table name from this list For creation of new tables the table name may be either JobId_ lt jobid gt or JobName_ lt jobname gt where the variables lt jobid gt and lt jobname
122. available when you select Will be used Default disabled If the PCL printer you are using supports the PJL collated copy command PJL SET OTY n for example HP LaserJet 5 Si Mopier or Xerox N24 N32 this option should be activated Then the XES multiple copies collated command lt ESC gt Cn lt CR gt lt LF gt can be converted directly Otherwise this XES command generates Page based copies PCL command lt ESC gt amp 1 X Stitching Enable or disable stitching If the PCL printer you are using supports stitching this option can be configured here Default disabled D Stitching will be activated by a specific PJL Command For that PJL Commands should be activated If enabled the following options are available e At XES Job boundaries e At XES Offset command Default At XES Job boundaries e At XES Job boundaries The XES job commands lt ESC gt P or lt ESC gt Q enable stitching the reset command lt ESc gt x disables it that is all pages between these commands will be stitched e At XES Offset command FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 143 The XES offset command lt ESC gt o disables stitching that is all pages between two lt ESC gt o commands will be stitched e Mode Select a stitching mode from the pull down menu Available options are e Dual e Front e Rear Default Dual This option sets the position of the staples With Rotate additional positions can be defined The settings relate to
123. azedstestesecesinshdeidcessecsacheis 186 Application ccAcceAnulAcaAnauA ESAs A AAA 186 CONQUE OM aseissa acide dy adviser al dede A it slid ain deed 186 Job Separator Filter icon dead 187 Application aes ed a Wi A A rele eas oi Aa 187 NO 187 Banner PageSeeder dd ad At AA db 188 MEAR esasteavodueceanssneasshacadssedesnasachadnsteavessecsanecteaeabedeaduetecede 189 Recordchange Filter ET E TTE E E E E E A T ET 190 Application de td bi aa aai 190 CONQUE ON to tati tdt idad a del secede tata AA be 191 String change Filter at 202 Applicatiom iia A AA A A A A A a al boat 202 COMU ION iii A A AA AA Ae 202 Definition OF a replacoment dicriatin dida add dla 203 Textextractor Filter iiciccissessecscstececdsscrsscssorarcsccsacencsosascordesnacadadsatecaatoraracaessvecsissqnsecananaceuadanrescouetsnndiaaedbisssantor 203 Application cuotas dei da alah ee ae ae ee eed 203 Configuratio Messini oninia wince ail id ida 204 OPUMIZS och eds tee dina ete dee dilis A Abi AAA ened 204 Delimiter cc ri RA AREA AAA NAAA AA 204 Overlay Manager OVEIVIEW sisas Con UA A ia ASCI POLE Foto 206 GEMS ell NN 206 OVC AY Sie sass res sarc ttc saateaee E EE E RE eateaun vegies AE A 209 TN TN 211 Fonts Output Ports Overview Propertie S 0 0 it Fiery SO HINGS ii AA O A A AA A T 213 Devic ASSIM A a eee 214 JO MONTONG 0 A aia 215 Data Output Por vicodin dd dla 216 Data Capturing Quiput POM cis lcci esescecacy ceecencaccuseeavcaucancancocvsanesesva chars E
124. b processing time e Hold jobs print manually Set to hold all print jobs and not print them automatically The print jobs FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 220 6 6 3 6 6 3 1 6 6 4 6 6 4 1 are hold until they are manually selected for printing Default Hold jobs print manually Print period Set to process print jobs all the time but only to be sent to the output port at a specified time Then all arriving jobs will be emulated and held by the integrated spooler until the specified time is reached The specified time period is repeating daily Example You want to print on the output device only between 11 00 PM and 05 00 AM In this case all arriving jobs are held and only sent to the output port during the specified period of day time Default disabled Channel Channel Output D A channel output device must be installed on your FORMS4WORK server in order to work with this interface System Device System Device Output Port Device This is where the required system device or the port is selected The list contains all known system devices on the system If the required system device is not on the list it can be entered manually Queue sizes Device internal buffer size for receiving and sending data If read errors occur when data are being received it may be due to the fact that the data cannot be processed quickly enough which causes the device internal buffer to overflow In this case the input buffer size
125. ble to translate IPDS spaces EBCDIC 40 with attribute variable width to ASCII spaces 20 with standard width of the currently selected font Enable to use PCL cursor positioning D Disabling this option will result in more performance but less precision with output Default enabled e Early AOS Trigger Enable to make the IPDS to PCL5 emulation process the AOS command before the beginning of page command To perform job separation as special PCL function successfully the AOS command in IPDS data must be sent by the host system at the right position i e between two pages Some host applications only enable adding the AOS command to the data stream just behind the beginning of a page as the earliest possibility Default enabled e Suppress PCL Flush all pages command At the beginning or at the end of an IPDS print job a Print Buffered Data command can be sent by the host system This command results in a PCL Flush All Pages ESC amp r1F command With some PCL printers using this command will lead to significant performance reduction Using this option allows to turn FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 89 off usage of this command Default Off Page Eject Command e Form feed e Duplex page side selection Using this parameter you can control which PCL instruction is used by the IPDS to PCL5 emulation to get the printer to eject a page Since some older printers do not support the instruction Duplex pages
126. buffer size for storage purposes when data is received If data arrives more quickly than it can be processed it is placed in a buffer Default 256 KB D see also Settings Protocol LPD Input LPD LPR Line Printer Daemon Line Printer Remote printer protocol Novell The selection of Novell as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs Novell Settings Sessions Data Type Data Capturing Queue Polling Novell Port D The Netware Client 4 11a for Windows NT or higher from Novell Inc must be installed on the FORMS4WORK server system You can not use the Netware Client from Windows NT FORMS4WORK s Novell Input Interface can service queues on a Netware server Arriving jobs will be processed in a first in first out basis FORMS4WORK removes the jobs from the queue and sends it to an emulation and or printer At first create the queues on the Netware server which should be serviced by FORMS4WORK Then create a print server which is used by FORMS4WORK to access the queues This print server has to be assigned to all queues which FORMS4WORK should serve You may not want to assign other print servers to this queues D The Print Server has to be configured in Novell Netware bindery compatible mode For more specific instructions on creating queues and print servers see your Netware documentation Queue Polling e Tree Server name Enter the name of the Netware server which is maintaining queues to b
127. by one length byte if TRN exists must be at the beginning of the line Within the length of the transparent data the line termination code is disabled optional TRN and length byte length of transparent data AA AAN l y N TRN line aie Ae 1 line 1 record Line printer Format EBCDIC with activated TRN option Channel Input Format This data format is produced by the firmware of the channel input card of the FORMS4WORK Server length info _ A ae a N PCC record length mrem a a y m record Channel Input Format D The record length 2 bytes contains the complete length of the record in bytes including the record length itself The PCC contained in the LSB is a IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control code IBM Tapes Input Format This format may vary from fixed blocked FB to variable blocked VB as well with different PCC types like FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 195 IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control codes or ANSI control codes in US ASCII or EBCDIC Common to all variations and typical for this format is that the PCC is always at the left position of the user data portion A Y record IBM Tapes Input Format fixed blocked FB D The record length is on fixed blocked FB format always constant and may be configured in bytes The data must be padded with blanks up to the record length record sl A record IBM Tapes Input Format variable blocked VB D
128. by the input interface Protocols for communication however are one of the most important types of components These are regarded in the FORMS4WORK system as a property of the input interfaces Emulation In Detail An Emulation generally converts print data from one standard language for example IPDS into another standard language for example PDF To allow as many applications as possible to use this facility there is an option to process the data using so called Filters before and or after the actual Emulation In other words the emulation component can be split into Pre Emulation Filter Input Filter Emulation and Post Emulation Filter Output Filter FORMS4WORK Manual Principles 11 4 5 4 6 4 7 Examples of filter components include e Stringchange filter e Conditional Stringchange filter e Codepage Filter e Recordchange Filter Special filters are e Barcode Filter e Overlay Manager Filters can be linked arbitrarily in other words Input Filters A and B can be used as follows e A B or B A the data pass through both filters in sequence A B A B it is possible to repeat the filters in the data flow e A B C D etc no limit to the number of filters used The same applies naturally enough for Output Filters Output Interface In Detail Output interfaces may be made up of several components depending on the type of port used FORMS4WORK knows DOS devices Files TCP IP with without LPR prot
129. ce Default 30 seconds Process at most lt x gt jobs concurrently Define the maximum number of spooled print jobs that can be output at the same time Other print jobs are not processed until the number falls below the maximum again Possible values range from O to 99 If no value is entered the number of concurrent print jobs is not limited Default 1 Allow alteration of job sequence if applicable If disabled the job sequence is strictly maintained It is guaranteed that older jobs are printed first Please note that a job in an error state may prevent succeeding jobs from being printed If enabled the system may change the job sequence A job in an error state does not prevent succeeding jobs from being printed Default enabled Compress spool files Enable to compress spool files This is recommended if disk space is sparse Default disabled Start printing even if job is not completely spooled FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 219 6 6 2 8 Enable to send print jobs to the output port as soon as the integrated spooler is collecting the data of the jobs If this option is disabled print jobs are only sent to the output port as soon as they are completely processed by the emulation Default disabled Scheduled printing Set time controlled job processing Time of printing delay time and time restriction for processing of jobs can be defined see Scheduled Printing Default enabled Keep spooled job
130. ce Space 1 line Note Every other code results per default in a Write no automatic space function PCC3 translation table of Bull Input Format FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 200 Code Function Code Function hex hex 00 Skip to channel 1 OE Skip to channel 4 01 Space 1 line OF Skip to channel 5 02 Space 2 lines 14 Skip to channel 11 03 Space 3 lines 1C Skip to channel 6 04 Space 4 lines 1D Skip to channel 7 05 Space 5 lines 23 Skip to channel 8 06 Space 6 lines 26 Skip to channel 2 07 Space 7 lines 37 Write no automatic space 08 Space 8 lines 38 Skip to channel 9 09 Write no automatic space 3C Skip to channel 15 OA Space 10 lines 3E Skip to channel 12 08 Skip to channel 13 3F Skip to channel 3 OC Skip to channel 14 40 Space 1 line 0D Skip to channel 10 Note Every other code results per default in a Write no automatic space function PCCA translation table of Bull Input Format RS6000 Input Format This format was a special customer adaptation There was no reliable information or documentation about this format record length info block length record length block length info LSW Least significant word MSW Most significant word PCC Printer carriage control 1 byte D The block length and record length is 4 bytes long The block length contains the complete length of the block in bytes including the 4 bytes block length info This block may contain 1
131. ce or remove a character or a character string e Character or a character string to be replaced Search for e Character or a character string which is to replace the source Replace with or empty if the source is to be removed e Consideration to low or high case letters Ignore Case Enable to ignore case of string This allows to define whether the replacement is to be completed taking case into account in other words whether abc and Abc or just abc is to be replaced The setting applies for all replacements Default disabled Search for Shows a list of all the defined source character strings for replacements in other words which characters or character strings must be replaced Replace with Shows a list of all the defined destination character strings for replacements in other words the characters or character strings that are to replace the source character strings If the display is empty no replacement will be made and the source character string will simply be removed Add Add and define a new replacement see Definition of a replacement Edit Edit an already defined replacement Remove FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 203 6 4 9 3 6 4 10 6 4 10 1 Delete a previously defined replacement D The number of replacements and the length of each replacement are limited as follows e A replacement character string is limited to 512 characters e The possible number of replacement
132. ch This feature allows to change the printers line density between 6 and 8 LPI lines per inches controlled by the host system if the connected printer supports such a function For that two control strings have to be defined Depending on the line density of the Forms Control Buffer FCB loaded from the host the related one will be transferred to the connected printer e Escape Sequence 6 Ipi Enter the Escape Sequence for 6 lines per inch e Escape Sequence 8 Ipi Enter the Escape Sequence for 8 lines per inch e Default LPI Select the default Ipi setting from the pull down menu FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 58 6 3 6 2 5 This option will define the default LPI setting used by FORMS4WORK as long as there is no FCB loaded from the host If there were control strings defined the one related to the default setting will be transferred after every start of the dispatcher Default 6 Page Turn Over Select the page turn over either by line feed LF or by form feed FF Default by FF These options allow to control the transition from the bottom of a page to the top of the next page Normally FORMS4WORK converts all received channel commands into the appropriate number of carriage returns line feeds and form feeds But when the connected printer is a cut sheet printer the alteration of the font size will result in a different line capacity of the page This problem can be solved if FORMS4WORK uses a form feed command ins
133. ch positioning command in the context of the short paper edge Vector long edge offset This offset will be added to each positioning command in the context of the long paper edge Scaling short edge If the used printer does not support edge to edge printing this option can be used to reduce the paper size by the given percentage Scaling short edge El Scaling long edge If the used printer does not support edge to edge printing this option can be used to reduce the paper size by the given percentage gt gt gt scaling long edge 6 3 14 2 3 Duplex Offsets These offsets are only on duplex back sides valid They will be added to each positioning command in the context of the paper edge The values may be given separately for the duplex mode and page orientation FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 128 6 3 14 2 4 Resources Resource path Determines the resource directory for optional resources Run emulation in static mode This switch determines whether the emulation will be loaded and rejected between each print job dynamic mode or if it will be hold in memory during the complete lifetime of the print process static mode 6 3 14 2 5 Miscellaneous Edge to edge Choose the proper printer type in order set the printer automatically in edge to edge mode Swallow PCL sequences Determines if PCL sequences within the prescribe data stream are discarded or not e Off All PCL commands will be given t
134. code of the character set will be appointed to be an indicator for performing the function The receipt of the specified bypass code instructs FORMS4WORK to combine the following two print characters to one hexadecimal code before the print line will be transferred to the printer However this can only be done if the bypass character is followed by either numerals from 0 to 9 or letters from A to F where the letters are not case sensitive e Bypass Character Hex Enter bypass character in hexadecimal code If there are used two bypass characters one directly behind the other FORMS4WORK will combine all subsequent print characters to hexadecimal codes up to the line s end if the string is not terminated by another bypass character before This procedure allows to transmit even longer control strings to the printer in a comfortable way D If one of both characters which shall be combined is not within O to 9 and A to F in case of a single bypass the function will not be executed in case of a bypass string the function will be terminated at the failing position FCB Forms Control Buffer All line printers which can be emulated by FORMS4WORK on the channel interface to the host are equipped with a forms control buffer FCB There the information about form length line density and vertical tabulators is stored when loaded from the host This buffer shall copy the 12 channel tape controlled vertical format unit of older printers The definition
135. command to the printer before each job Enable this option if more than one emulation sends jobs to one common printer Default disabled 6 3 13 2 5 Trays The paper handling and installed paper sizes of the PCL5 to X Metacode Emulation can be configured with these parameters All the values configured here must match with the values configured on the Xerox printer Tray Select the paper input tray of the Xerox printer to configure it for the PCL5 to X Metacode emulation Values from 1 to 6 are supported Default 1 Accessible Enable to make the selected tray accessible for the emulation Default trays 1 and 2 accessible FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 121 Identification Enter a character string to identify the tray This string may have a maximum length of 10 characters Only available if Accessible is enabled Default MAIN tray 1 AUX tray 2 Paper Size Select the installed paper size for the selected tray Only available if Accessible is enabled Available sizes are A4 210 x 297 mm Letter 216 x 279 mm Legal 216 x 356 mm and user defined Default A4 210 x 297 mm Width Displays the width of the selected paper size using the selected unit Select paper width if user defined paper size is selected Only available if Accessible is enabled Default 297 A4 Height Displays the height of the selected paper size using the selected unit Select paper height if user defined paper size is
136. cted printer This function allows to perform different pre settings of the printer depending on the used form With activation of Extended FCB FCBs containing the following parameters are supported 0x1E10 control string of indefinite length in ASCII 0x1F10 0x1 11 1 byte of columns to suppress 1 byte of lines to suppress 0x1F11 0x1 12 name of job max 16 bytes in ASCII 0x1F12 0x1 13 name of print queue max 16 bytes in ASCII 0x1F13 All information enclosed by the bytes 1 10 and 1F10 will be transferred in a transparent way to the connected printer The information enclosed by the bytes 1 11 and 1F11 will cause FORMS4WORK to strip the specified number of columns from the beginning of each print line 1st byte decimal counter and or to strip the specified number of print lines from the beginning of each page 2nd byte decimal counter Both parameters enclosed by the bytes 1 12 1F12 and 1 13 1F13 are only designed for a connected network printer and will cause FORMS4WORK to use the desired job name inside the network protocol and send this job to the desired printer queue e Resend FCB Enable to resend forms control buffer Default disabled This option is related to both functions Extended FCB and Lines Per Inch see section Control Codes When this check box is enabled FORMS4WORK will perform all functions and actions related to the load of the FCB All the extended information included in the used
137. cter tables for the received data before the emulation and or the outgoing data after the emulation D To use the Codepage filter you must have installed the Windows NT Language Pack which is supplied on the installation CD for Windows NT NT Language Pack On the installation CD for Windows NT you will find the directory LANGPACK which contains all the files required to install the Windows NT language pack Log on with an account which has administrator rights and start the Windows NT Explorer to install these files Click on the INF file that you wish to install with the right mouse button Then click on Install in the context menu To install all the variants use the EXCHSRVR INF file and proceed as described above Another section is in the standard installation directory for Windows NT for example 11386 Insert the die Windows NT CD as soon as you are asked to do so After the installation the following character sets and codepages will be available EBCDIC character set Codepage and character set 037 IBM EBCDIC U S Canada 500 IBM EBCDIC International 870 IBM EBCDIC Latin 2 Multilingual ROECE 875 IBM EBCDIC Greece 1026 IBM EBCDIC Latin 5 Turkey 20273 IBM EBCDIC Germany 20277 IBM EBCDIC Denmark Norway 20278 IBM EBCDIC Finland Sweden 20280 IBM EBCDIC Italy 20284 IBM EBCDIC Latin America Spain 20285 IBM EBCDIC United Kingdom 20290 IBM EBCDIC Japanese Katakana Extended 20297 IBM EBCDIC France 20420 IBM
138. d softfonts Enable to keep downloaded softfonts This check box enables the softfont management system of the emulation The software will remember each softfont downloaded to the printer and prevent the downloading of the same font to the printer twice The data stream from the emulation to the printer will decrease and the print performance will increase D It is recommended to use this option only in combination with the IPDS to PCL5 emulation because it must be guaranteed that the PCL5 softfont names are unique and that the PCL5 softfonts contain the complete character set necessary for printing the whole print job Otherwise the softfont management system may fail It is absolutely necessary to deactivate this option if the PCL5 to X Metacode emulation is used in combination with the XMCC FORMS4WORK PCL printer driver Softfont prefix Define or modify the Softfont prefix This edit field enables changing the font names the emulation uses to store softfonts at the hard drive of the printer This allows the simultaneous work of several PCL to X Metacode emulations under FORMS4WORK without overwriting of softfonts at the printer hard drive Changing of font names is only possible if the Keep downloaded softfonts option is enabled If this option is disabled all softfonts will be downloaded from the PCL to X Metacode emulation to the printer using the name prefix XSFT i e XSFTAA FNT XSFTAB FNT Optimize image download Enable to optimize
139. dd the user can add a new input interface A list appears with the available input types from which the required type must be selected After this the configuration dialog for the selected interface type appears automatically All the inputs defined in this way are automatically activated and can receive data when the print process is started Through which emulation the data pass and to which output they are finally sent is defined in the Logical Printer editor In principle there is no direct link between an input and a certain output but such a link may be created in the Logical Printer editor where print jobs can be assigned to defined outputs on the basis of various criteria 6 2 2 Properties 6 2 2 1 Settings Input Interface Buffer e Read block size Enter block size for read operations in KB When data are received the data are read in blocks of the specified size as long as the input port supports this With a file port for example the data are read and processed in blocks The larger the block size the fewer read access operations are required A large block size however increases the memory requirement for job management Default 32 KB e Maximum size of receive buffer Enter maximum size of the internal data buffer If the data that are received cannot be processed because for example the printer at the output is busy the data are nevertheless accepted and placed in a buffer This value defines the maximum size o
140. de Label Software please see the Barcode Label Software Manual which is a separate document Chained Emulations Overview Under certain circumstances it might be helpful to pass multiple emulations For example you want to translate IPDS to PDF and there is no emulation available for In this case you would first translate IPDS to PCL5 and after that PCL5 to PDF which requires two emulations To solve this case you have to define and configure the two emulations first By definition of a 3rd emulation of type Chained Emulations they will be chained Only already defined and configured emulations are available in the pull down menu First emulation Select an already defined emulation from the pull down menu which should be passed first Second emulation Select an already defined emulation from the pull down menu which should be passed last FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 54 6 3 6 6 3 6 1 6 3 6 2 6 3 6 2 1 Channel Emulation Overview This section describes all the parameters of the FORMS4WORK Channel Emulation The configuration dialog for the Channel Emulation has the following property pages tabs e Printer Type e Translation Table e Control Codes e Bold Printing e Download e FCB e Job End Detection e Performance e Band ID Parameters Printer Type Channel Input Port Assignment e Use Channel Input Select the appropriate Channel Input Device from the pull down menu Selection is possible only
141. define the location of lower left edge of the barcode without HRT For your convenience you can choose the desired measurement unit inch mm or decipoints Please consider the page margins and the nonprintable area of the sheet A barcode or HRT which sticks outside this bordes is not printed correctly Due to the barcode is printed as an overlay over the existing page content you have to choose a position with enough free space which satisfies not only the size of the barcode but also the necessary quiet zone around the code In addition to the position you can specify the orientation rotation and color of the barcode The orientation can be chosen in 90 steps The rotation is performed counterclockwise relative to the lower left corner of the barcode If you want to print the barcode in another color than black your printer has to support the PCL Imaging mode Choose the desired barcode color in the special settings dialog If you need to generate more different barcodes in one ore more print jobs you simply have to add unique trigger sequences and field definitions in the FORMS4WORK Field Scanner Filter and according barcode definitions in the FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter Example Printing a customer number as a 2D barcode of the type Datamatrix FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 167 Mechanics GmbH Mechanics GmbH Nirgerdwostr 66 D 999 Woauchimmer Herrn Frau Firma Tunnes R stm n Teststr 6 58093 Testhausen
142. don t get the result straight D If you want to use job data manipulation only without storing the retrieved data select Reporting to later components as storage method at data processing setup The replacement for the field in the left column is entered as a string in the right column This string can be simply a field name retrieved by the scanner with a preceeding character in which case this will be a one by one substitution E g to substitute the jobs name with the field CustomerId type CustomerId To use more than one field for generating substitution strings follow the rules for the interpreter To leave a parameter as is set the right column to empty FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 174 Interpreter Rules The built in interpreter allows calculations with nested braces and expressions according to the common order of operators The maximum nesting depth for braces is about 2000 Data fields must be preceded by a character Entering e g Name results in the output of e g Smith Data fields and strings can be concatenated by addition As a result of Name Prename the output will be e g Smith Will Strings are delimited by characters Entering Name results in the output of Name Strings can be concatenated by addition As a result of Name Prename the output will be e g Name Prename D To use double quotes as a character within a string constant type The following types of
143. e also Settings Channel PCI The selection of a Channel as an input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs Channel Input Device Settings Sessions Data Type Data Capturing You can choose between 2 channel input devices Channel PCI Input Port D A channel input device must be installed on your FORMS4WORK server in order to work with this interface Driver settings Channel Timeout Set timeout of the channel input device in seconds FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 36 Possible values O 300 sec Default 45 seconds Don t stop channel input service when stopping print process Enable to keep from stopping the channel input service when stopping a print process When enabled the Windows NT device will not be automatically stopped when closing the input interface If you are using two Channel Input devices it is recommended to use this option for starting and stopping the devices independently Default disabled single device enabled two devices Options Printer Emulation Select a printer emulation from the pull down menu Available printers are IBM 3211 IBM 3203 IBM 3825 IPDS IBM 4245 IBM 4248 IPDS Bridge SNI 3338 SNI 3348 SNI 3365 Default IBM 3211 This menu allows to select the type of printer which will be emulated by FORMS4WORK to the connected host on the channel interface The printers IBM 3211 IBM 4245 IBM 4248 SNI 3338 39 and SNI 3348 are fanfold impact prin
144. e can be defined In this case the content of the file will be used as email text TCP IP Address TCP IP Output D Microsoft Winsock 2 must be installed on the FORMS4WORK server This is the case with Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or higher and Windows 98 With Windows 95 an update available from Microsoft is necessary Local Address In case the FORMS4WORK system is using multiple IP addresses enter here one IP address of the computer that is to be used for communication If the computer has only one local address the field may remain empty Port TCP IP port to which the data are to be sent Default Remote Address IP address or DNS name of the printer or host computer to which the data are to be sent D If a Local TCP Port is used the Default Remote Address may not be changed and is always 127 0 0 1 localhost The data will be crypted and may only be sent to a FORMS4WORK Local TCP Input Port Input Buffer Size Internal buffer size for storage purposes when receiving data from the printer or host computer If data arrive more quickly than they can be processed they are placed in a buffer This size of this buffer can be defined here and is generally 256 KB Connect Timeout Defines the maximum of time in seconds for which FORMS4WORK tries to establish a connection to a remote host printer Linger Timeout Defines the maximum of time in seconds for which a TCP session may try to send remaining data before closing connect
145. e defined time has reached The job will not be deleted even if the preset time to keep has passed If Pause is reset the processing of the job is resumed i e the job will be printed if its time for printing has been reached earlier or deleted if the time to keep has already passed Keep Keeps selected print job in the spooler after sending it to the output port until it will be manually deleted using menu entry Delete or the attribute Keep is reset Printed Selected print jobs will be marked as printed If a job was scheduled for printing its time for printing will be reset and the job is kept in the spooler FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 26 5 3 2 4 3 If Printed is reset the job will be marked as Held kept Cancel Stops processing of the selected print job The Keep attribute of a spooled job will be set automatically Delete Stops output of the selected print job and deletes it This function is available for spooled jobs only Setup Edit Logical Printer Opens the Logical Printer dialog for editing See edit Logical Printer Add Logical Printer Creates a new Logical Printer Click Add Logical Printer button or select Add Logical Printer from the Setup menu to add a Logical Printer a new row to the list See add Logical Printer Remove Logical Printer Removes the highlighted Logical Printer s Click Remove Logical Printer button or select Remove Log
146. e local hard disk of the FORMS4WORK Server automatically the following Page Buffer Flags have to be set Save forms to local disk Save fonts to printer flash Save to Lexmark Optra S To save the fonts to a flash disk of a HP LaserJet 4000 the parameter Page Buffer Flags has to be set as follows Save using HP PJL file system Save fonts to printer flash Additionally the checkbox located at dialog page PCL5 Printer Type must be checked Drive Number Determines the partition number of the printer hard disk when parameter Page buffer Flags is set to Save fonts to printer disk and Save using HP PJL file system In this case the fonts will be saved to the directory DRIVENUMBER PCL MACROS where the currently set number will be used instead of DRIVENUMBER FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 152 6 3 17 3 9 Common Behavior The settings on this page define the general behavior of the emulation Suppress Form Feed Defines how the pages are to be separated at a form feed 0x0C Form Feed The control code Ox0C is output This may generate several empty pages if there are consecutive form feeds Printer Reset A complete reset sequence is sent to the printer This prevents empty pages Select Front Page Command The PCL duplex command lt ESC gt amp a1G is sent to the printer Automatic The converter decides about page ejection Empty pages and unnecessary reset sequences will suppressed Automatic no reset Like A
147. e served by FORMS4WORK FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 42 6 2 10 6 2 10 1 e Print server name Define the name of the print server that FORMS4WORK is using to access the server queues D see also Settings ODBC The selection of ODBC as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs ODBC Sessions ODBC The source of data records is accessed as an ODBC data source This has the advantage that all database applications which support this interface may be used to request data There s no difference if the data source is e g a local MS Access file or if you access a database server like SQL Server in your network Any database product supporting ODBC may be used The only restriction is that all data required for printing of a job has to be available in one table If your database table is organized with references to other tables then you have to create a view using a join statement which will create a logical table containing all required fields from several physical tables See the documentation of your database application about views and joins Data Source Define the database by selecting a data source name and a table name A data source must be defined prior using the ODBC Manager You may either start this applet by using the ODBC Manager button or using the system control applet for ODBC32 Open this applet and add a system or a user data source by defining the driver e g MS Access and specify
148. ed e PCL Full Page The IPDS to PCL5 emulation assumes that the attached PCL printer is able to print to the whole sheet i e a so called Full Page mode or edge to edge printing is enabled Some printers do not support this mode In this case the unprintable area can be reached using special methods only If PCL Full Page set to off the IPDS to PCL5 emulation will try to reach unprintable area using other positioning methods Default enabled e Restricted HP GL Output Enable to avoid HP GL Rotate and PCL picture frame commands With this option set the IPDS to PCL5 emulation will not generate HP GL Rotate and PCL picture frame commands Use this switch when IPDS output is passed to an PCL to Metacode emulation Default disabled FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 95 e Duplex To Simplex This parameter should be used when four conditions meet The printer connected to the ProductName system is not capable of Duplex printing The Input Paper Size is set with No edge to edge The print job is duplex The printer does not handle the PCL Page offset registration command correctly when printing a page flagged as Duplex backside PONES In short this is a workaround for a bug in some printers PCL interpreters Use only when horizontal positioning is scrambled on every second page of the print job It usually is a better idea to generate the print job on the host system as simplex if the att
149. ed DEFINE ID 11 FILENAME ovll csp RULE MEDIASOURCE 1 ID 11 Overlay dependent on Destination Bin Output tray DEFINE ID 12 FILENAME ovl2 csp RULE MEDIADESTINATION 2 ID 12 Invoice with several pages The task is to print invoices that consist of a letter with letterhead on the front of sheet 1 and the detailed invoice from sheet 2 on The print job is simplex The company s general terms and conditions shall be printed on the back in light gray Example print invoice with general terms and conditions first of all define letterhead FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 109 DEFINE ID 1 FILENAME briefkl csp now the invoice form DEFINE ID 2 FILENAME rechl csp and the text of the general terms and conditions in light gray DEFINE ID 3 FILENAME agb csp ADDBACKSIDE RGBCOLOR 127 127 127 rules letterhead only on first sheet RULE FROM 1 TO 1 ID 1 invoice form from sheet 2 on RULE FROM 2 ID 2 general terms and conditions on all sheets on the back RULE SIDE SIMPLEXBACK ID 3 reset page counter if several invoices are combined in one print job RULE JOG RESETCOUNTER 6 3 10 2 2 PCL5 to PDF Emulation Overview The PCL5 to PDF emulation from FORMS4WORK converts print data that were created for PCL printers so that they can be output on PDF compatible page printers Parameters Jobs Split Jobs Enable to split jobs due to the given criteria Select one or any number of criteria A selected cri
150. ed blocked FB Control Control Control Control Control Control Control PCC record byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 5 byte 6 byte7 termination A MMM M M m w y1 _ _ _ record Bull Input Format variable blocked VB D The record termination on variable blocked VB format must be always lt CR gt lt LF gt hex 0D optional hex OA i e these hex codes may not be part of the data record The meaning of the 8 control bytes is following The most information has been extracted by experience 8 EJ RABIES EREILI La j Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E J L PCC Channel or line feed number 0 n Unknown f D9 space n lines Byte 8 or skip to channel based on PCC table was always 00 E3 skip to channel Byte 8 based on PCC table E2 byte 8 is interpreted as ANSI control code for IBM EBCDIC tapes Unknown 65000000 first record with file name recognition header in that case byte 1 and byte 2 00 Byte 41 42 43 DAT Byte 44 file name L 84 write data after spacing C4 write data before spacing Meaning of the 8 control bytes of Bull Input Format D Value of byte 8 must be translated in accordance to the 4 PCC tables There may exist 4 configurable PCC tables PCC1 PCC2 PCC3 PCC4 which translates the PCC control byte 8 into following functions These values has been extracted from some PCC table definition
151. ed if Spooling is enabled If a job was canceled by the Progress Timeout while it was printing the whole job will be reprinted using an alternative device if this option is activated If deactivated only the missing pages are redirected to an alternative device If the FORMS4WORK license does not include Reprinting this option is not available Default disabled Job Monitoring Job Monitoring Active Enable this option to get feedback concerning the output state of a print job from the printer Job Monitoring also must be enabled to get feedback from the printer about printed pages The job state will be set to Printed not before the printer has reported the job as completed If disabled only the converted pages are shown but not the printed and a job becomes the state Printed as soon as the job data have been transferred to the printer FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 216 6 6 2 5 d Job Monitoring is not supported by all output interfaces A bi directional connection must be established during the printing process Page Notification The host system will get feedback when a page has been printed Job Notification The host system will get feedback when a job has been printed D Job Notification is not available if the Spooling option is enabled Default Job Monitoring active and Job Notification enabled Data Output Port Data encryption No encryption The data will be sent uncompressed and uncrypted
152. ed while printing a test job While in started state select one of the listed test jobs This job will be processed as soon as you press the button Print You can repeat this step as long as you do not leave this dialog using the Close button Run conversion and job monitoring Start Click Start button or select Start from the File menu to start FORMS4WORK After it has been started successfully FORMS4WORK will be able to receive print jobs for data conversion D While running in conversion mode Logical Printers can only be viewed but not edited nor added nor removed Stop Click Stop button or select Stop from the File menu to stop FORMS4WORK from receiving print jobs In order to edit add or remove a Logical Printer the job conversion process must be stopped View Logical Printer Click View Logical Printer to view a Logical Printer Select one from the list Job list The Job list window is used to monitor and to manage print jobs The list includes print jobs which are waiting to print or they already have been printed For every item in the list further information is available e Name shows job name The name is extracted from the job itself or automatically created by FORMS4WORK e Status shows job status Possible entries are Deleting Error Canceled Printed Printing Byte Held Spooled Connecting Emulating Receiving Those entries can be added by Paused Delayed Delayed until Da
153. efore IDEN PREFIX DJDE is the same like IDEN PREFIX A DJDE This is sometimes useful in LAN environments if data has been already translated from EBCDIC to ASCII e g by an Codepage Filter Paper Size Specifies the default paper size Use PCL paper size command lt ESC gt amp I A If this option is activated a paper size command will be send to the printer otherwise not Feed input tray select assignments Assigns selection strings to any cluster or stock set name To edit control bytes the exclamation mark is used for indicating a 2 digit hex value e g 1B 27 dec Two consecutive exclamation marks must be used to get the itself If a sequence for lt Duplex alias gt is given this alternative tray will be used on duplex printing otherwise only the lt Selection string gt will be used Example The definition MAIN 1B amp 11H results into the PCL paper source selection string lt ESC gt amp 11H when a DJDE FEED MAIN is encountered Jobs Pause print process on OTEXT WAIT When activated the print process at the FORMS4WORK server will be suspended every time a DJDE OTEXT WAIT command is encountered D The operator must observe the printprocess and manually set the processing state to continue FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 156 Notify channel host on error condition When activated the channel host will be informed with a intervention required on channel input only
154. efore allowing acces to the document Owner When a owner password ist set the Adobe Acrobat requests this password before allowing changing of the password or access permissions Permissions Specify access permissions for the encrypted document Allow printing The document may be printed D When using 128 bit encryption additionally the quality level for printing may be specified Allow modifying document contents The contents of the document may be modified Allow contents copying extracting and accessibility Copy or otherwise extract text and graphics from the document including extracting text and graphics in support of accessibility to users with disabilities or for other purposes Allow modifying and adding text annotations and form fields Add or modify text annotations fill in interactive form fields and if Allow modifying document contents is also set create or modify interactive form fields including signature fields Allow form field filling and signing Fill in existing interactive form fields including signature fields D Only available when using 128 bit encryption Allow document assembling insert rotate delete pages Assemble the document insert rotate or delete pages and create bookmarks or thumbnail images D Only available when using 128 bit encryption FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 112 Enable or disable digital signing of the document When the document has been digitally signed
155. empts at the output port a value can be entered here to define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted To turn off buffering set the value to 0 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 75 6 3 7 2 6 O Frequent write access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32768 Bytes Timing e Delay before next try on read error Define the delay before next try on read error If a problem occurs at the input port during reading the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next read attempt This prevents a slow input port slowing down the system by frequently repeated read attempts Default 1000 msec e Delay before next try on write error Define the delay before next try on write error If a problem occurs at the output port during writing the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next write attempt This prevents a slow output port slowing down the system by frequently repeated write attempts Default 10 msec e Timeout for shutdown Define the time in milliseconds which the Print process shall wait for completion of the emulation thread If the set time has elapsed before the emulation thread has been terminated correctly by itself it will be terminated by the Print process D Ensure that you set an adequate time to allow the emulation thread to terminate by itself The set va
156. ength With this option set the space character will terminate the value even before the length of 8 is reached The result will be 1234 instead of 1234 678 when a space is found between the digits 4 and 6 This is also done for other whitespace characters as Tab Carriage Return Line Feed and Form Feed Trim leading whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace characters are removed from the left end of the data field value string Trim trailing whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace characters are removed from the right end of the data field value string Record entity is defined by One page this treats each page as a new data record One sheet this treats each sheet as a new data record Whole print job this treats the complete print job as one data record Field repetition this treats data as a new data record whenever one of the fields is recognized again Trigger sequence this requires a string entered in the field below This string will be used as a criterion for the end of a data record You may e g use the trigger sequence Page 1 to start a new record whenever a new document starts within the print job D Handling of data records also depends of the used storage method If the storage method does not support variable number of records only one record per job will be available Newly recognized field values automatically overwrite past values PCL Job Scanned For Text Areas This scan meth
157. entering values of printer adjustment you may select here Available are inch centimeters and millimeters e Horizontal Adjustment This value adjusts horizontal positioning of printing This might be necessary for duplex printing to assure the pieces on frontside are congruent with pieces on backside Enter a positive value to shift right or a negative value to shift left FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 78 6 3 8 2 3 6 3 9 6 3 10 6 3 10 1 Default 0 Printing on backside is more right than on frontside Increase positive value until congruent Ic Printing on backside is more left than on frontside Increase negative value until congruent e Vertical Adjustment This value adjusts vertical positioning of printing This might be necessary for duplex printing to assure the pieces on frontside are congruent with pieces on backside Enter a positive value to shift down or a negative value to shift up Default 0 Printing on backside is lower than on frontside Increase positive value until congruent I Printing on backside is higher than on frontside Increase negative value until congruent Inserter Trays The Heidelberg Digimaster 91xx inserter option supports 3 trays of paper from which pre printed sheets may be drawn and inserted to a job without printing on them The trays are addressed via PCL as tray 71 to 73 Here you may map each of these trays to one of the 30 trays available in the job definition As s
158. ers are removed from the left end of the data field value string Trim trailing whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace characters are removed from the right end of the data field value string Record entity is defined by Whole print job this treats the complete print job as one data record Field repetition this treats data as a new data record whenever one of the fields is recognized again Trigger sequence this requires a string entered in the field below This string will be used as a criterion for the end of a data record You may e g use the trigger sequence Page 1 to start a new record whenever a new document starts within the print job o Handling of data records also depends of the used storage method If the storage method does not support variable number of records only one record per job will be available Newly recognized field values automatically overwrite past values Triggered PCL Job This scan method will search within the ASCII readable part of each page of the print job To recognize data fields trigger sequences which will always precede the data values need to be defined All field definitions are entered into the table To add or remove lines right click into the table and use the popup menu Field Name Defines the name of a data field This name needs to be unique and should not contain blanks Type Defines the type of data used for this field Data is used for job data recognized u
159. es Then you have to select defined in print job as Barcode Type In the properties dialog of this definition you can choose the desired additional options You can only create one single definition of this kind in the Barcode Definition Editor 6 4 2 3 Barcode and Field Scanner Generating a barcode by retrieving data from print job Even easier as described in barcode SIMM emulation it is possible to print nearly every text and number in your document as a barcode without the necessity to implement special PCL sequences to define the code properties All things you need is the FORMS4WORK Field Scanner Filter to extract the desired text and the FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter to define the barcode properties Both filters are configurable via a comfortable graphical user interface With the help of the example showed below it should be easy to set up the FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter filter for your own print jobs Setting up the FORMS4WORK Field Scanner Filter e First you have to add the Field Scanner and Barcode Filter to your emulation The barcodefilter has to be chained after the fieldscanner filter Alternatively you can insert the Fieldscanner Filter as an Input Filter and the Barcode Filter as an Output Filter e Then you have to setup the Field Scanner Filter In our example we use a a triggered PCL job as input stream type The recognized text data which should be printed as a barcode is reported to later FORMS4WORK Manual Configura
160. es on the NT Language Pack Regardless of the codepages setting the conversion of individual characters that differ from the standard can be defined manually using the so called Patch Table 6 4 3 4 Patch Table In the case that you require the conversion of an individual character which differs from the installed codepages define the new code of the character here The table shows the current codes for all 255 characters To change a special character select the current code and enter a new value in the field Hex Value After confirmation with the button Apply the new code will be set After Replacing all necessary characters close this dialog by pressing OK Example You want to change ASCII code line feed LF decimal 10 hexadecimal Ox0A to Carriage Return CR decimal 13 hexadecimal 0x0D Select in line Ox from Ox0A column xA from Ox0A In the field Hex Value the current code OA will be FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 170 6 4 4 6 4 4 1 6 4 4 2 displayed Change this code to 0D and confirm pressing Apply Conditional Stringchange Filter Application The Conditional Stringchange filter is like the normal Stringchange filter used to replace or remove individual characters and character strings in the data stream before and or after the emulation of the print data When a certain defined condition is matched the Stringchange filter is triggered see Stringchange filter Example e The input data s
161. es that generate bar codes must be immediately followed by an escape sequence that fully specifies a normal text font Example Esc s1p10v0s0b61444T returns the text following a bar code to 10 point Helvetica with proportional spacing normal style and medium stroke weight PCL Emulation Escape Sequences Command Function Parameters Command Esc s P or Esc s P Determines the location of human readable text printed with the bar code Use default value Do not print text Print text embedded Print text half embedded Print text under bar code Print text above bar code WUBRWNFO Add the numbers listed below to produce the corresponding effect 10 prints UPC A checksum at middle left of the bar code instead of the bottom left 10 prints start stop characters with Code 3 of 9 text 20 formats German and French postal bar codes 100 prints the checksum character with text For the UPC E symbologies checksum characters are always printed if human readable text is specified The checksum characters are printed half height if 100 is added to the p parameter and are printed the same height as the text if 100 is not added to the p parameter 2 D BARCODES PDF 417 0 to 8 defines the ECC error correction level 1000 automatic sizes based calculation of the ECC level Command Esc s 1 2 3 4B FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 164 Selects bar widths in dots 1 720 inch Some bar codes such as Interleaved 2 of 5 and Code 3 of 9
162. es which are printed per one inch on the page FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 119 Changing this parameter increases or decreases the distance between two printed lines Available values are 4 6 8 12 6 3 13 2 4 Xerox Printer These parameters are used to set the specific values for the Xerox printers All DJDE and RSTACK settings on this page must be identical with the values configured on the Xerox printer itself Xerox Printer Select the type of Xerox printer to adjust the PCL5 to X Metacode emulation to the special capabilities of the various Xerox printer models The emulation supports Xerox printers 4050 4090 4850 4890 4135 and 4635 Default 4050 Enable Five Word FST Font Enable for five word FST font If it has been enabled a special Xerox font format is generated by the PCL5 to X Metacode emulation which supports font files without any size restrictions Option available for Xerox printers 4090 4850 4890 4135 4635 Default disabled Graphic Compression Select a graphic compression algorithm the software uses for generating Xerox IMG graphics from the pull down menu The RAW algorithm will generate uncompressed graphics Using graphic compression will decrease the data stream sent to the printer and increase print performance Available algorithms LIN HTN RAW none Default RAW none DJDE DJDE Definition Define a character string to identify DJDE command lines This character
163. esn t support switching between simplex and duplex pages inside a print job Default disabled e Page Turnover Select a page turnover method Available options e Duplex Side Selection e Form Feed Default Duplex Side Selection Default margins mm Enter the adjustments of the default page margins in millimeters Available margins e Top e Left e Bottom Default 0 00 all Bulk text e Wrap text lines after position Enter number of column after which the emulation will do an automatic carriage return and linefeed Default 512 e Wrap page after line Enter number of lines after which the emulation will do an automatic form feed Default 256 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 72 6 3 7 2 4 e Cursor start horizontal mm Define the initial horizontal cursor position on the page in millimeters Default 0 e Cursor start vertical Indicates the initial vertical cursor position on the page in millimeters Default O Graphics line width pm Define the default width of graphic lines in micrometers Default 24 Copies default Define the default number of copies of a print job Default 1 Allow empty pages Enable to allow empty pages Default disabled Fonts FOL Font substitution In this dialog the allocations between FOL fonts and appropriate PCL5 fonts are made e FOL Font name Enter a FOL font name or select one from the pull down menu Pre defined options e line printer
164. ete Form Delete Select Paper Tray Multiple Copies Collated see Note 1 Tabs Clear Horizontal Tabs Clear Vertical Multiple Copies Non Collated Font Load Graphic Arc Graphic Box Graphic Line Graphic Pie Chart Graphic Window Repeat Graphic Window Superscript Start Line Spacing Line Spacing Absolute Justification Start Justification Stop Subscript Start Merge Page Load Margins Font Change Font ID Assignment Form ID Assignment Form Load Bold Stop Print Job single font orientation Center Print Job mixed orientation Text Placement Relative Super Subscript Stop Character Reassignment at job boundaries Tabs Horizontal Underline Start Font Unload Merge Page Unload Tabs Vertical Underline Stop Reset Line Draw X FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 135 lt ESC gt yX Y L T S lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zaX Y lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zbn lt ESC gt zd lt ESC gt ze lt ESC gt zf lt ESC gt zg lt ESC gt zhc lt ESC gt zj lt ESC gt zkL lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zIlc lt ESC gt zmR lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt znT lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zox lt ESC gt zp lt ESC gt zrn lt ESC gt zsnc lt ESC gt zt lt CR gt lt LF gt data record lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zxform1 form2 form3 form4 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zya comment text lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zydn lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zye lt CR gt
165. f the FORMS4WORK server in a file named FONTTAB XES This file contains font metrics which are used by the emulation This reduces the amount of data transfer because the fonts have to be sent only once to the printer FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 151 Save fonts to printer disk The meaning of this parameter equals to Save fonts to printer flash but the font will be saved to the hard disk however Save to Lexmark Optra S Lexmark Optra S Defines the target printer for the external saving D The parameter must be enabled to use PJL commands HP PJL file system commands PJL FSDOWNLOAD will be used for saving fonts to a hard flash disk The target printer must support the PJL file system command PJL FSDOWNLOAD and the Alphanumeric ID command lt ESC gt amp n W Additionally you have to enable the parameter and the parameter When saving resources externally PJL commands will be used These commands can occasionally separate a page into several jobs To avoid this behavior you should respect the following procedure when saving resources externally 1 Configure the emulation to save resources externally 2 Send all resources to the Emulation 3 Configure the emulation for normal operation With this procedure the resources will be saved externally and known by the printer Now you can send your print jobs without resources Examples To save the fonts to an Optra S flash externally and to save the forms to th
166. f this buffer When the receive buffer is full no more data can be accepted until the data can be processed and FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 30 the buffer is thus emptied If no value is entered here the size of the buffer is only limited by the available hard disk space This setting is only available if Direct Read is not activated Default none no entry possible e Direct Read Enable to let the input data stream not be buffered and not be read directly from the input interface In most cases this setting will improve performance If Channel Input is used in conjunction with very small block sizes the time needed for storing the data in a buffer would affect performance negatively In this case be sure that Direct Read is activated This setting is only available if no protocol is used Default enabled Timeouts e Read Timeout Enter timeout for data reception This value allows the time properties of FORMS4WORK for read operations to be influenced This value should only be changed by experienced users Default 50 msec e Write Timeout Enter timeout for data output This value allows the time properties of FORMS4WORK for write operations to be influenced This value should only be changed by experienced users Default 1000 msec e Delay if data received Enter the time in milliseconds that a print job may be delayed in receiving data so that other print jobs can be completed fluently Print jobs t
167. face In Detail ooocioniiia tati cucssandshnvnwnnsucnnancdnnponandansnencdunponeetaenksacdaapanepannns 11 4 6 Variable Configuration iiicc cssicnecissceneecsstteeecsscteeecssncneesesceaeesestteeesssueneecesteneecssttaeesesteneecesttueeessne 11 4T Processes And Threads e ircocociocionaniinennasinianiaca ceceencdsedinwsa teecensdseedueescededecdantunecavedsasstensdaecaretes 11 48 SPECIMEN APplICAtION sismis a EE AAEE E EEan E EAEra 12 5 Program Components 12 5 1 System SOrviC ci an 12 5 2 PTINEPFOCOSS simi a a 12 5 3 FORMS4 WORK referenc iisccenccccccissisanennccnotihahssanannscnetenensssnennedanteninannishing cantskenasensonccentenseasns 12 5 3 1 Starting FORMS4WORK and logging n cccnnnnncccnncnnninancnnnocanananaccnnnonannn cnn rr crac 12 Connecting to a VE A at 13 ACCESS liada tdi dt tt 13 LOGGING ita da iaa 14 5 3 2 The FORMS4WORK Client Software oomnnnmicniocninninnsinncnrcrcrrr rr 14 Setup and Configuration id be 15 SEVER peri E E E E E E E 15 Common Server Setting Serinin A EA GE bendseeeeeien canara 15 CONNECT A da 15 SOC ii A A A Aida 16 A A sta daana 17 Print Process Options ui aa 17 Common print process Se tiINGS wi dn Aaland aan 18 Log lava iii AREA ae AanuAana Ade Ade Ale iAaaeaS 18 L gical Primers wri sectncdrcedhcct lee Wed free decd aa seaded ei a dadasi edidi videii na 19 Edit Logical Printer einean a 19 Test Logical Print A A AA e ed 21 Run conversion and job MOMtOriNg sesiniac aiaa aeiiaaie a
168. field value string Trim trailing whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace characters are removed from the right end of the data field value string FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 182 6 4 5 2 5 6 4 5 2 6 ASCII Formatted With Fix Column Width This scan method will read ASCII data with a fix width for each data column There are no separator or delimiter characters present or required Each data field is defined by its column width which must be the same over all records To recognize data fields the fields either need to be defined or must be listed in the first data line The table is used to define the list of fields This list needs to be set up in the same order as the fields appear within the job data To add or remove lines right click into the table and use the popup menu Field Name Defines the name of a data field This name needs to be unique and should not contain blanks If a column is not needed select Skip data Chars Defines the number of characters used for this field This is the exact width in characters to be read as field value or to be skipped Read field names from first line If this option is set it is assumed that all data field names are listed as first record in the first line of the data to be processed In this case you need not to enter any field name in the table Only a place holder for each field needs to be defined whether the field is skipped using Skip data o
169. for OCR B as a scalable font independently scalable bar heights and widths the capability to embed text with selectable positioning automatic bar code data compression when required automatic bar code checksum calculation and character placement when required automatic placement of special characters prefix start stop guard bars and so on when required in PCL 5 emulation is the functional equivalent of Hewlett Packard s Bar Codes amp More font set and is a fully compatible alternative to an HP LaserJet with JetCAPS BarSIMM DIMM v1 8e except for the FREESCAPE alternate escape code feature e converting nearly every text in your print job to a barcode With the FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter you have two possibilities for generating a barcode definition which will be printed as a valid barcode Barcode SIMM Emulation Barcode and Field Scanner Barcode SIMM Emulation Generating a barcode by inserting a font like PCL sequence in your document Font selection commands in the incoming PCL5 data stream are analyzed for typeface characteristic values given in the Esc s T command table If the typeface value is one of those given special bar code generation processes the font selection command If the typeface value is not one of those given PCL emulation proceeds as normal The following commands enable you to further define characteristics of the bar code Command structure considerations The incoming data is analyzed for
170. for different print jobs Using this feature it is possible to use specific overlays for print jobs when a so called trigger string has been detected A specific configuration for overlays is called Configuration Profile Which profile you are working on at configuration time is displayed in the combo box Each profile is using the same parameters ASCII PCL Format General Overlays Pages without overlay Fonts Configuration ASCII PCL Format Plain Text Format ASCII Select this option if print job data is delivered containing plain ASCII formatted data without any control codes In this case print jobs have to be formatted using spaces carriage returns and line feeds for a proper print out on the paper Printer Command Language PCL Select this option if print job data is delivered as a complete PCL print job In this case print jobs must contain data with standard PCL commands D Some printer drivers especially in Windows are using printer specific extensions of PCL standard These extensions may not be processed by the Overlay Manager or produce problems with the printed output Please use a printer driver which produces PCL closest to the standard like HP LaserJet Series II or HP LaserJet 5Si General New Creates a new Configuration Profile The new profile is automatically selected and preset with some standard values Add Adds a new profile from a disk file to the list Configuration Profile The added profi
171. gt will be replaced by their actual value at processing time Since these values may be completely numeric which is with some databases not allowed as a table name the prefixes are added Records of new jobs are added To existing records will just insert new records into the table and thus collects records of multiple print jobs cumulatively After deleting existing records will delete any existing record from the table before adding new records Data Fields Field Name Defines the name of a data field This name needs to be unique and should not contain blanks Usually the names are set at scanner definition or detected automatically Field Type This defines the type of the data stored in the database field Varchar is the simplest one where everything may be saved to A Varchar field may have any length up to 255 characters Other types as Integer Double or Date require the field values properly formatted Longtext is for alphanumeric text with more than 255 characters The maximaum length of Longtext is database specific When using any other type than Varchar make sure the data values have the right format e g a field value of catch22 cannot be saved to a Date field Length Defines the length of the database field Writing DOCUMENTS4WORK import files This storage method is writing recognized data into DOCUMENTS4WORK import files D Usage of this storage method requires output of print jobs to file Additionally
172. gt zw lt ESC gt zybc lt ESC gt zyc lt ESC gt zyhmS lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zysv1 v2 v3 v4 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zzn MCK command language END lt CR gt lt LF gt Note 1 Partially implemented Boxes will be filled only See parameter Language for supported languages Command Graphic Delete Channel Select Bisync Data Monitor Assign Ink Color Graphic Fill see Note 1 Code Print Operator Text Message Tabs Horizontal Set Bisync Job Prioritize Page Format Select Job Summary Report Margins Double Page see Note 2 Offset Special Paper Enable Complex Print Mode Ink Change see Note 3 Vector Draw VFU Stops VFU Stops Clear Bypass Paper Size or Manual Feed Paper Size Select Time Stamp Text Highlight Shift Plane Prioritize Mode Switching see Note 4 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 136 Note 2 Partially implemented pure text pages only Note 3 Partially implemented Works only with horizontal and vertical lines in 8 distinct shadings instead 16 Note 4 Only used for switching explicit into Transparent mode when MCK EMULATE PCL END MCK EMULATE POSTSCRIPT END or XES mode when MCK EMULATE XDCS END MCK EMULATE XES END Otherwise the command is ignored 6 3 17 3 Parameters 6 3 17 3 1 Common Page Settings Offsets Normally a PCL5 printer for output in portrait format will leave a margin of 70 dots 6 mm on both sides and a header and footer margin of
173. h French Dutch Spanish Italian Danish Norwegian Finnish Swedish German Swedish not supported Belgian not supported French Canadian Portuguese not supported Latin American not supported User defined table D The Language parameter is only valid if Data Encoding is set to ASCII 6 3 17 3 8 Resources The settings on this page influence the treatment of resources fonts forms etc The XES to PCL5 emulation is able to store frequently used resources locally or externally on the printer The following files may be optionally present in the resources directory Path RESOURCE XES may contain fonts and forms in XES syntax PREJOB XES may contain arbitrary commands in XES syntax POSTJOB XES may contain arbitrary commands in XES syntax 1 XES 9 XES 1 9 profiles may contain arbitrary commands in XES syntax Depending from the parameter Loading the file RESOURCE XES will be read and the XES commands interpreted Before or after processing a print job the files PREJOB XES and POSTJOB XES will be used When a XES reset command encountered in the print data stream one of the profile will be used Resource Path The directory is to be entered which contains the resources that are to be sent to the printer D This parameter can not be changed while configuring a remote system Installation The list contains resources files which have already been installed By selecting Install new files may be added to the list
174. h do support usage of the Field Scanner filter FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 183 6 4 5 2 7 Saving To ODBC Database This storage method is writing recognized data into an ODBC data source Recognized data fields are buffered until a record entity is recognized as complete If a data field is recognized more than once before completion of a record entity the newer value may overwrite the past As soon as a record entity is complete all data of this record is saved into the ODBC data source table as configured Configuration is done by defining e Data Source e Data Table e Data Fields Data Source Name Select the ODBC data source from the list of known and configured data sources User Enter the user name to be used for connecting the ODBC data source or leave empty if not needed Password Enter the password to be used for connecting the ODBC data source or leave empty if not needed Connect Click on this button to establish a connection to the ODBC data source A connection must be established to complete the configuration of the data table which is used to receive recognized data ODBC Manager This button opens an applet for setting up ODBC data sources The applet is the same as known from the system control An ODBC data source needs to be defined and configured within this dialog before it can be used for setting up this storage Data Table Table creation This controls whether a new table is cre
175. haracter of the job name e Cut Length This defines the length of the job name exactly it describes how many characters starting from the cut offset after the trigger string should be used for the job name Example The banner page looks like this x x x x START START START JOBID s s2523 3JOBO8S207 JOB NAME MYJOBNAME USERID THEUSER SYSOUT CLASS M x x x START START START To extract the job name the trigger would be set to JOBID Since the Job name here e g JOB08207 is eight characters long and starts ten characters after JOBID the cut offset would be set to 10 and the cut length to 8 A trigger JOBID with colon and a cut offset of 9 would also work 6 3 6 2 9 Performance Data Processing e Max block size for reading Define the maximum size in kilobytes which the emulation shall attempt to read at the Input port by means of one read access FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 64 If there are fewer data there only so many bytes are read as actually exist If there are already more data there the maximum number of data that will be read corresponds to this value and the remaining data are not read until the next read process O Frequent read access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB e Block size for output buffering Define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is a
176. hat arrive at the same time are processed in parallel Each print job is allocated a certain amount of processor time for this purpose which it must share with other print jobs Default 0 msec e Delay if no data received Enter the time in milliseconds that a print job can be delayed if no data are currently being received for this print job If no data are currently being received for a print job the print job may be delayed and the available processor time can be assigned to other print jobs Default 10 msec FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 31 6 2 2 2 Sessions Maximum of input sessions Enter maximum number of input sessions When this number of sessions has been reached further connection requests by a host are rejected until the number falls below the maximum level again If no value is entered here or if O is entered the number of sessions is unlimited Default 10 Maximum of pending jobs Enter maximum number of pending jobs When the maximum number of pending jobs has been reached further print jobs will not be processed If no value or 0 is entered here there is no limit to the number of pending jobs D If a very large number of print jobs is processed at the same time this may have a major adverse effect on the system performance Default 10 Session Timeout Enter session timeout interval in seconds If no data are received from a connection for example a TCP IP session for a certain time
177. he IRESULT option will be honored only within 2 color images because in this case a distinction on pixel boundary can be done Otherwise the color of overlapping objects depends on the order they are printed Text color Allows to adjust the RGB values of a primary color This adjustment is valid for objects like text horizontal and vertical lines and logos Image color Allows to adjust the RGB values of a primary color This adjustment is only valid for image objects Filters Overview Overview You can define various filters for input and output to compensate for incompatibilities between the host system and the destination print system in the character sets and for non supported commands or character string in the print data before and after conversion by an emulation The following filters are available e Barcode Filter e Codepage Filter e Conditional Stringchange Filter e Field Scanner Filter e Job Copier Filter e Job Separator Filter e Recordchange Filter e Stringchange Filter e Textextractor Filter FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 161 6 4 2 6 4 2 1 6 4 2 2 Barcode Filter Application The FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter enables PCL printers to print a wide variety of the most popular industry standard bar codes including 2D barcodes like PDF 417 and Datamatrix The FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter primarily generates bar codes algorithmically in PCL 5 emulation FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter includes support
178. he end of the page are removed Recordchange Filter Application The Recordchange filter of the FORMS4WORK Server is used in order to change block or record oriented data streams from one format to another at the input and or output of the FORMS4WORK emulations The following table shows the current possible input and corresponding output formats of the RECORDCHANGE filter which may be configured FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 191 6 4 8 2 From Input Format NPS internal Format To Output Format NPS internal Format S 370 Byte or Word Length Record Format Barr S 370 Byte or Word Length Record Format Barr NPS internal Format S 370 Byte or Word Length Record Format Barr Line printer Format NPS internal Format Channel Input Format NPS internal Format IBM Tapes Input Format NPS internal Format BS2000 Channel Input Format Line printer Format Microfocus Cobol Input Format NPS internal Format Bull Input Format NPS internal Format RS6000 Input Format NPS internal Format LCDS Input Format NPS internal Format ASCII Barr Format NPS internal Format CUSTOM 01 lt length gt lt user gt lt PCC gt lt data gt NPS internal Format Configuration In the configuration dialog of the Recordchange filter the input as well as the output data format is selected Depending upon the selected format further configuration options can be chosen Filter formats NPS Internal Format This format is used by X Me
179. he resource folder Default disabled Max output image dpi Limits the PCL image resolution for printers that cannot handle resolutions higher than the selected value The default value off means no limitation is active FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 94 Default off Settings e Inword Position Adjustment Enter inword position adjustment Conversion errors in the units used may result in positioning errors Using this option it is possible to force compensation even inside a word The value defines how great the offset in 300 dpi may become before a repositioning process takes place The parameter directly influences the output size The possible values are O to 25 with values up to approx 10 being sensible Default O disabled e SVI Threshold Enter SVI threshold Controls the variable space character increment Since the result will be useless if in the data stream a value of several inches is defined for this value it is possible to use this parameter to define an upper limit up to which the values in the data stream may be used Default O disabled e Debug Level Set the debug level Controls how many additional messages the IPDS to PCL5 emulation writes to the Dispatcher log file when Debug message Level is enabled Possible values are O to 3 D Use only while doing traces Contact support service to learn when to set this parameter This parameter afflicts performance Default O disabl
180. he task Available options are e Copy temporary file e Copy stdout e Copy stderr e Program handles output e Default Copy temporary file e Copy temporary file Copy the temporarily created file FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 130 e Copy stdout e Copy stderr e Program handles output Select to let the external program handle the output Run Select the mode in which you wish the external program to be displayed on the screen Available options are Normal Minimized Hidden Default Hidden Priority Select how much computing time shall be assigned to the external program Capacities can thus be used optimally Available options are Idle Below Normal Normal Above Normal Default Normal Stdout to log Enable to select how the external application s output is documented in the log file Default disabled Available options are Info Extended Info Warning Error Debug Default option Info Stderr to log Enable to select how the external application s output is documented in the log file Default enabled Available options are Info Extended Info Warning Error Debug Default option Error 6 3 15 2 2 Performance Data Processing e Max block size for reading Define the maximum size in kilobytes which the emulation shall attempt to read at the Input port by means of one read access If there are fewer data there only so many bytes are read as actually exist If there are already more d
181. ht hand side Printed Jobs For every item in the Printed Jobs list the following information is available e Date Time shows the date and time when the job has been completely printed e Name shows job name The name is extracted from the job itself or automatically created by FORMS4WORK e Status shows job status Possible entries are Deleting Error Canceled Printed Printing Byte Held Spooled Connecting Emulating Receiving Those entries can be added by Paused Delayed Delayed until Date Time Kept e Pages shows number of printed pages e Printed shows number of printed pages e Size shows size of print job e User shows name of the user client who has printed the job Detailed information for a selected job are shown in the job properties frame on the right hand side Job Properties Job Properties The job properties window is a dynamic status display of the job currently selected in the job list frame Besides the core job information as its name type size creation time and ownership there are further dynamically updated information about its state and available actions To view and modify the properties of several jobs at once highlight the respective jobs Depending on its status the following actions are applicable for one or more jobs e Print re print the spooled job s FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 23 5 3 2 3 e Advanced Reprint Reprint some or all pages of the spoo
182. iative property for a b c a b c As above a b c a b c Multiplication before addition a b c a b c Power of has higher priority as a b c a b c Associative property for power of sin x pi sin x pi a sqrt e a sqrt e Structural functions IF condition then else Returns result depending on condition Condition is an expression using lt gt and lt gt for not equal which may be true or false The expression given by then will be returned if condition is true else the expression given by else will be returned String functions VAL string Convert string to numerical value TEXT value Convert numerical value to string LENGTH string Returns number of characters in string LEFT string chars Returns chars left characters of string If chars is missing 1 is assumed MID string pos chars Returns chars of string beginning at position pos RIGHT string chars Returns chars right characters of string If chars is missing 1 is assumed LOWER string chars Changes first chars of string to lower case If chars is missing the whole string is changed UPPER string chars Changes first chars of string to upper case If chars is missing the whole string is changed Numeric functions The following mathematical standard functions are implemented and supported transcendental Fct sin cos tan cot asin acos atan acot Hyperbolical Fct sinh co
183. ical Printer from the Setup menu to remove a logical printer the highlighted row from the list This may be necessary to add a new logical printer component Print process Opens Print process options See print process D You must have administrator access to use this function Server Opens Server options See server Backup Saves or restores a complete configuration of a FORMS4WORK Server The backup includes a ZIP compatible archive file of the entire configuration of the server and all log files FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 27 5 3 2 4 4 Help 5 3 2 5 5 3 2 6 5 3 2 7 Index Opens the FORMS4WORK online help with the index for information search by keywords Info Displays version and copyright information for the FORMS4WORK application Click on information window to return to the program Icon Bar Gives fast access to the most important commands Start Print Process Stop Print Process Edit Logical Printer Add Logical Printer Remove Logical Printer View Logical Printers Watch Print Devices Print Process Bar Shows the current print process with its Logical Printers and allows fast access to a print process via pull down menu Choose one print process from the list and click Go to go to the chosen print process Watch Print Devices The Print Device window is used to monitor printers as output devices which are used by FORMS4WORK to process the print jobs The requi
184. ich are making sense Graphic window throughput Matrix graphic windows are loaded into the RAM memory of the printer as PCL matrix graphics in other words they can only be printed once on the page and not modified For PCL printers with a small memory Graphic window hold in memory Matrix graphic windows are held in the RAM memory of the emulation in other words they can be printed several times on the page and also modified lt ESC gt gr is fully supported D Matrix graphic windows within a constant page lt ESC gt M or a form lt ESC gt N are always stored in the RAM memory of the printer as PCL macros see Partial regardless of the setting of Page buffer Flags Save fonts to local disk Fonts will be saved automatically in Sixel format to the hard disk of the FORMS4WORK server using their name and the extension FNT They will be resent to the printer if required Any font load command as lt ESC gt F or lt ESC gt A will be removed Save forms to local disk Constant forms will be saved automatically to the hard disk of the FORMS4WORK server using their name and the extension FRM They will be resent to the printer if required A form load command lt ESC gt N and form end Command lt ESC gt X FF etc will be removed Save fonts to printer flash Fonts will be saved in PCL bitmap font format to the optional external FLASH memory of the printer The Emulation always saves its actual state to the local disk o
185. ide the date parts You may also leave this field empty if no separator is required E g the order of YMD without separator as e g 20050301 is commonly used because this supports numeric sorting of dates Two digit day and month If checked the day and the month is always formatted with 2 digits as e g 03 instead of 3 Four digit year If checked the year is formatted with 4 digits as e g 2005 instead of 05 Data Fields All field definitions are set in the table and will reference field definitions defined at the scanner configuration To add or remove lines right click into the table and use the popup menu Value Select a data field name configured with the scanner method or lt Document file gt to refer the print job output Field Type DOCUMENTS4WORK uses text fields and document fields To control usage of a recognized data field select the appropriate field type here Text fields are written to import file using the field identifier FI document fields are written to import file using the field identifier BI Field ID Each data field used for import also needs to be referenced by an unique ID Select the appropriate value here Field IDs for text fields are allowed in the range of 1001 up to 1999 Document fields may have IDs in the range of 2001 up to 2999 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 186 6 4 6 6 4 6 1 6 4 6 2 Date If checked the field is marked as a date which has to be re formatted u
186. ield value Regardless of the optional trimming of leading and or trailing whitespace characters this option will remove space and tab characters within the field value As an example a field value of VALUE with this option enabled will result in a value of VALUE To remove the leading or trailing blanks the options trim leading and or trim trailing whitespace FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 177 6 4 5 2 2 characters need to be used Variable This list contains job information data as job id job name user name etc All this information whenever it becomes available is dynamically set for each job By selecting field type Variable and one of these job information fields you may use job information as a field value Constant This field is used to define a constant value It might be necessary to set a field value always to a constant value To do this select Constant as field type and enter the value to be used here Premature whitespace terminates value When e g the value is defined with a length of 8 bytes there may be spaces within this length With this option set the space character will terminate the value even before the length of 8 is reached The result will be 1234 instead of 1234 678 when a space is found between the digits 4 and 6 This is also done for other whitespace characters as Tab Carriage Return Line Feed and Form Feed Trim leading whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace charact
187. if a channel device is physically attached to the FORMS4WORK server e Printer Emulation Shows the type of the emulated channel printer This option is set with the corresponding Channel Input Device Selection is possible only if a channel device is physically attached to the FORMS4WORK server e Ignore UCS Enable to ignore UCS Only available if printer type SNI 3338 39 is selected in the Printer Emulation field It allows to setup FORMS4WORK to ignore the parity of the printer s Universal Character Set Buffer Output e Type Select an output type from the pull down menu It allows to select the type of printer which is really connected to FORMS4WORK The type of output also determines the available tabs in the Channel Emulation Properties dialog Available options are e Centralized Channel 3203 5 e Centralized Channel 3211 e Decentralized with CR LF FF e Decentralized with PC Code Default Decentralized with CR LF FF Centralized Channel 3203 05 specifies a centralized Printer IBM 3203 05 which is equipped with a channel interface This output type is only designed for use when FORMS4WORK is connected to a Siemens mainframe with operating system BS2000 and the converter emulates either the printers SNI 3338 39 or FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 55 SNI 3348 When selected a check box Data Check is available Enable Data Check to verify data for each code is printable Default disabled When selected the UC
188. ify user when printing failed The user will be notified if the job could not be printed This function is only available if the user address is known by FORMS4WORK This function is only available if the user address is known by FORMS4WORK This depends on the configuration and the input ports used For displaying the notifications the Accounting Popup Tool must be running on the printing client Find server automatically in network If checked the accounting server will be searched automatically by UDP broadcasts in the network Specify an address if you have more than one accounting server in your network or if the server can not be reached by UDP broadcasts Connect timeout Timeout in seconds to connect to the accounting server Communication timeout Timeout in seconds for communication with the accounting server Idle timeout The connection to the accounting server is dropped after the specified number of seconds Password If a password has been setup at the accounting server it has to be entered here Otherwise leave it blank D Accounting must be installed separately and has to be licensed Print Process Options Print process properties and options refer to the configuration of its common settings and event logging behavior You must have administrator access to use this function FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 18 Common print process settings Name Define name of the print process Max Concurre
189. iian Naa 21 JODIE ad e la 21 ACTIVE JODS iii a ra 22 Printed JODS icon id tt A ita dat 22 Job Propere Sesinia a AA dd 22 JOD Propertie Siuntiniai ae ae tdt 22 FORMS4WORK Advanced Repita A A aed Ia 23 EVENT view Vist coin a AAA AAA id 23 MEN S aio ld it et 24 A O NN 24 JOD rt EE ed ee DOE ea A ee ae 25 SO UP vir AAA Pua A alan Aide AawuAaiS ASAE AS RAM aa AA AGIaAS 26 A edhe the ee cs 27 ICOM Balt ir ai AR AAA AAA LETEA ATESAT 27 Print Process BR didas 27 Watch Print AAASARR cnonsbaedsasceassascensessedassttensstede iene sessencsiacndavencsssdndeicnsasttanantcsendes 27 6 Configuration 28 6 1 Intro MU CTION seeriana aaaeeeaa neadi naea inamaana enaa an aaaea A ONEA i anaana 28 6 2 Input Interfaces iii ada aandaa aA EEA chstanceeesdceeessssdnddbecdenee esis 29 6 2 1 LONTAN ard Ar AEA iia 6 2 2 Properties Settings Input Itaca a E A E 29 A AN Data Input Interface Data Type sirier Adar tddi ia td Data Capturing Input Interface E dh as us 6 2 3 Channel ISA 3s cicts acecsecccscided sc deeaseen sche see ciactesadicaccasaacaheasdccen sed apaceesnadscucztceesdecescnensee cpaitessd eaiezscenss Channel ISA Input Port 6 2 4 Channel PCI sassen Channel PCI Input Port 6 2 5 System DEVICE isis dieere saapad cst aszcbacesiidediteakescdesissicstscudheeesdecidit deseseshsciaaiitessds System Device Input Port 37 Protocol Input System DEVICE cotidianidad td dad 39 6 2
190. ility on displaying messages The level uses a range from O to 99 where O has the highest priority and 99 the lowest This allows to turn on off several types of messages Important messages usually have a verbose level of 0 A specific message type can be switched off completely by setting the verbose level to 1 D It is not recommended to switch off the error and warning messages Verbose Level Sets the current verbose level of the message type Warning Show only once When activated no multiple warnings with the same text are given out Category Sets the current allowed category of the message type D A selected highlighted category is activated a deselected is deactivated A message will be displayed if the verbose level of the message is less or equal to the currently set verbose level and its category corresponds to the currently set category that means Verbose Level of message lt current set verbose level AND category of message current set category 6 3 18 2 6 Finisher Options These options are printer dependent D Choose always the proper Printer type if known within the tab Start Command If Printer Type is set to No specific a common HP PJL command will be used to activate the given option e g for stapling PJL SET FINISH STAPLE in this case the staple options TOP BOTTOM or BOTH are ignored Staple position Determines the staple options Stapling will be activated by the
191. in as an input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs Twain Input Settings Sessions Data Type Data Capturing Twain Input Port Twain Source Selects the Twain Source scanner All scans in a single job All Twain scans will be collected in a single job Ifa is defined the job will automatically splitted If disabled every Twain scan job will result in a single FORMS4WORK job Default disabled D A Twain job may contain several pages if supported by the Twain source FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 51 Show user interface of the Twain Source The user interface of the selected Twain Source will be shown before the scan starts This user interface is supplied by the manufacturer of the scanner and is not part of FORMS4WORK In this user interface various parameter can be defined If it is supported by the scanner the number of pages to scan can also be defined Default enabled Maximum number of scan images in buffer Memory buffer for scanned images If the buffer is filled scanning will be delayed until the images are printed Default 5 6 3 Emulations 6 3 1 Introduction FORMS4WORK offers the following emulations for the conversion of print data Barcode Label Software Chained Emulations Channel Emulation Comparex Line Mode Forms Overlay Language IGP to PCL IPDS to PCL5 Color IPDS to PDF Color Job Controller PCL to PDF PCL5 to X Metacode Color Prescribe to PCL Progr
192. inch of proportional spaced fonts Default 10 Stroke Select the stroke of the font from the pull down menu Available options are Ultra Thin Extra Thin Thin Extra Light Light Demi Light Semi Light Medium Semi Bold Demi Bold Bold Extra Bold Black Extra Black Ultra Black Default Medium Style Select the style of the font from the pull down menu Available styles are Upright Condensed Italic Italic Condensed Compressed Expanded Outline Shadowed Outline Inline Shadowed Default Upright Symbol Set Enter the number of the symbol set i e the ID of the PCL character set of the selected font Default 277 Back to Fonts Performance Data Processing e Max block size for reading Define the maximum size in kilobytes which the emulation shall attempt to read at the Input port by means of one read access If there are fewer data there only so many bytes are read as actually exist If there are already more data there the maximum number of data that will be read corresponds to this value and the remaining data are not read until the next read process Frequent read access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32768 Bytes e Block size for output buffering Define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted The data processed by the emulation are passed to the output port To reduce the number of write access att
193. ing prescribe mode usually R for R This character may be entered directly or by decimal code FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 126 Default cassette R4 Determines the default input tray printer specific Default stacker RO Determines the default output tray printer specific CR action P2 Determines the behavior when a carriage return control code is received lt CR gt 0x0D LF action P3 Determines the behavior when a line feed control code is received lt LF gt Ox0A Symbol set U6 U7 Determines the symbol set Top margin Ai A2 Determines the default margins Left margin A3 A4 Determines the default margins Page length A5 A6 Determines the default margins Page width A7 A8 Determines the default margins Lines Inch UO U1 Determines the default line spacing Chars Inch U2 U3 Determines the default character spacing when fixed spaced default font is used 6 3 14 2 2 Page Offsets With these setting the complete page may be shifted Visible window short edge offset Shifts the logical page This value has the same effect like the PCL top offset registration command lt ESC gt amp l Z Visible window long edge offset Shifts the logical page This value has the same effect like the PCL left offset registration command FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 127 lt ESC gt amp l U Vector short edge offset This offset will be added to ea
194. ion If no value is entered here the connection is not closed before all data was sent to the receiver The FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 224 6 6 8 2 6 6 8 3 session will then be closed normally using a FIN packet If a value is entered here the connection will be closed as soon as the defined time has passed If not all data could be sent the connection gets closed using a RST packet and the receiver won t get the remaining data If all data could be send during the defined time the connection will be closed using a FIN packet as normally Protocol TCP IP LPD LPR protocol LPR Output Using this protocol option allows sending print jobs to printer or host which supports LPD Line Printer Demon functionality Queue Name of the LPR queue offered by the remote print server This name must be supported by the remote print server If jobs are sent to a printer which supports one queue only or if the queue doesn t matter the name AUTO can be used Timeout Timeout in milliseconds the output port is waiting for replies of the remote print server Print banner page If enabled a banner page is printed before each job Not all remote print servers support this feature Set job name as title If enabled the title name of the print job is set to job name which was used by FORMS4WORK The remote print server then will use this job name too Default On Send control file before data If enabled the LPR con
195. ion Paper Size Select the installed paper size for the selected tray The pre defined paper sizes A4 Letter Legal and user defined values are supported Unit Select the unit for the values in Width and Height for user defined paper sizes Possible settings are e 1 1440 inch e inch e cm Width Define the width of the user defined paper size Enter the value for the width in the unit set in Unit This option is only accessible if paper size is set to User defined Height Define the height of the user defined paper size Enter the value for the height in the unit set in Unit This option is only accessible if paper size is set to User defined Wide carriage LEF Default disabled FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 93 Ignore Page Offset Enable to ignore page offset When printing formatted lists Fixed Size Records or AFP Line Printer streams that are not reformatted using PSF on host side it might be necessary to print to the largest possible area on the paper With this option a Page Offset command sent by the IPDS host system can be disabled Default disabled Media attributes Depending on the printer type there can be an additional seletion of Media Attributes like Paper Type and Media Weight which can be assigned to the selected IPDS Tray number D If you additionally set the Std Duplex input tray parameters to Automatic ID 0 for all activated IPDS Trays you can make the
196. ird solution of FORMS4WORK allows a combination of underlining text and or making text non recognizable and or bold printing text As soon as a channel command x 01 Write without spacing was received the content of that line will be compared with the following print line Depending on the selected bold printing mode FORMS4WORK will insert both at the beginning and at the end of matching contents the specified control strings Bold Printing Mode Select a bold printing mode from the pull down menu Dependent to the selected mode it might be necessary to define additional fields Available options are e None FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 59 6 3 6 2 6 e Bold Font e Pixelshift e Attribute None This selection will disable the bold mode function Bold Font This selection requires to define 2 control strings which let the printer use a bold font or re select the normal font Pixelshift This selection requires to define 2 control strings which let the printer start and terminate the pixel shift mode Often it is not necessary to define a terminating control string because of auto termination at the end of the print line Attribute When this mode is selected the following parameters are available and must be defined e Bold on e g 1B28733342 e Bold off e g 1B28732D3342 e Underline on e g 18266444 e Underline off e g 18266440 e Underline character e g 6D EBCDIC e Overprint character e g
197. is option defines the advance control VFU Vertical Format Unit of the emulation It is only available with Decentralized with CR LF FF as output type The following types are available e None e EVFU e ESC Default None None can be used with all page printers The print system does not receive any information about form length The information included in the Forms Control Buffer FCB will only be stored in the emulation All advance commands received via the channel interface will be converted into the corresponding number of Carriage Return Line Feed and Form Feed EVFU supports a paper advance control format EVFU Electronical Vertical Format Unit commonly known as P series This VFU format does not require the signal line Paper Instruction PI Form length as well as channel codes included will be loaded into the EVFU memory of the printer After that the lines containing channel codes can be directly addressed by control codes in range of 10 hex to 1B hex during print operation An EVFU load cycle starts and ends with special control codes and requires one byte for every print line of the form ESC is nearly identical to None In contrast the printer gets information about the length of the used form by an Escape string To obtain the highest possible compatibility to various printers the sequence can be modified except the values representing the length of the form To do this modify the following parameters As an example
198. is placed in a separate file Default disabled not active e Without protocol data With protocol data Set if you want the protocol data to be saved to the log file too Default Without protocol data e Maximum files to capture Define the maximum number of files to be captured D If the specified maximum number of files is reached older files will be overwritten Default 99 e Maximum size MB Define the maximum number of megabytes per job to be captured Default 0 unlimited Maximum hours to keep Files will be deleted after the specified number of hours Default 720 e Add job name to captured filename Enable if you want the job name to be added to the captured filename The job name will be added in parenthesis to the captured filename Default enabled FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 34 6 2 3 6 2 3 1 Channel ISA The selection of a Channel as an input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs Channel Input Device Settings Sessions Data Type Data Capturing You can choose between 2 channel input devices Channel ISA Input Port D A channel input device must be installed on your FORMS4WORK server in order to work with this interface To install device execute ChannelInput exe from the FORMS4WORK software package Options Printer Emulation Select a printer emulation from the pull down menu Available printers are IBM 3211 IBM 3825 IPDS IBM 4245 IBM 4248 IPD
199. itional information about the print job as source name etc can be transferred This information will be transferred before the print data To use this feature the option of the corresponding input port must be checked too This option must not be used if the receiver is not a FORMS4WORK input port FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 190 6 4 8 6 4 8 1 Standard output receives This option controls what is sent to the standard output port of the print process nothing There is no output at all All pages classified by trigger sequences are divided into the partial print jobs unassigned pages are dropped unassigned pages only All pages classified by trigger sequences are divided into the partial print jobs unassigned pages are sent to the standard output port everything All data is transparently sent also to the standard output port Remove trigger sequence This option controls what happens to the trigger sequences which were detected within the print job data not at all The trigger sequences are untouched exactly The trigger sequences are removed as found with their exact length of characters and all until next escape The trigger sequences and all subsequent data until the next PCL escape sequence are removed and all until end of line The trigger sequences and all subsequent data until the next line feed are removed and all until end of page The trigger sequences and all subsequent data until t
200. ize 1 1 1 5s Example Esc s13p24670T selects Code 3 of 9 with human readable text half embedded and start stop characters Because the v b s and h parameters are not specified their values default to ev 4inch e b1 s1 01 inch e b2 s2 03 inch e h automatically sized Courier bold Command Esc s H or Esc s H Selects the font used for human readable text The numeric value of is of the form CBA where A typeface 0 Courier default for all bar code symbologies FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 165 1 Letter Gothic 2 Univers 3 Univers Condensed 4 CG Times 5 OCR B B size 0 Automatic font size default C style 0 Default bold 1 Regular 2 Italic 3 Bold 4 Bold Italic Example Esc s305h24620T selects EAN JAN 8 with automatically sized OCR B Bold text Because the v p b and s parameters are not specified their values default to e v 7inch e p print text half embedded e bi s1 013 inch e b2 s2 027 inch e b3 s3 04 inch e b4 s4 053 inch Additional configuration options Normally for this type of barcode generation no additional configuration options have to be set All necessary parameters are coming with the print job data If there are some configuration options which cant be encoded in the font like PCL sequence please open the properties dialog of the FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter In the Barcode Definition Editor dialog you have to insert a new definition with default valu
201. lay before next try on read error If a problem occurs at the input port during reading the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next read attempt This prevents a slow input port slowing down the system by frequently repeated read attempts Default 1000 msec e Delay before next try on write error Define the delay before next try on write error If a problem occurs at the output port during writing the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next write attempt This prevents a slow output port slowing down the system by frequently repeated write attempts Default 10 msec e Timeout for shutdown Define the time in milliseconds which the Print process shall wait for completion of the emulation thread If the set time has elapsed before the emulation thread has been terminated correctly by itself it will be terminated by the Print process D Ensure that you set an adequate time to allow the emulation thread to terminate by itself The set value should not generally be changed Default 5000 msec Bidirectional Communication e Produce ACK NAK responses Enable to produce ACK NAK responses When processing print jobs which are received through a Channel Input Port and when processing IPDS print jobs usually it is necessary to send feedback responses to the host system In other situations these responses might not be applicable For highest flexibility i
202. le The banner page looks like this x x x x START START START JOBID o 2 JOB08Z07 JOB NAME MYJOBNAME USERID 2e t THEUSER SYSOUT CLASS M x x x START START START To extract the job name the trigger would be set to JOBID Since the Job name here e g JOB08207 is eight characters long and starts ten characters after JOBID the cut offset would be set to 10 and the cut length to 8 A trigger JOBID with colon and a cut offset of 9 would also work Job Separation e Split on command FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 98 Split on Command enables job splits on a specific IPDS command contained within the print job For the XOH and XOA commands the subcommand order may be entered as a 4 digit hexadecimal value This is especially useful if the IPDS sender inserts non standard commands into the data stream e g to drive finisher equipment For further reference please use IBM document S544 3417 IPDS Reference Manual e Job Split on Trigger Define the trigger on which the job shall be split Sometimes it is desirable to split a large print job into several smaller ones e g to start printing sooner when the jobs are very large or to trigger an offset stacker at the printer s finisher Job split on trigger means that the job will be split after the defined string has been found on the page e Split Job after x pages enter the number of page breaks
203. le becomes also the current profile Replace FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 207 Replaces the current profile with a profile which will be read from a disk file Save as Saves the current profile to a file on the disk This file later on can be read using the buttons Add and Replace Delete Deletes the current profile if you answer the question if you sure with yes Profile Name Arbitrary name of the current Configuration Profile Trigger String Here you have to define a character sequence Trigger String which is unique and should be near the beginning of the print job This character sequence if present will activate the current profile D This input field requires character strings which may contain characters which can not be entered using the keyboard These are usually control characters as lt ESC gt or lt CR gt lt LF gt You can enter these characters by their hexadecimal value with a preceding sign The sign itself is entered as Example lt ESC gt 100 is entered as 1B100 Default Configuration If this field is switched on the current Configuration Profile will be used as standard profile i e this configuration will be used as long as no Trigger String will activate another Configuration Profile Keep current configuration after job If this field is switched on the current Configuration Profile will be used until another Configuration Profile is loaded by detection
204. led job s and or redirect it to other printers e View viewing of job data e Redirect redirection of jobs from the last used device to a different device e Schedule delay output of a print job to a specific date time e Pause Undo Pause pause or continue processing the job s e Keep Undo Keep keep or remove the job s e Printed set or remove attribute printed of the job e Delete delete the job s e Cancel cancel processing of the spooled job s e Input Trace File retrieve the file which contains the captured job data before the data have been converted by the emulation This action is only available if the Data Monitoring option was active while processing job data Output Trace File retrieve the file which contains the captured job data after the data have been converted by the emulation This action is only available if the Data Monitoring option was active while processing job data D Only the actions are shown that can currently be applied Advanced Reprint Define the pages of the job to reprint it or to send it to the original printer or an other destination or printer In the page ranges table first define a range starting with From Page and ending with To Page for the destination or printer Depending on this range you can select an other printer to print the pages before the range start and to print the pages after the end of the range Select lt Skip gt in the Destination Printer column if you do not wa
205. ling short edge allows the output to be scaled in terms of its height The parameter Scaling long edge on the other hand allows the output to be scale in terms of its width If moving the output does not produce the result you want you can use the parameters Scaling short edge and Scaling long edge to change the size of the output in other words to scale it This will adjust existing XES forms to the printable area of the PCL5 printer D Please note that all lines and positions can be scaled by this process Examples Scaling short edge 15 0 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 139 Reduction along the long edge of the page in other words in the vertical direction by 15 Scaling long edge 15 0 Reduction along the short edge of the page in other words in the horizontal direction by 15 Scaling short edge 15 0 and Scaling long edge 15 0 Reduction by 15 in both directions Number Of Copies Define the number of default copies Default 1 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 140 6 3 17 3 2 Duplex Settings Mode Define the standard print mode Available options are Simplex Duplex short edge binding Duplex long edge binding Back Side Offsets Portrait Set offsets that only apply for the back of the page in portrait format You can define the following offsets e Long edge binding top e Long edge binding left e Short edge binding top e Short edge binding left The settings will be done for po
206. lity Parameters Printer Type Select the printer type from the pull down menu These settings always represent a group of printers For example the 3812 stands for all printers that have a resolution of 240 x 240 dpi and use the simplex method If you have a printer of this type and cannot find it among those in parameter 4 enter 3812 In the same way 3916 stands for a 300 x 300 dpi duplex printer that is not on the list If the printer you use is not included on the list below and the use of the appropriate type class does not produce the results you require please contact your service partner FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 80 Printer type Advertised Plex type Remarks default resolution dpi 3812 or types with 240 Simplex Advertises resident fonts 240 x 240 simplex 4028 or types with 300 Simplex Duplex For duplex operation set 300 x 300 simplex mod to 18 Printer advertises resident fonts 4224 144 Simplex Use for line printer data to replace dot matrix printers Printer advertises resident font 3816 or types with 240 Duplex Advertises resident fonts 240 x 240 duplex 3916 or types with 300 Duplex Advertises resident fonts 300 x 300 duplex 3825 240 240 Duplex Printer does not advertise resident fonts 3825 300 300 Duplex Printer does not advertise resident fonts 3116 300 Duplex 3827 240 240 Duplex Same as 3825 240 only advertised ID differs 3827 300 30
207. llows setting of default parameters for a report This is similar to the original START command of a Xerox 4050 4090 printer START jde 3jd1 copies FORM form JDE JOB Field for the job descriptor entry JDL Field for the job descriptor library Copies Defines the number of copies If a value is given other than zero this value overwrites any given value specified in a job descriptor entry or within a DJDE command FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 154 Form Specifies a FORM as overlay for printed pages Process Mode The processing mode of the emulation Currently only Online is supported Y X Offset in 1 300 inch This is a common vector offset Y vpos X hpos to shift the complete content of a page The offset may be given for portrait and landscape pages independently with signed values according to the following scheme Portrait vpos Landscape Destination Printer Feature Enables or disables special features which the destination PCL printer may utilize Use Collating Multiple Copies GPJL SET QTY n Activating this option produces copies on a job basis i e the whole print job can be copied D If the printer does not support this feature copies are made on page base i e each page will be copied Emulation generates copies Copies will be produced by the emulation D This results into much bigger jobs bad performance Should be activated only if the order of the
208. lt LF gt lt ESC gt zyfn lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zyin UDK c Note 1 Line Draw Y Baseline Placement Absolute Form Merge Start Merge Stop Merge Start Units 1 300 Inch Units 1 60 Inch Form Merge Stop Justification Unlimited Start Margin Left Language see Note 2 Margin Right Margin Top Overstrike Start Overstrike Stop Output Tray Character Spacing Absolute Character Reassignment within a job Cycleforms Comment Duplex Start Duplex Stop Duplex Invert Start Duplex Side Select User Defined Key UDK Only supported if the PCL Printer supports collated copies PJL SET QTY n see parameter csp60 Otherwise treated as lt ESC gt En comment lt CR gt lt LF gt Note 2 6 3 17 2 2 Not supported commands Syntax lt ESC gt B comment lt CR gt lt LF gt graphic GRA list lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt c lt ESC gt D lt ESC gt fN M P1 P2 P3 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt gfP X Y Xn Yn lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt G lt ESC gt H message lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt HTc1 c2 c255 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt Jn lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt Kn comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt In lt ESC gt mH T1 B1 L1 R1 m T2 B2 L2 R2 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt o lt ESC gt Rn comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zc lt ESC gt zisc lt ESC gt zuX1 Y1 Xn Yn T E S lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt zvcni n2 n8 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC
209. lue is 1 100 inch D The FORMS4WORK XES emulation offers these options for both Long edge feed and Short edge feed Which group of parameters is used depends on the setting of the paper tray used in Tray Mapping If the paper is taken from a tray for which the option Short edge feed paper has been set the parameters of the Short edge feed group will apply otherwise those from the Long edge feed will apply Offsets used with Long Edge Feed The following parameters are available to achieve a similarly large printable area using PCL5 printers e Visible window short edge offset Define a value to move the image area downwards in portrait format in steps of 1 100 inch Default 0 32 inch e Visible window long edge offset Define a value to move the image area to the right in portrait format in steps of 1 100 inch Default 0 00 inch e Vector short edge offset Define a value to move the print area downwards in portrait format in steps of 1 100 inch Default 0 00 inch e Vector long edge offset Define a value to move the print area to the right in portrait format in steps of 1 100 inch Default 0 00 inch D Please ensure that the parameters have been allocated to portrait format and the relevant edges in portrait format do not change The long edge in portrait format remains the long edge even in landscape format Offsets used with Short Edge Feed The following parameters are available to achieve a similarly large printable area
210. lue should not generally be changed Default 5000 msec Resources Resource Path Define the path from where the PCL5 to PDF emulation can access resources like fonts etc Each FOL to PCL emulation has its own directory for storing emulation specific resources The FOL files for describing job layouts forms flag sheets etc will be stored in this directory Separation Information file Define the file and path where a separation information file extension SIF is stored This file contains information and criteria for separating print jobs The FOL to PCL emulation uses this file for dynamic job separation Ticket name from job data header Enable to receive ticket name from job data header FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 76 6 3 8 6 3 8 1 6 3 8 2 6 3 8 2 1 Default disabled Applies only with a channel emulation before the FOL emulation There you can add the corresponding ticket name from the LCL into the first line header of the data stream Example Get ticket name from job header if there is a channel emulation with SNI3365 upstream e g TCKO1234 The channel emulation SNI3365 IPDS Commands should be set to Suppress New LCL Command Replace String header TCK Format of Length Information Decimal 5 Digits String Trailer Forms Processor Overview The Forms Processor emulation is producing form jobs by adding user data to pre designed forms Therefore form jobs need to
211. lues are valid on power on and after a reset as long as the data stream does not overwrite any of these settings Paper Size Select a paper size from the pull down menu or enter a USER DEFINED paper size Determines the default paper size Also a user defined paper size may be configured In that case the Width and Height must be given always in portrait view regardless of the given default orientation e Size for portrait in 1 300 Inch Define your own paper size Width and Height must be given always in portrait view regardless of the given default orientation Available only when USER DEFINED is selected as paper size Default 2480 300 inches Width 3507 300 inches Height e edge to edge Enable to handle the paper size in full page mode I e the PCL logical page size will be enhanced to the physical page size D A user defined paper size is always handled in full page mode Orientation FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 113 Select the default orientation Default PORTRAIT Page Copies Enter default number of copies for each printed page Default 1 Line Termination Select the default control code behavior for the following control codes lt CR gt Carriage Return lt LF gt Line Feed lt FF gt Form Feed Available options are e lt CR gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt FF gt e lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt FF gt e lt CR gt lt CR gt
212. ly created administrative information One of the most common is the jobs name itself Some of these parameters may be overwritten with data retrieved by the data scanner These are lt jobname gt The name of the job displayed during processing and passed over to further processing and output devices lt username gt The name of the user who created the print job lt destaddress gt The destination address where the job is send to if defined with the logical printer This may be e g the e mail address of the receiver when using an SMTP output port lt destport gt The destination port or printer as delivered from input port or protocol This is e g the name of the queue where the job has to be processed when using an LPD input port Availability of these job information fields depends on the input port and protocol used Not all protocols and ports do support all of this information Depending on the output port and protocol used these parameters may be passed over to the next step in processing or to the output device This mechanism e g enables display of a job name on the output device which was previously detected by the scanner within the job data stream D When using job data manipulation spooling has to be turned on at output port Also the option Start printing even if job is not completely spooled must not be enabled Be careful which data is to be modified especially don t modify the job s destination address if you
213. memory expansion of the printer Example MACRO ADDBACKSIDE ADDBACKSIDE does not require any arguments ADDBACKSIDE will generate from a simplex printed page a duplex page with an overlay as backside ADDBACKSIDE must be used together with SIDE SIMPLEXBACK in the referring RULE When the backside is pasted other control commands for a form feed will be used Example ADDBACKSIDE RGBCOLOR RGBCOLOR requires three numeric arguments ranging from O to 255 for the red green and blue values O 0 O is black 255 255 255 is white The colors will be mixed according to the rules for PCL5c color laser printers The RGBCOLOR command enables the user to color a black and white bitmap of the Resource Overlays D This works only with PCL5c color laser printers and not with ink jet or other color printers Example RGBCOLOR 127 0 127 tinges the overlay in a violet color Rules set the conditions for an overlay resource to be added to the data stream A rule is composed of at least the keyword RULE plus the keyword ID with argument Such a rule will be valid for every page of the print job To specify the scope of application rule keywords can be combined Any keyword may be used only once per rule It is possible to create more than one rule for one and the same overlay resource Keywords in one rule are associated logically with AND If more than one rule are processed the keywords are associated logically with OR ID ID requires a nu
214. meric argument between 1 and 65535 The ID number can be chosen from this range and must correspond to an ID number in the definition part Example ID 10 FROM FROM requires a numeric argument between 1 and 65535 The FROM parameter specifies the sheet counter reading from which one on the overlay resource will be pasted For duplex and N Up print jobs that rule is valid for the whole sheet i e the overlay will be pasted to the front and to the back of a sheet If this should not be done the rule must be complemented with the SIDE FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 105 keyword e g SIDE FRONT see below Note for programmers The keywords FROM TO and STEP do function similarly to the FOR statement in higher level programming languages Example FROM 2 pastes the overlay from sheet 2 on to every coming sheet of the print job TO TO requires a numeric argument between 1 and 65535 The TO parameter specifies the sheet counter reading up to which one the overlay resource will be pasted For duplex and N Up print jobs that rule is valid for the whole sheet e the overlay will be pasted to the front and to the back of a sheet If this should not be done the rule must be complemented with the SIDE keyword e g SIDE FRONT see below Example To 2 pastes the overlay up to sheet 2 to every sheet of the print job sheets 1 and 2 FROM 1 TO 1 pastes the overlay only to the first sheet STEP STEP requires a numeric argument
215. n records The record length contains the complete length of the record in bytes including the 4 bytes record length info The data stream itself may contain 1 n blocks The PCC is a IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control code The byte order of the word LSW or MSW is following PST word organization of RS6000 record length LSB Least significant byte MSB Most significant byte FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 201 LCDS Input Format This format was a special customer adaptation There was no reliable information or documentation about this format A record starts always with a constant two byte record identifier Ox1F 0x4A record length length info A A SS Ny f TIRA Nenad soll ad A e record D The record length 2 byte contains only the length of the data in bytes The record identifier will be stripped The PCC is a IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control code ASCII BARR Format This format was a special customer adaptation There was no reliable information or documentation about this format This format is similar to the Line printer Format with two exceptions Exception 1 Empty lines will be padded with a space blank character Exception 2 Only ASCII input no EBCDIC can be processed D Additionally this filter can be configured to strip a user defined block at the beginning of the data stream CUSTOM 01 lt length gt lt user gt lt PCC gt lt data gt This format wa
216. n the data stream lt ESC gt P Only one orientation portrait or landscape is allowed on the page lt ESC gt Q Both orientations are allowed on the page Default Font Defines the default font and therefore the page orientation if there is no font selection command in the data stream The font number assignment is shown in the font status page XES Command lt ESC gt cspstat lt CR gt lt LF gt Alternatively the font name can be specified Font Rotation If you have marked this option all download fonts are rotated portrait to landscape and vice versa If the font name contains the character chain P or L a non binding indicator for portrait landscape in the name P is converted to L and vice versa D This parameter does not affect internal fonts Examples The XES portrait font Univers10iso P is sent to the printer with activated font rotation by the emulation In fact the font is converted to a landscape font and renamed to Univers10iso L The XES portrait logo font MYLOGOP is sent to the printer with activated font rotation by the emulation In FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 149 fact the font is converted to a landscape font but keeps its name MYLOGOP Language Forces the emulation to load a predefined country specific table as long as no XES select language command lt ESC gt zlc appears in the data stream The following tables are available Character Set Note U S English default U K Englis
217. n use its own IPDSOVER INI file Default directory of the file IPDSOVER INI is the resources directory of the referring FORMS4WORK Server s emulation You can edit this file after clicking the Button Edit by the resource path entry Emulation Configure Resources It is also possible to use a shared file IPDSOVER INI for several IPDS emulations thus enabling an easier system maintenance The resources path of the emulations concerned has to be changed to a shared directory FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 102 Any file name of an overlay resource mentioned in the file IPDSOVER INI is composed relatively to the IPDSOVER INI file s path name in the file IPDSOVER INI by using the command DEFINE FILENAME If the overlay resource resides in the same directory as the file IPDSOVER INI no path must be added to the file name Example In a FORMS4WORK system there shall be two IPDS emulations in one print process Both emulations shall share the overlay resource KOPF1 CSP It is suggested to save this resource to lt Installation Path gt Res DSPPATH1 KOPF1 CSP An overlay resource FORM1 CSP for just the first emulation should be saved to lt Installation Path gt Res DSPPATH1 1 FORM1 CSP The file IPDSOVER INI in the directory lt Installation Path gt FORMS4WORK Res DSPPATH1 1 contains DEFINE ID 1 FILENAME KOPF1 CSP DEFINE ID 2 FILENAME FORM1 CSP where lt Installation Path gt is the installation path of FORMS4WORK The
218. n will be transferred before the print data To use this feature the option of the corresponding input port must be checked too This option must not be used if the receiver is not a FORMS4WORK input port FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 217 6 6 2 6 Strip PJL Feedback If activated PJL feedback of a printer will be stripped off Deactivate this option if the sending host should receive PJL feedback from the printer D Only available if supported by the specific output port Data Capturing Output Port Converted Data Capturing Data capturing allows to write data to a file after the data is converted by the emulation This feature should only be used for testing purposes because it slows down the system performance Active Set to Active to log sent data Default directory for the log file is FORMS4WORK application path DATA DSPPATHx default name of the log file is Oxxxx DAT Each job is placed in a separate file Default not active Without protocol data With protocol data Set if you want the protocol data to be saved to the log file too Default Without protocol data Maximum files to capture Define the maximum number of files to be captured Default 99 D If the specified maximum number of files is reached older files will be overwritten e Maximum size MB Define the maximum number of megabytes per job to be captured Default O unlimited Maximum hours to keep Files will be deleted af
219. n with the mail server Usually port 25 is used but others are possible Please note that the required TCP port is defined by the mail server Username The Username which is used by FORMS4WORK to connect to the SMTP server Some SMTP servers deny sending emails if not connected as a user which is known to the server in most cases this parameter is not necessary From Address Email address of sender using format name xyz com or Friendly Name lt name xyz com gt Receiver The email address of the receiver to which the print job has to be send to The address of the receiver can be overwritten by job information data I g if a print job has been received by a POP3 Input Port and the mail body contained a definition for Destination in form of an email address this address can be used as receiver To get this working please use the option Device as delivered by protocol when defining the rules Confirmation Optional email address where a reading confirmation should be sent to FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 223 6 6 8 6 6 8 1 Default Extension Attachments will be named using the name of the print job If the print job name does not already have a file extension the specified extension will be added Force Extension The specified Default Extension will be added even if the print job already has another extension More Optional subject and or email text can be defined here Instead of an email text a filenam
220. ncept behind FORMS4WORK is based on a modular element system of components Each component has connections so called ports using which they can be combined with other components If we take the aim of FORMS4WORK as a basis it can be divides as follows e Acceptance of print data e Processing or emulation of print data e Transfer of the processed print data This initially leads to a rough distinction of components and splits all the modules of the system into three main groups Input Interface The input interface connects the FORMS4WORK system with the host computer This component makes the connection to the host computer or a data source using the hardware ports of the FORMS4WORK system Possible ports include the following e Network for example Ethernet Token Ring SNA e Hardware options for example channel adapters Emulation This is where the print data are prepared for the output device Output Interface When the print data has been processed by the emulation or passed through they are passed on to the output device using this component In this case too the connection is made using the hardware ports of the FORMS4WORK system FORMS4WORK Manual Principles 10 4 2 4 3 4 4 The Standard Application The standard application of FORMS4WORK can be based on one component from each of the three main groups e Input Interface e Emulation e Output Interface The example describes the easiest way of out
221. nch are considered as text elements on the the same line position Insert multiple space delimiters for horizontal moves When active for each horizontal X movement between text elements one or multiple space delimiter if given see Delimiter are inserted Space delimiter width Define here the width of the space delimiter This determines the number of inserted space delimiter between text elements i e number of inserted space delimiter X movement width of the space delimiter Fixed user width in CPI Sets the width of the space delimiter to the given fix value in CPI Characters Per Inch Use current HMI Sets the width of the space delimiter to the current HMI Horizontal Motion Index of the PCL environment 6 4 10 2 2 Delimiter Each delimiter may be a arbitrary character sequence Non printable codes may be entered as 2 digit hex values preceeded by a character e g 0C for a form feed lt FF gt There exists some special keywords for delimiters which must be enclosed into lt gt and may be used as dynamic variables These variables will be replaced with the current values Possible delimiter keywords FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 205 Keyword Function lt pjljobname gt The PJL JOB NAME lt pagecount gt Current PCL page counter lt jobname gt Name of the job lt srcaddress gt Address of senders as IP address or Novell queue name lt username gt Name of user lt destp
222. nfigure the print process options Set up a Logical Printer Define the Logical Printers using which the dispatcher distributes print jobs received by the FORMS4WORK system The configuration dialog contains several sections that are described in detail in the following e Input Interface allows you to add and set up the required input port interfaces for a Logical Printer within a print process Input Filter select and configure the input filters Data Conversion add and set up the required emulation for data conversion Output Filter select and configure the output filters Output Interface select and configure the output port interface FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 29 6 2 Input Interfaces 6 2 1 Overview Input interfaces are used as reception ports for print data FORMS4WORK supports different types of inputs Channel ISA Channel PCI System Devices ESCON Files LPD Novell ODBC POP3 PPD SNA LU1 LU3 SNA LU 6 2 TCP IP Local TCP Twain Parameters that are independent of the input type are described under the point headed Properties Special parameters are listed under the relevant input type To define a new input To define a new input interface in the system select Properties in the context menu of a print process and go to the dialog page headed Input interface On this page you can delete existing input interfaces by selecting Delete or reconfigure them by selecting Configure By selecting A
223. ng Default enabled e Delete table If enabled after successful output the detected database table is deleted from the data source Otherwise the table is left and the data records may be optionally deleted Default disabled e Wait x seconds before processing new records This value defines a time period As long as no new records are added to matching tables this input port assumes the end of any inserts and starts processing the newly added records Default 15 sec Parallel Input The selection of Parallel as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs Parallel Settings Sessions Data Data Type Data Capturing Parallel Input System Device Device Select required system device or port from the pull down menu The list contains all the known system devices on the system If the required system device is not included in the list it can be entered manually Default WT12101 For more information on the Parallel Input Device see the documentation of your parallel input card FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 44 6 2 12 POP3 The selection of POP3 as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs POP3 Settings Sessions Data Data Type Data Capturing 6 2 12 1 POP3 Input D Microsoft Winsock 2 must be installed on the FORMS4WORK server This is the case with Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or higher and Windows 98 With Windows 95 an update available from Microsoft is neces
224. ng the keyboard can be entered with a percent sign followed by a two digit hex code e g Y 0d for carriage return To use the percent sign type Offset Defines the number of bytes following the trigger sequence before the field value starts Length Defines the number of bytes after the trigger sequence and offset to be used as field value If length is set to O the trigger sequence itself will become field value if present If not the field value will be empty Example A field named Doctype with a trigger sequence as DOC an offset of 8 and a length of 4 The print job data contains a text as any text in DOCO123456789abc followed with text This will be recognized as data field Doctype with value 89ab Regular Expression Defines the syntax for a regular expression to extract field values from retrived data using a search pattern Default Value Defines the default value to be used if the trigger sequence can not be found Find This option defines which appearance of the data is to be used as field value If a unique trigger sequence can be defined a data field is found only once If this is not possible here you may decide if the first the last or all appearances will become data field value In case of all all detected values are concatenated to a long character string each value separated from each other by a space character Trim Internal Blanks This switch controls internal trimming of the f
225. nguage Pack 168 O ODBC Database 183 ODBC Input Port 42 Operator 16 Outline Fonts 93 Output 212 Output Bin Mapping 79 Output filter 19 Output interface 19 Output Port 11 212 213 214 215 216 217 Capturing 217 Channel 220 Data 216 Data Data Encryption 216 Data Job information within data stream 216 Data Pack and encrypt data 216 Data Password 216 Data Capturing 217 Device Assignment 214 Device Assignment Add 214 Device Assignment Delete 214 Device Assignment Edit 214 Device Assignment Move down 214 Device Assignment Move up 214 Fiery 212 Fiery Output 225 File Port 221 Job Monitoring 215 Printer 222 Protocol 11 Settings 213 Settings Buffer 213 Settings Delay if data received 213 Settings Delay if no data received 213 Settings Execute command after printing 213 Settings Maximum size of receive buffer 213 Settings Read Block Size 213 Settings Read Timeout 213 Settings Timeout 213 Settings Write Timeout 213 FORMS4WORK Manual Output Port 11 212 213 214 215 216 217 SMTP 222 Spooling 11 218 System Device 220 TCP IP 223 Theory 11 Transport 11 Overlay Manager 206 ASCII PCL 206 ASCII PCL Plain Text Format ASCII 206 ASCII PCL Printer Command Language PCL 206 Configuration 206 209 211 Fonts 211 General 206 Overlays 209 Pages without overlay 211 P Page confirmation 96 Page Notification 215 Page Offsets 86 91 Paper Size 91 Paper Type 79 Pa
226. nt Jobs Enter maximum number of concurrent jobs This value limits the number of print jobs that can be processed at one time by the print process If Job Splitting is enabled you might want to set this value to 1 to ensure job integrity You might also change this value if the print process has to process very large and complicated print jobs or if a very large number of small print jobs occur at the same time Default O unlimited Delay job output Define delay in job output If Max Concurrent jobs is set to 1 it is possible to define a delay in milliseconds which the print process should wait after closing one job and before opening the next Default 0 milliseconds Log levels Do not use event logging for this print process Set if you do not want the print process events to be logged Log event entries for The following options are available for event logging e Error messages Logs messages which occur while processing a print job These are displayed in red in the Events Window Error messages are always logged default enabled e Warning notes Enable to log warning notes Warning notes may require intervention and are shown in blue default enabled e Basic information Enable to log basic information Displays basic job information in the Events Window These messages are displayed in black default enabled e Extended information Enable to log extended information Displays extended job information in
227. nt processes which it must start emulation and input output interfaces The system service must also serve the opposite route for status messages error outputs and dump information Print Process The Print Process describes the processing of a print job within the FORMS4WORK print system A Logical Printer within a Print Process defines three distinctive yet inter related components as follows e Input interface receives the print job from the sender host computer Emulation translates the print job from one printer language to another e g IPDS to PCL5 e Output interface transfers the final print job to the receiver print server printer file FORMS4WORK reference Starting FORMS4WORK and logging in To start the FORMS4WORK click the Windows Start button and choose FORMS4WORK from the Programs menu or if you have created a shortcut to the FORMS4WORK application double click the FORMS4WORK icon on the desktop Before you can monitor or administer FORMS4WORK you must log in to the server using the FORMS4WORK client software By default the FORMS4WORK client software is installed on the same FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 13 5 3 1 1 5 3 1 2 system where the FORMS4WORK server resides However you can also install and run the client software on a remote Windows workstation default for the Linux version Connecting to a server Access levels Logging in Connecting to a server To connect to the FORMS
228. nt to print a range of pages D Requirements for Advanced Reprint e Output Spooling must be enabled e Login as Administrator or Operator e Only available for PCL or ASCII data Input Data Type Recognition must be enabled in Input Port to detect data as ASCII or PCL e If using the Raw Emulation the option Count Pages must be enabled Event view list The lower part of the main window shows a list of events The Event view list initially only shows the start time of the client after starting the application As soon as a connection has been made to a FORMS4WORK Server all the messages of the server and its active print processes will be shown in this frame The message color coding indicates their order of significance A distinction is made between the following levels Error messages are shown in red Warning messages are shown in blue Information is issued in black Debug messages are issued in gray See also Log Levels You can control the types of messages to be given through the properties of the print process FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 24 5 3 2 4 5 3 2 4 1 More messages also mean more system stress The event list shows the following criteria No Incremental number of event Date Time Date and time when the event was logged From Name of the component which logged the event Event Textual information about the event Menus The main menu in the FORMS4WORK Client window contains the entries
229. nter offline the first ACK reply sent to the host says that the simulated printer is offline This is made so that a host operator can start spooling print jobs into a host printer queue without these jobs being printed immediately Some hosts require the printer to be present but offline to enable spooled print jobs To print the jobs later on you have to set the Host Communication Parameter back to its previous value Default Standard D Do not use this option with a File Input Port Emulation Loading Set for which job the emulation shall send resources to the printer Possible settings are e Channel mode static The IPDS to PCL5 emulation sends resources to the printer for the first job only e Standard mode The IPDS to PCL5 emulation sends resources to the printer for every job that is received FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 96 Default Standard mode Out of paper host message e Generate NACK e Generate SENSE Depending on the Host system OS communicating the out of paper printer status needs a SENSE or NACK type packet to be sent back to the host Original IBM systems require both some compatible systems need a SENSE only If you switch off both message types no out of paper printer status will be sent Use Committed page counter This switch affects the page counters which are reported back to the host system in an ACK NACK reply It only applies if page confirmation is enabled in the out
230. nual Configuration 148 Since the emulation also entries fonts with the same names in a list the selection process can be controlled for fonts entered more than once with the same name As default the last loaded font is used with the required name If this parameter has been activated the first loaded font with the required name in the list is used Xerox 4235 The Assign Font ID command lt ESC gt 0FontName lt LE gt assigns and selects the font 0 immediately This is valid for ID O only Because the Xerox 4235 allows a larger page length than physically possible the page length of a Set All Margin command lt ESC gt m lt LE gt will not be restricted to the physically possible size Constant pages lt ESC gt M lt LE gt are only printed if the page contains printable data Forms lt ESC gt N lt LE gt are always printed when Merging lt ESC gt zbn is allowed regardless whether the page contains printable data or not Line ending Defines the properties at the line end In many applications for example only CR s are used as the line ending code In this case Auto LF automatic line feed must be selected A similar thing applies for Auto CR automatic carriage return Data encoding The following settings are possible ISO 6937 Encoding ASCII Default IBM PC code page 437 IBM PC code page 850 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 ANSI Default Job Defines the default properties of the emulation if there is no job command i
231. number after which the job shall be split Default O no splitting e reconfigure printer after splitting Enable to reconfigure the printer after splitting Default disabled Forms Overlay Language Overview The FOL to PCL5 emulation from FORMS4WORK converts print data that were created in the FOL printer language so that they can be output on PCL5 compatible page printers All the parameters are default values They are in use until their values are overridden from FOL commands in the print data stream FOL stands for Form and Overlay Language FOL is a page description language developed by Oc to control the printing process in digital printing environments In combination with Oc s Job Automation Control JAC which is also included in the FOL to PCL5 emulation of FORMS4WORK FOL is a powerful easy to use tool for the formatting of line printer data and ASCII data streams The description of the FOL and JAC language is included in the Oc 9200 Series Programmer s Guide which is available from Oc FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 66 6 3 7 2 6 3 7 2 1 Parameter Printer Capabilities Printer e Type Select printer type from the pull down menu The selection of the parameters type and output allows the adaptation of the PCL5 data stream generated from the emulation to the requirements of special printer types Default HD Digimaster e Output Select output f
232. numbers are supported 12 234 Floats and also integers 1 2e4 1 2 10 4 Exponential numbers Ox1B0A 69 2 Hexadecimal numbers Ox 0177 127 Octal numbers 0 Predefined Constants E Exp 1 G Gravity constant PI 3 1415 The following operators are supported Simple calculations Modulo remainder A Power of OR bitwise for numbers logical for conditions 8 AND bitwise for numbers logical for conditions Bitwise exclusive or Examples 4 7 7 7 0111b has Bit 2 2 2 4 already set 4 76 4 7 Equal by rounding 123 amp 1 1 Odd number Bit 0 is 1 124 amp 1 0 Even number Bit 0 is 0 124 1 125 Bit 0 0 will be 1 125 1 124 Bit 0 1 will be O The priority order of operators is defined as common Here is the order from highest to lowest priority Signed numbers Power of right to left 1 Left to right 7 Left to right Binary logical AND left to right Binary logical OR left to right Binary exclusive OR left to right 2 P gt D It is important that with logical operators each partial condition must be put in brackets As an example a correct expression would be IF Gender F amp Job Waiter Waitress Profession FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 175 Missing brackets as in IF Gender F 8 Job Waiter Waitress Profession will give a wrong result Calculation within expressions are done due to commonly known rules a b c a b c Assoc
233. o Settings Protocol PPD Input PPD PPR AFP IPDS printer protocoll FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 47 6 2 14 6 2 14 1 SNA LU1 LU3 The selection of SNA LU1 LU3 as input interface open up a dialog with the following tabs SNA LU1 LU3 Settings Sessions Data Type Data Capturing SNA LU1 LU3 Connection D The Microsoft DLC protocol must be installed on the FORMS4WORK server SNA Connection Host MAC Address Define MAC address of the host system from which data is accepted Ask your network administrator for the correct Host MAC address Default empty none IDBLK Set the IBM product number Hex which defines the type of the control unit and of the attached devices This value must refer to the VTAM definition at host side For IBM printers InfoPrint 60 3130 3160 3935 use value 071 Possible range is 000 to FFF Default 017 IDNUM Define the unique identification Hex of the control unit It must be in conjunction with IDBLK the XID value and refer to the VTAM definition at host side Possible range is 00000 to FFFFF Default empty none Adapter Set the logical adapter number of the network interface in the FORMS4WORK Server system which is to be used for communication with the host system If there is only one network interface this value is to be set to 0 With several interfaces installed here you decide which one is to be used by the input port Default 0 Connect timeout Set the
234. o double side printed sheets here Select the mode for duplex printing or select none to keep single sided printing D This option is available with PCL formatted print jobs only Inserting backsides will be done for single sided sheets only For already double side printed sheets the setting will be ignored Backside Macro Enter name and path of the PCL file here to be inserted an additional backside according to the settings at Duplexing D This option is available with PCL formatted print jobs only Inserting this file as backside will be done for single sided sheets only For already double side printed sheets the setting will be ignored Rotation Select the rotation of the backside macro in steps of 90 degrees FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 211 6 5 2 4 6 5 2 5 Reset Trigger A Reset Trigger can be defined for every page If this trigger is detected in the data stream execution will continue at the page defined in column Page Pages without overlay Trigger String Here you define character sequences Trigger Strings which define pages without overlays If one of these sequences is found on a page this page will be printed without an overlay Also this page will not be counted in the calculation of the overlay order defined under Overlays Paper Source This field controls the paper source for the page using the overlay Select the desired paper source of the printer from the list of paper trays Horz Text
235. o suppress Job End Sequence Default disabled e Wait End of Page Default disabled e Job End Sequence Hex FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 63 Enter Job End Sequence in hexadecimal code e Sequence Offset Enter Sequence Offset Job Start is similar to Job End The selection of this method allows the definition of a text string as an indicator for the beginning of job Additional parameters are available to specify a Column Offset where to search in a print line or to suppress the text string itself to prevent the string from being printed Load FCB allows a job separation by every FCB load from the host If the host always will send a Forms Control Buffer before each job this method can be used for job separation Job Name A Host is able to send a job name or job identification within the print job data If such an information is present FORMS4WORK can extract that information and pass it on to its own spooling system e Extract job name from data stream With this option the job name might be extracted out of the banner or job separator pages e Trigger The trigger is a constant character sequence which precedes the variable job name in the banner page You would describe this e g as a field descriptor The trigger string has to be on the same line as the job name and before the job name e Cut Offset This is the number of character positions columns between the last character of the trigger string and the first c
236. ob separation function A job which was started on the channel interface will be terminated by a timeout value only This job timeout must be defined in the settings of the Input Port Download End requires the activation of the Download Mode option When being selected every receipt of the Download end string will cause an end of job Skip 12 will perform a job separation after the receipt of a special channel command sequence used by the Siemens operating system BS2000 The print spooler of BS2000 uses Channel 12 of a Forms Control Buffer FCB as the bottom of a form generally Page turnings between header trailer pages and the print jobs will be performed by the channel commands x E3 Skip to channel 12 immediate followed by the command x 09 Write and space 1 line where the print line contains 1 single space character When this method is activated FORMS4WORK will terminate a print job immediately after the receipt of that sequence Job End allows the definition of a text string as an indicator for an end of job Additional parameters are available to specify a Column Offset where to search in a print line or to suppress the text string itself to prevent the string from being printed If the text string to search for is not the last text on the page there is another parameter that will instruct FORMS4WORK to wait until the end of that page Selecting Job End makes the following parameters available e Suppress Job End Sequence Enable t
237. ocol SMTP Printers and Fiery as possible output interfaces What components are offered or supported by the various output interfaces depends as with the input interface essentially on the hardware port of the FORMS4WORK systems that is used by the output interface Protocols for communication are also regarded as a property of the output interfaces in the FORMS4WORK system Another property of output interfaces is spooling This is similar to the Protocol and as such represents a component of the output interfaces which can be enabled or disabled as required Variable Configuration The simple application is not always sufficient but the concept of FORMS4WORK allows all components to be combined almost arbitrarily Processes And Threads The efficiency of a FORMS4WORK system is primarily dependent on the hardware Nevertheless the efficiency is also influenced by the configuration FORMS4WORK is not just a program that is active on the system but is consists of a number of modules as described in the section Components The operating system distinguishes between processes and threads when it allocates processor time A process corresponds to an application program that has been started which in turn can start several threads for the parallel processing of data All the configurations described above within a FORMS4WORK system can be configured in one process the Print Process This Print process uses several threads during it
238. od will search within each page of a PCL print job To recognize data fields rectangular areas containing the field values need to be defined All field definitions are entered into the table To add or remove lines right click into the table and use the popup menu Job Template Select a print job file to use it on the display for defining fields by rectangular areas You may either enter the complete path of the job file into the edit field or click on the right button to browse for a file After selection of the file clicking on the Open button shows a field designer window with controls for drawing rectangles Field Name Defines the name of a data field This name needs to be unique and should not contain blanks Type Defines the type of data used for this field Data is used for job data recognized using a trigger sequence Variable is used to set a field s value using a job information field Constant is used to set a field s value always to the same constant value Text Position Defines a rectangular area by position of the left top corner and its width and height All values are FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 180 entered as 1 100 millimeters When using the field designer for defining field areas these values are entered automatically Scope Of Scan By default a field area is valid for every page You may also define field which appears only on a specific page as e g page 2 To select a specific page enter the p
239. odes Fg 1302 Postal Barcodes Fg 1303 Postal Barcodes Fg 2001 Keyboard 1 U S Standard 2002 Keyboard 2 U S Standard 2003 Keyboard 3 U S Standard 2004 Keyboard 4 U S Standard 2005 Keyboard 5 U S Standard 2006 Keyboard 6 U S Legal 2007 Keyboard 7 U S Legal 2008 Keyboard 8 U S Legal 2009 Keyboard 24 Latin America 2010 Keyboard 25 Puerto Rico 2011 Keyboard 26 Germany 2012 Keyboard 27 Germany 2013 Keyboard 28 Germany Austria 2014 Keyboard 29 Germany Austria 2015 Keyboard 31 France Belgium 2016 Keyboard 32 France Belgium 2017 Keyboard 33 France Belgium 2018 Keyboard 37 Canada English 2019 Keyboard 38 Canada Bilingual 2020 Keyboard 39 Canada Bilingual 2021 Keyboard 41 Italy Standalone 2022 Keyboard 42 Nether So Afr 2023 Keyboard 43 Netherlands 2024 Keyboard 44 Spain 2025 Keyboard 45 Spain 2026 Keyboard 46 Italy 2027 Keyboard 47 Italy Comm Ns 2028 Keyboard 48 Switzerland France 2029 Keyboard 49 Switzerland France 2030 Keyboard 50 Switzerland Germany 2031 Keyboard 52 Sweden Finland 2032 Keyboard 53 Sweden Finland 2033 Keyboard 54 Norway 2034 Keyboard 55 Norway 2035 Keyboard 60 Brazil 2036 Keyboard 61 Brazil 2037 Keyboard 63 Portugal 2038 Keyboard 66 United Kingdom 2039 Keyboard 67 United Kingdom 2040 Keyboard 68 Japan 2041 Keyboard 69
240. of its Trigger String also for new jobs If turned off the Configuration Profile will be changed due to a Trigger String but after the job the standard profile will be used again Transparent Mode If this field is switched on the current Configuration Profile as a standard profile can also process jobs which are not in ASCII format In this case this Configuration Profile cannot add any overlay This is commonly used to define a transparent standard profile which is able do process all kind of print jobs and later is switched to other Configuration Profiles for processing overlays due to Trigger Strings in special jobs Use Init Sequence D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs Select this field to initialize the printer at beginning of the print job The initialization consists of parameters for Page Definition parameters for Default Font and additional User Commands D Usually you must initialize the printer at least using a Default Font Because of this this field will be activated in most cases But if the print job has passed an emulation which will control the fonts it might be necessary to suppress the initialization FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 208 PJL User Commands D This option is only available with ASCII formatted print jobs Here you can add your own specific PJL commands which will be send for initialization at the beginning of the print job Page Definition D This option is
241. ols the stapling of print jobs while processing a process label of a FOL control file Default disabled e at Separation mark Enable one or more of the following options e Jog e Staple Jog controls the jogging of print jobs while processing a separation mark of a FOL control file Default disabled Staple controls the stapling of print jobs while processing a separation mark of a FOL control file Default disabled at Segmentation mark Enable one or more of the following options e Jog e Staple Jog controls the jogging of print jobs while processing a segmentation mark of a FOL control file Default disabled Staple controls the stapling of print jobs while processing a segmentation mark of a FOL control file Default disabled Paper Input tray mapping The allocation of FOL tray assignments to the appropriate PCL tray assignments can be made here e Host tray Enter the number of the respective FOL input tray Up to 24 different tray allocations are possible 0 23 Default 0 e PCL tray ID Enter the ID number of the associated PCL input tray e Registration Offset mm This option can be used to compensate printer inaccuracies while feeding paper A tray dependent offset in millimeters for moving the print data on the page can be configured here Horizontal enter horizontal offset FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 69 Default 0 00 mm Vertical enter vertical offset
242. on Resources Default Font Xerox Printer Trays 6 3 13 2 Parameter 6 3 13 2 1 Emulation Orientation Select Portrait or Landscape mode for default printing orientation Default Portrait Page Side Select Simplex or Duplex printing for default page side Default Simplex Symbol Set Select the default symbol set for printing Available symbol sets are Roman 8 PC 850 Legal ISO ASCII ISO Swedish ISO Italian ISO Spanish ISO German ISO Norwegian ISO French ISO Great Britain ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 PC8 Codepage 437 PC8 Danish Norwegian Windows Latin 1 3 0 Windows Latin 1 3 1 Ventura International Ventura US Default Roman 8 Emulation FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 116 Select the actual printer emulation Available options PCL5 ASCII and XEROX META In ASCII mode no PCL5 commands are interpreted The XEROX META mode is a passthrough mode for special Xerox data streams CR LF Filter Select the default control code behavior for the following control codes lt CR gt Carriage Return lt LF gt Line Feed lt FF gt Form Feed This option can be used to replace carriage return line feed and form feed commands with combinations of these commands Especially ASCII data streams generated from UNIX applications sometimes need those replacements Available options are e lt CR gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt FF gt e lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF g
243. ooler To prevent deletion activate the Keep option in the spooling options of this output interface This is a general setting for all jobs on this output interface To prevent deletion of this job only without affecting the general settings activate this option using the menu command Keep Advanced Reprint By using Reprint you can print some or all pages of spooled job s and or redirect it to other printers View View job data PCL and ASCII jobs will be viewed as Portable Document Format PDF files This requires add on software Adobe Acrobat Reader is free software that lets you view and print PDF files It can be downloaded directly from the Adobe website None PCL ASCII jobs will be viewed in a special window containing a hexadecimal and ASCII display region Redirect You can redirect the selected job s from the last used device to a different device Redirection is available for spooled jobs only Schedule The setting Print at offers a way to delay output of the print job to a specific date time The job is held until the specified date time is reached By choosing Print as soon as possible the print job will be delivered when its output port is not occupied To print a job manually the option Hold must be selected This means that the print job is not output until you select the Print command Pause Suspends processing of the selected print job The job will not be sent to output even if the therefor
244. oon as one of these mapped trays is to be used the required tray command for the inserter is generated Setting a tray to 0 is turning off this single inserter tray Default O disabled Job Definitions In this dialog the form job definitions can be configured You may have several job definitions configured Each of them may have one or more conditions when this definition is to be used All conditions are tested for their appliance by the top down priority IPDS to PCL5 see IPDS to PCL Properties inside chapter IPDS to PDF emulation IPDS to PDF Overview The IPDS to PDF emulation of FORMS4WORK allows printers which support PDF to be connected to an IBM host system in the form of IPDS compatible printers IPDS Intelligent Printer Data Stream is a development of IBM which stands for the current high demands on print quality It allows output that is made up of various data types for example text matrix images vector graphics and bar codes FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 79 For an optimum emulation performance the IPDS to PDF emulation in FORMS4WORK is split in two emulations e IPDS to PCL emulation e PCL to PDF emulation This allows to set important PCL parameters thus allowing more possibilities to optimize the emulation to individual conditions and environments The PCL5 to PDF emulation converts print data that were converted from IPDS to PCL so that they can be output on PDF compatible page printe
245. operties and special abilities for the PCL printer you are using Pattern Mode Select a pattern mode The Pattern mode setting allows the output of fill patterns on printer which although they are HP GL compatible are not PCL5 compatible Available options e PCL5 pattern PCL5 fill patterns e HPGL pattern HPGL fill patterns If you have selected PCL5 pattern and you wish to output the pattern in black you must select HPGL pattern Default HPGL pattern HPGL fill patterns Fonthead Mode Select the fonthead mode This mode allows printers which although they can process a PCL5 font header are not PCL5 compatible to use download fonts Available options e Resolution specified PCL5e font header e Old style PCL5 font header Default Old style FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 142 Full Page Mode Select full page edge to edge printing mode of one of the listed printer types Default Off D If Full page mode is active the PJL commands should also be enabled since the edge to edge print is generally set using a PJL command D If Full page mode for the Xerox 4517 is active the landscape X offset should be set to 32 100 inch PJL Commands Select if PJL HP print job language commands will be used e Not used Select to use PJL commands Default selected e Will be used Select to use PJL commands Default not selected Use Collated Copy is used to generate job based copies It is only
246. option OUTPUT STAPLE YES Bookletmaker Determines the bookletmaker options The bookletmaker will be activated via the option OUTPUT SF1FUNCTION YES or DJDE SF1FUNCTION YES Punch Position Determines the puncher options The puncher will be activated via the option OUTPUT SF2FUNCTION YES or DJDE SF2FUNCTION YES 6 3 18 2 7 Color Output Black White The emulation ignores all Highlight color information The output contains no PCL color command Color FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 160 6 4 6 4 1 The Highlight color information will be converted into corresponding PCL color commands using the PCL Imaging Mode lt ESC gt v W Simple color Same as Color but using the PCL Simple Color Mode lt ESC gt r U i e no user defined palettes are allowed to adjust the Text co or or Image color ISL Filename Ink Source Language The optional name of the used Ink Source Language file The file must contain all used ICATALOG entries O The standard ICATALOG definitions DFAULT XEROX and XEROX1 are known within the emulation As long as there are no other or different definitions no ISL file lt NONE gt will be necessary ISL column width Specifies the maximum column position of interpreting the line If value O is given the line will be interpreted up to the terminating line end lt CR gt lt LF gt IRESULT default Determines the real IRESULT value BLACK or COLOR if a DJDE IRESULT DEFAULT is used D T
247. order as the fields appear within the job data To add or remove lines right click into the table and use the popup menu Field Name Defines the name of a data field This name needs to be unique and should not contain blanks If a column is not needed select Skip data Read field names from first line If this option is set it is assumed that all data field names are listed as first record in the first line of the data to be processed In this case you need not to enter any field name in the table Only a place holder for each field needs to be defined whether the field is skipped using Skip data or not as with From 1st line Ignore first line In case that data field names are listed in the first line but you want to use other filed names defined by yourself use this option You may define each field name and the first line during processing is simply ignored Field separator This defines the character used as separator for data fields within a record Most common is the semicolon Also often used are colon space and tab You may also define your own character using other and typing the character in the field on right side Delimiter character If the character used as field separator also may appear within the data fields these need to be enclosed with a delimiter character Commonly used are and Trim leading whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace characters are removed from the left end of the data
248. ormance 74 Field Scanner Filter 172 Printer Capabilities 66 ASCII Formatted With Fix Column Width 182 Resources 75 Index 229 Font Algorithm 93 Forms Processor 76 Job Definitions 78 Miscellaneous 76 Printer 77 G GOCA raster images 98 Group boundary 96 Guest 16 H Help Menu 27 Index 27 Info 27 Holdjobs 219 Icon Bar 27 Input 29 Input filter 19 Inputinterface 19 Input Port 10 29 31 33 Add job name to monitor filename 33 Channel ISA 34 Channel PCI 35 Data 32 Data Capturing 33 DataType 32 ESCON 39 File 39 40 Job Timeout 31 Look for session every lt x gt msec 31 LPD 40 Maximum files to monitor 33 Maximum number of input sessions 31 Maximum number of pending jobs 31 Novell 41 Novell Port 41 ODBC 42 Parallel Input 43 POP3 44 PPD 46 Protocol 10 Session Timeout 31 Sessions 31 Sessions Job Start Sound 31 Settings 29 SNA LU 6 2 48 SNA LU1 LU3 47 SNA Port 47 SNA Port LU 6 2 48 Spooling 10 System Device 37 TCP IP 49 Theory 10 Transport 10 Twain 50 Input Trays 91 Installation 8 Introduction 8 IOCAFS 79 IP address 13 14 IPDS 79 IPDS Overlay Supplement 101 102 103 104 107 108 Commands 102 Definitions 103 Examples 107 108 IPDSOVER INI 101 102 103 104 Overlay Resources 101 102 Overview 101 Path 102 Rules 104 Sheet and page counter 103 Simplex and duplex printing 103 IPDS toPCL5 79 240 DPI IM1 Images 98 Accessible 91 Add form name
249. ort the default destination defined in the output must be used or another destination chosen by selecting Specific Device e Specific Device If this rule has been assigned to a specific output device its name is displayed here If a print job takes this route the destination address defined in the output is overwritten and replaced by the name defined here Depending on the output type you have selected the appropriate destination address can be defined here File port Definition of a file name DOS device Definition of a port for example COM1 Printer Definition of a printer that must be installed in Windows TCP IP port Definition of an IP address and IP port number If for example the output is a file port the name of the output file can be defined here The file name defined in the file port is then ignored Use as default FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 21 5 3 2 2 5 3 2 2 1 If this Logical Printer is to be used as the default printer for all print jobs that do not comply with a criterion this option is to be activated O Only one Logical Printer can be marked as the default Test Logical Printer A test job can be used to check the configuration of an emulation against the real printer Additionally by sending a test job to the printer or the attached output port interface it is possible to test the communication between the output interface and the printer There is no host system requir
250. ort gt Destination port as queue name from LPD protocol lt destaddress gt Specific device if defined in Logical Printer lt jobid gt Job ID lt ticks gt Milliseconds since system start lt date gt Date lt time gt Time lt creationtime gt Start time of job lt starttime gt Emulation time of job Job delimiter Job header Inserts the given sequence at the begin of the job Job trailer Inserts the given sequence at the end of the job Page prefix Inserts the given sequence at the begin of each page Page postfix Inserts the given sequence at the end of each page Text line delimiter Prefix Inserts the given sequence at the begin of each line Postfix Inserts the given sequence at the end of each line Space delimiter Defines a sequence for a space delimiter which may be inserted at horizontal X movements if activated see Optimize FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 206 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 2 1 6 5 2 2 Overlay Manager Overview Overlay Manager Overview Using the Overlay Manager it is possible to define overlays as PCL macro data which is added to an ASCII formatted print job or PCL jobs Each page of the print job can have a different overlay which will be added to the corresponding page This application is similar to usage of preprinted paper forms Using plain paper sheets the form will be added as overlay to the print job The Overlay Manager enables you to define different configurations
251. output interface must also be checked Default disabled Data Type Input Data Type Recognition Active Enable to either determine the type of the incoming data automatically or assign it manually to the data stream Default disabled e Always Assume Set input data type to a certain incoming data stream If the type of the incoming data stream is known there is no need to use the automatic detection The data type can be set manually to a fix value here Default disabled only available when Active is enabled e Auto Detect Select input data type s that shall be detected automatically FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 33 6 2 2 5 The data type of the incoming data will be recognized automatically Several types can be selected for which the incoming data is tested Because under some circumstances the real data type might not be recognized for sure unused data types should be turned off to avoid misleading detection Default disabled no data tape selected only available when Active is enabled Data Capturing Input Interface Data Capturing Data capturing allows to write incoming data to a file before the data is converted by the emulation This feature should only be used for testing purposes because it slows down the system performance Active Enable to log sent data Default directory for the log file is FORMS4WORK application path DATA DSPPATHx default name of the log file is Ixxxx DAT Each job
252. pends on the installed colored toner of the printer Available colors are red green blue magenta cyan ruby violet brown gray cardinal royal Default Blue Color Mapping Mode Select the method used to map the PCL colors on the Xerox Highlight color The following methods are available e Use always Primary color e Use first color seen in job e Use first color seen in page e Use always Primary color All PCL colors are mapped on the color defined in Primary color e Use first color seen in job All PCL colors of one print job will be mapped on the first PCL color seen of the print job e Use first color seen in page All PCL colors of one page will be mapped on the first PCL color seen of this page D With this selection you may have to change the printer s toner during printing your job Mapping table for text colors e Source color Select a source color for the re mapping of PCL colors for text rectangles and shadings Available colors are black red green yellow blue magenta cyan white Default Black e Destination color Select a destination color for the re mapping of PCL colors for text rectangles and shadings Available colors are black red green yellow blue magenta cyan white Default Black Mapping table for graphic colors FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 125 6 3 14 6 3 14 1 The mapping of PCL graphics to Xerox Highlight color graphics can be selected here Each PCL graphic
253. ponses might not be applicable For highest flexibility it can be controlled by this option whether feedback responses are send to the host system or not Default enabled e Send stop code to host after writing lt n gt sec Define the time in seconds after which a stop code ist send to the host This applies if a write access to the printer is not successfully completed within this time Some hosts require responses within a specific time If for some reason the printer goes offline or is turned off this might lead to problems with bi directional communication Set to O to turn off this option Default O off D The effective time depends on the write timeout set at the output port I e if at the output port a write timeout is set to 10 sec and here 15 sec are used the second timeout after 20 sec will send the stop code This is because the first timeout after 10 sec is still in valid range of 15 sec Jobs e Split job after lt n gt pages Enter number of page breaks after which a job shall be split into smaller parts For example a print job with 5000 pages can be split into 50 smaller print jobs each consisting of 100 pages Also if no specific criterion exists for the end of a print job and therefore all print jobs from the host system are processed in the FORMS4WORK system as a single job a forced split can be achieved using this parameter This option is helpful if the printer is collecting print jobs completely before st
254. pplication The Field Scanner filter is used to scan print job data for data fields This filter does not modify the original print job data The filter scans the print job data using one of several scanning methods to detect data fields Detected data values are passed to one of several storage methods or may be used to modify job parameters D Processing and usage of data field values depends on appropriate components which do support usage of the Field Scanner filter FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 173 6 4 5 2 Configuration Before you can configure any other parameters be sure to setup data scanning Data Scanning The Field Scanner filter is configured by defining an appropriate scanning method and an appropriate storage method The scanning method defines how data fields can be detected within the print job data and is therefore dependent of the print job data format e g ASCII PCL and others Triggered Binary Job Triggered PCL Job PCL Job Scanned For Text Areas CSV Formatted ASCII Data ASCII Formatted With Fix Column Width Data Processing The storage method of detected data fields depends on what is to be done with that data When passing to other components this also requires components which do support the selected storage method e Reporting to later components e Saving To ODBC Database e Writing DOCUMENTS4WORK export files Job Data Manipulation Each job passing FORMS4WORK will have some dynamical
255. put out to tray 2 Overlay only on the first sheet DEFINE ID 1 FILENAME ovl csp RULE FROM 1 TO 1 ID 1 Overlay on all pages from page 2 on DEFINE ID 2 FILENAME ov2 csp RULE FROM 2 ID 2 Overlay on all backsides duplex printing DEFINE ID 3 FILENAME ov3 csp RULE SIDE BACK ID 3 Overlay on all backsides simplex printing FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 108 DEFINE ID 4 FILENAME ov4 csp ADDBACKSIDE RULE SIDE SIMPLEXBACK ID 1 Overlay only on backsides from sheet 2 on simplex and duplex printing DEFINE ID 5 FILENAME ov5 csp DEFINE ID 6 FILENAME ov5 csp ADDBACKSIDE RULE FROM 2 SIDE BACK ID 5 RULE FROM 2 SIDE SIMPLEXBACK ID 6 Overlay on any third front DEFINE ID 7 FILENAME ov7 csp RULE STEP 3 SIDE FRONT ID 7 Chose overlay by form name on the host IPDS Group Boundary command FORMS name on the host is LETTER DEFINE ID 8 FILENAME ov8 csp RULE FORMNAME LETTER ID 8 Chose overlay by CSPOVERLAY command in the print data stream document must contain CSPOVERLAY form9 DEFINE ID 9 FILENAME ov9 csp RULE CSPSTRING form9 ID 9 Chose overlay by text querytext in the print data stream DEFINE ID 10 FILENAME ov10 csp RULE FINDSTRING querytext ID 10 Reset sheet counter after a certain number of sheets Reset sheet counter after every 500th sheet RULE FROM 500 TO 500 RESETCOUNTER Reset sheet counter by AOS JOG output RULE JOG RESETCOUNTER Overlay dependent on Input Media Source Paper fe
256. put port s Job Monitoring tab If set the committed page counter will be incemented in sync with received page counter If not the committed counter will be incremented after the page has been confirmed as printed by the printer which is required by some non IBM Host OSes Job Name An IPDS Host is able to send a job name or job identification within the print job data If such an information is present FORMS4WORK can extract that information and pass it on to its own spooling system e Extract job name from Group Boundary command Enable Disable extracting job name from Group Boundary command Usually the job name gets sent with the Group Boundary IPDS command If this parameter is enabled the IPDS interpreter will use that information Default enabled e Add form name to job name Enable to add form name to job name Extract job name from Group Boundary command must be enabled If the job name is extracted from a Group Boundary IPDS command it is built using job name job number and user name as given by the host system This option will also add the form name given by the host system to this job name Default disabled e Add MVS job class OS400 spool file name If connected to an MVS type host IPDS is able to extract the job class ID out of the IPDS Group Boundary command When this option is enabled the job class ID is added to the job s name Default disabled e Extract job name from d
257. putting print data from a host computer on a printer using FORMS4WORK The following components are used for this purpose Input Interface The input interface connects the FORMS4WORK system with the host computer This component makes the connection to the host computer or a data source using the hardware ports of the FORMS4WORK system Possible ports include the following e Network for example Ethernet Token Ring SNA e Hardware options for example channel adapters Emulation This is where the print data from Host and or network are prepared for the output device e g PCL b w printers PDF color printers Internet file etc Output Interface When the print data have been processed by the emulation they are passed on to the output device using this component In this case too the connection is made using the hardware ports of the FORMS4WORK system Input Interface In Detail Depending on the type of port used an Input Interface may be made up of several components One example of this is an Input port that receives print data with the PPD PPR protocol via TCP IP In this case the input interface which we have previously regarded as a single entity consists of a transport component namely the TCP IP network protocol and the communication component e g the PPD PPR protocol What components are offered or supported by the various input interfaces depends mainly on the hardware port of the FORMS4WORK system that is used
258. quence can be defined a data field is found only once If this is not possible here you may decide if the first the last or all appearances will become data field value In case of all all detected values are concatenated to a long character string each value separated from each other by a space character Trim Internal Blanks This switch controls internal trimming of the field value Regardless of the optional trimming of leading and or trailing whitespace characters this option will remove space and tab characters within the field value As an example a field value of VALUE with this option enabled will result in a value of VALUE To remove the leading or trailing blanks the options trim leading and or trim trailing whitespace characters need to be used Variable This list contains job information data as job id job name user name etc All this information whenever it becomes available is dynamically set for each job By selecting field type Variable and one of these job information fields you may use job information as a field value Constant This field is used to define a constant value It might be necessary to set a field value always to a constant value To do this select Constant as field type and enter the value to be used here Premature whitespace terminates value FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 179 6 4 5 2 3 When e g the value is defined with a length of 8 bytes there may be spaces within this l
259. r emulation On your host system there is already a connection for an IBM 3830 model 1 configured Enter the value 3380 as ID number and the value 1 as Model number As soon as the host system sends a Sense type and model request FORMS4WORK will report a 3830 printer model 1 supporting features of the 3825 300 dpi emulation IOCA FS This overrides the IOCA Function Set ID value reported to the host system during registration Use only after consulting support Possible values include Printer default 10 11 42 and 45 Default Printer default Paper Type Select the paper type Possible values are e Cut sheet e Fanfold If Fanfold is selected IPDS reports the paper size with swapped Xm and Ym axes to the host system This is necessary for laser printers with fanfold stock and simulates an inadequacy in IPDS of industrial standard printers Use this setting if you wish to print landscape jobs in portrait format or vice versa The correct orientation of the axes is taken into account for the internal calculations Default Cut sheet Suppress Mark Form Enable to suppress mark form The IPDS mark form command prints a fixed IPDS overlay from the host marking the beginning and the end of a print job This option suppresses the marking A typical case for the use of the mark form command are fanfold printers Default disabled Output Bin Mapping IPDS print jobs contain host identifications ID for the destination of the
260. r not as with From ist line Ignore first line In case that data field names are listed in the first line but you want to use other filed names defined by yourself use this option You may define each field name and the first line during processing is simply ignored Trim leading whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace characters are removed from the left end of the data field value string Trim trailing whitespace chars If this option is set whitespace characters are removed from the right end of the data field value string Reporting To Later Components This storage method is notifying all components placed and working after the Field Scanner filter whenever a data field or a record change has been recognized Notification is done at the moment when the scanner method reports one of these events All components which do support Field Scanner notification will receive the recognized data immediately Recognized data fields are not stored within this method If a data field is recognized more than once the newer value always overwrites the past Record entities are reported as configured within the scanner method Although this supports multiple records there will be always one record per job if the components which receive and handle notification do not take care of this This storage method does not need any configuration D Processing and usage of data field values depends on appropriate components whic
261. rallel Input 43 Password 13 Administrator 13 Guest 13 Operator 13 Passwords 16 Pausejob 22 25 PCL Output 89 PCL5 to PDF 109 Compression Level 109 Duplex Mode 112 Encryption 111 Face down printing 110 Image Mask Method 109 Include all resources in each split 109 Line Termination 112 Orientation 112 Output Destination 110 112 Page Copies 112 Page order 110 Paper Size 112 PCL Defaults 112 PDF Common 109 PDF Miscellaneous 110 PDF Security 111 PDF Signatures 112 Resources 114 Signatures 112 Split Jobs 109 Stapling 110 PCL5 to X Metacode 115 Color 123 Default Font 118 Emulation 115 Performance 121 Resources 118 Trays 120 Xerox Printer 119 PJL 27 Plex mode 79 POP3 44 Port 15 223 PPD Input 46 Prescribe 125 Prescribe to PCL5 125 Overview 125 Page Offsets 126 PCL Features 127 Prescribe Defaults FRPO 125 Resources 128 Principles 9 Components 9 Specimen Application 12 Theory 9 Print direction 86 Print job 25 Print period 219 Print process 17 18 Basic information 18 Common settings 18 Concurrentjobs 18 Debug information for troubleshooting 18 Delay job output 18 Error messages 18 Event logging 18 Extended information 18 Log event 18 Log levels 18 Name 18 Setup and configuration 17 Warning notes 18 Print Process Bar 27 Index 233 Printed Jobs 22 Printer 222 Printer Control 87 Printer Pool 214 Printer Type 79 Processes 11 Print Process 11 Threads 11 Program Components 1
262. ransparently to the printer e All All PCL commands will be discarded e PCL within prescribe Only PCL commands within prescribe are discarded e g lt ESC gt stands for the control code 0x1B IR MAP 1 1 lt ESC gt 8U EXIT e PCL outside prescribe Only PCL commands outside prescribe are discarded e g lt ESC gt 8U IR MAP 1 1 EXIT Formfeed behavior Determines how pages will be separated on encountering a Form Feed 0x0C Formfeed The control code Ox0C will be used This may result into empty pages on consecutively form feeds e Printer reset A complete reset sequence will be sent to the printer Empty pages are avoided but each page might be handled like a print job e Select front page command The PCL duplex page side selection command lt ESC gt 8a1G will be used Handling of download characters Determines the behavior with download soft fonts LDFC command i e the RAM usage of the emulation at runtime e Discard never The font will be send to the printer and stored permanently within the RAM of the emulation i e the font may be changed any time with the SFA command e Discard after SFA command The font will be released after the first SFA command i e a second SFA command applied to the same font has no effect FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 129 e Do not store The font will be immediately released after sending to the printer i e a following SFA command has no effect 6 3 15 Program
263. red information can be gained by e SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol with continuously polling of the printer or by e PJL Printer Job Language messages send by the printer during the printing of a job The way used to gain information from the output devices is set at the Output Port Interfaces configuration In the windows list each printer is displayed as an item with a symbol The color of the symbol indicates the printers state e Green The printer is available and ready e Yellow Warning i g low of paper e Red Not available because i g offline e White Unknown or not available The state of a printer is detected by existing or missing state information delivered by the printer States like i g low paper out of paper low toner out of toner door open paper jam and service required can be signaled by the printer If multiple conditions are signaled by a printer the color of the printers symbol is signaling the most critical condition If a printer i g signals low paper warning and out of toner error the symbol will be displayed in red color If a printer signals low paper warning and low toner warning the symbol will be displayed in yellow color because both conditions are warnings By double clicking a list entry depending on the selected type of device monitoring further information about a printer will be shown in a separate dialog Printers monitored by SNMP are responding with
264. refers to horizontal Y refers to vertical movements in reference to page in portrait printing mode Default O all Print Direction Offsets Portrait Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape These parameters are moving output of specific print directions on a page relatively it is a feature which is used for special paper formats in general X and Y values are specified for specific print directions Example If you would like to move output for Reverse Landscape only hold the page in front of you that you are able to read the text If you want to move the lines down enter a positive Y value Default O all Scaling Zoom Changes the size of the IPDS data being imaged on the page Values greater than 100 enlarge the page values smaller than 100 reduce the size of the page This feature is especially useful to make line data printouts fit on a non edge to edge printer Example set Zoom to 95 to make an A4 edge to edge printout fit on a standard PCL5 printer without edge to edge capability Default value 100 meaning no change Center Zoom If Zoom is set to a value other than 100 the reduced or enlarged image can be automatically centered on the paper sheet With center zoom activated the whole page offset values are calculated by the emulation FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 87 Default disabled Job separation and finisher commands Select job separation and finishing commands from the p
265. res a numeric argument between 1 and 65535 The ID number can be chosen anywhere in this range It may only be defined once per IPDSOVER INI Example ID 10 FILENAME FILENAME requires a alphanumeric argument for the file name of the resources file with file name extension and a relative path to the IPDSOVER INI if necessary Example FILENAME kopfl csp chooses the file KOPF1 CSP from the parent directory OFFSET OFFSET requires two numeric arguments X and Y for positioning the overlay relatively to the origin defined in the overlay file The unit is 1 PCL dot a 300 of an inch This makes an exact positioning of the FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 104 overlay possible without having to generate a new resource via the printer driver The point of origin is in the upper left corner of the page at the beginning of the PCL Printable Area dependent on the printer model Positive coordinates point to the right hand side or the bottom of the page respectively Example OFFSET 50 100 shifts the overlay 50 300 inches to the left and 100 300 inches to the top that equals 4 2 millimeters to the left and 8 5 millimeters to the top MACRO MACRO does not require any argument If MACRO is specified the resource will be stored in the printers as a permanent PCL macro That way it is possible to reduce the size of the data stream sent to the printer when the overlay in a print job is used repeatedly Premise is a corresponding
266. ressed Macro ID numbers start at D This option is only available with PCL formatted print jobs To avoid overwriting preexisting macros on your printer you may define a start value that is higher than any of the existing Macros created by the Overlay Manager will have IDs starting at the defined value Overlays Page To each page of a print job a PCL data file or a PCL command sequence can be added as an overlay To spare a page just leave the input fields for the overlays blank If more pages are printed than overlays are defined the overlay order is repeated from page one Example 1 The first page should be printed using overlay A and the second page using overlay B Therefore you enter at Page 1 the file for overlay A and the file for overlay B at Page 2 All odd pages 1 3 5 are printed now using overlay A and all even pages 2 4 6 using overlay B Example 2 Additional to example 1 each 3rd page should be printed without an overlay To manage that enter the overlay files for page 1 and 2 as described above Additionally enter an empty field for overlay data at Page 3 D The counting of pages will re start at page 1 after Pages which are defined as due to a unique byte sequence in their data are not counted at all Copy Furthermore it is possible to generate copies of each page using different overlays for each copy Therefore the data of the print job will send more than once to the printer Example Page
267. rmance Default 32 KB Timing e Delay before next try on read error Define the delay before next try on read error If a problem occurs at the input port during reading the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next read attempt This prevents a slow input port slowing down the system by frequently repeated read attempts Default 1000 msec e Delay before next try on write error Define the delay before next try on write error If a problem occurs at the output port during writing the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next write attempt This prevents a slow output port slowing down the system by frequently repeated write attempts Default 10 msec e Timeout for shutdown Define the time in milliseconds which the Print process shall wait for completion of the emulation thread If the set time has elapsed before the emulation thread has been terminated correctly by itself it will be terminated by the Print process D Ensure that you set an adequate time to allow the emulation thread to terminate by itself The set value should not generally be changed Default 5000 msec Bidirectional Communication e Produce ACK NAK responses Enable to produce ACK NAK responses When processing print jobs which are received through a Channel Input Port and when processing IPDS print jobs usually it is necessary to send feedback responses to the host system
268. rom the pull down menu Default PCL5 Printer Operation Fine tuning of the created PCL5 data stream can be done here e Copies by printer Enable to generate copies of a print data stream by the printer Disable to generate copies of a print data stream by the emulation Default disabled e Collate Enable for collated copies Default enabled This selection switches between collated and non collated copy generation If collate is enabled copies of the print data stream will be generated on a per job basis otherwise copies of the print data stream will be generated on a per page basis e Change sign of registration offset on duplex backside Enable to change sign of registration offset on duplex backside Default disabled Some printers move print data on duplex back pages to the wrong direction This switch will reverse the movements on duplex back pages e Send FOL forms as PCL macros Enable to send FOL forms as PCL macros Default enabled e Full page mode Enable to print data from edge to edge Default enabled FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 67 In Full page mode data can be printed from edge to edge on the page if the printer supports this feature Otherwise an unprintable margin of some millimeters remains on each printed page dependent on the type of printer e PCL Graphics Compression Enter PCL graphics compression Default 3 The compressing method of the raster graphics in the PCL5 data
269. rs 6 3 10 2 Parameters 6 3 10 2 1 IPDS to PCL Emulation Overview The IPDS to PCL emulation of FORMS4WORK allows printers which support PCL to be connected to an IBM host system in the form of IPDS compatible printers IPDS Intelligent Printer Data Stream is a development of IBM which stands for the current high demands on print quality It allows output that is made up of various data types for example text matrix images vector graphics and bar codes The IPDS emulation allows the FORMS4WORK to act in the capacity of an IPDS compatible printer with the following features e APA All Points Addressable prints for text graphics matrix images and bar codes at any point within the printable area of a page e Printing text in many variations by changing the character set and print direction within a page e The use of images and vector graphics to show line drawings cake and bar graphs technical drawings logos tables and signatures e Loading character sets e The use of overlays in other words the storage of forms and letterheads which are always printed with the same defined appearance e The use of page segments in other words the storage of text which is always printed in the same style as the remainder of the page e Printing of various types of bar codes e Printing with almost arbitrary page orientation and print directions D The IPDS capabilities depend directly on the Host software version and its IPDS functiona
270. rtrait format in units of 1 100 0 01 inch Default 0 00 all Back Side Offsets Landscape Set offsets that only apply for the back of the page in landscape format You can define the following offsets e Long edge binding top e Long edge binding left e Short edge binding top e Short edge binding left The settings will be done for landscape format in units of 1 inch Minimum steps are 0 01 inches Default 0 00 all 6 3 17 3 3 Page Layout Margins Set the margins for printing text Set margins apply after every reset command lt ESC gt X lt CR gt lt LF gt as long as no new margins are set by the data stream Available options are e Standard e User Defined e Portrait Landscape Default Standard e Standard Set to apply the default margins of the Xerox XES 4213 printer e User Defined Set the margins to a freely chosen value FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 141 The values apply from the edge of the page and apply to both portrait and landscape formats User defined inch e Left margin Right margin Top margin Bottom margin Default 0 000 all e Portrait Landscape Define the margins for portrait and landscape Portrait inch e Left margin e Right margin e Top margin e Bottom margin Default 0 000 all Landscape inch e Left margin e Right margin e Top margin e Bottom margin Default 0 000 all 6 3 17 3 4 PCL5 Printer Type Use this dialog to set various pr
271. s Finisher Xerox DP DT Series Finisher Xerox DC Series Finisher DSC Finisher Using these options allows control of specific accessories of these printer families In detail the accessories types are Jog Shifted output Staple Stapling Punch Punching Collate Collating of print jobs in specified order see printer s manual Slip Sheets Inserting divisional sheets D Some printer models do not support all combinations of these accessories Also please keep in mind that adjustment of the ID numbers of output bins may be necessary see IPDS Printer Output Bin Mapping If Xerox DP DT Series Finisher is selected a Xerox Job Ticket will be sent to the printer instead of PJL commands If DSC Finisher is selected and if an IPDS FORM name is found this information can be forwarded to the printer If set to generate Operator Message an operator message command is heading to the print job The job has to be released manually on the printer console so the operator is able to load the printer with the appropriate paper stock If set to set Document Media name an DocumentMedia command is added at start of the print job requesting a paper of type FORMipdsname from the printer s paper catalog Example If the Host form name is INVOICE a paper named FORMINVOICE has to be loaded A paper mismatch will be issued by the printer if the wrong paper was loaded With all configurations the IPDS job name will be sent to the printer
272. s a special customer adaptation There was no reliable information or documentation about this format Also no information how to interpret a header or trailer record was available length info A N record length r I A pram ose RET aan E lt p record identifier 1 byte OxE0 header or trailer record y record D The record length 1 byte contains the complete length of the record in bytes including the length of record length itself The user byte is a constant record identifier D A header or trailer record user byte 0xE0 will be stripped The PCC is a IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control code FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 202 6 4 9 6 4 9 1 6 4 9 2 Stringchange Filter Application The Stringchange filter is used to replace or remove individual characters and character strings in the data stream before and or after the emulation of the print data Examples e The input data stream contains control commands which are not supported by the emulation or the output device Use the Stringchange filter in this case to remove these commands e The input data stream contains special characters such as umlauts which must be replaced by other characters or character strings for example A becomes ae etc Use the Stringchange filter in this Case to replace characters or character strings Configuration The Stringchange filter requires three pieces of information to repla
273. s after printing Enable to keep spooled jobs after printing Here you define whether print jobs are held for security purpose after printing and how long they are held Held print jobs can be sent to the output port again if there were problems sending them before The amount of time the print jobs are held is defined in hours and or minutes If both values are set to zero the jobs are held until they are deleted manually D Print jobs require storage capacity in the spool directory Default disabled Keep at the most lt x gt jobs Enter the number of print jobs to be kept at the most D For any further job above this number the oldest job is deleted automatically Leave empty for unlimited number of jobs Default empty unlimited Scheduled printing Affects the time when jobs are being printed Printing of jobs can be delayed or jobs can be printed only at a specific time Delayed printing e Do not delay printing Set if print jobs shall be processed normally The output however can be restricted in time by setting a print period e Delay printing until Set to delay output of print jobs to a specific date time All processed jobs are held until the specified date time e Delay printing for lt x gt sec Set to delay output of print jobs using a specific number of seconds All incoming jobs are held for this time before they get processed During this time it is possible to manipulate the job attributes and the jo
274. s are device dependent AUTOMATIC Standard output bin determined by the printer UPPER BIN Usually the face down output bin LOWER BIN Usually the face up output bin FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 114 6 3 11 HC OUTPUTBIN to HC OUTPUTBINS Output bins of a high capacity option Default AUTOMATIC Resource Path Define the path from where the PCL5 to PDF emulation can access resources like fonts etc Include JavaScript file Enable to include JavaScript file Enter the name and path of the JavaScript file js or search for it with the Browse function Default disabled Run emulation in static mode Enable to run emulation continuously Disable to finish emulation after each job This controls whether the PCL5 to PDF emulation is unloaded between the incoming print jobs dynamic mode or whether it remains loaded for the entire duration of the Print processes static mode Default disabled Job Controller FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 115 6 3 12 PCL to PDF see PCL to PDF Properties inside chapter IPDS to PDF emulation 6 3 13 PCL5 to X Metacode 6 3 13 1 Overview This document describes all the parameters of the FORMS4WORK PCL5 to X Metacode emulation All The parameters are default values They are in use until their values are overridden from PCL5 commands in the online data stream In the configuration dialog for this emulation you will find the following property pages Emulati
275. s is calculated using the following formula Total of lengths of all sources number of sources 1 lt 32767 Definition of a replacement Define a replacement Enter the following information Search for Define character string which is to be replaced If case is ignored depends on the setting of Ignore Case D Characters that cannot be entered using the keyboard are specified with a preceding character and a two character hexadecimal code The character itself is displayed as Examples e Hello replaces the word Hello _ e A replaces the German umlaut A e 0D 0A replaces the ASCII control characters Carriage Return CR and Line Feed LF Replace with Define character or character string to replace the string defined in Search for Leave empty to delete the character string from the data stream Replacements that cannot be entered using the keyboard are specified with a preceding character and a two character hexadecimal code Examples Search for Hello World Replace with Hey You replaces Hello World with Hey You Search for Replace with Ae replaces the umlaut with Ae Search for 0D 0A Replace with 0A replaces CR LF with LF Search for 1BD Replace with removes ESC D Textextractor Filter Application The Textextractor filter of the FORMS4WORK Server is used to extract pure printable data from PCL data streams at the input and or output of the FORMS4WORK em
276. s of the customers JSL s and some has been determined by experience FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 199 Code Function Code Function hex hex 00 Skip to channel 1 DA Space 10 lines 01 Space 1 line 0B Space 11 lines 02 Space 2 lines 0C Skip to channel 1 03 Space 3 lines 0D Space 13 lines 04 Space 4 lines DE Space 14 lines 05 Space 5 lines OF Space 15 lines 06 Space 6 lines 40 Space 1 line 07 Space 7 lines 08 Space 8 lines 09 Space 9 lines Note Every other code results per default in a Write no automatic space function PCC1 translation table of Bull Input Format Code Function hex 00 Skip to channel 1 01 Space 1 line 02 Space 2 lines 03 Space 3 lines 04 Space 4 lines 05 Space 5 lines 06 Space 6 lines 07 Space 7 lines 08 Space 8 lines 09 Space 9 lines Code hex S629 Space 10 lines Space 11 lines Space 12 lines Space 13 lines Skip to channel 2 Write no automatic space Skip to channel 3 Skip to channel 4 Space 1 line Note Every other code results per default in a Write no automatic space function PCC2 translation table of Bull Input Format Code Function hex Skip to channel 1 Space 1 line Space 2 lines Space 3 lines Space 4 lines Space 5 lines Space 6 lines Space 7 lines Space 8 lines Space 9 lines 3838 R8RS28 Code hex 583588882 Function Space 10 lines Space 11 lines Space 12 lines Space 13 lines Write no automatic spa
277. s option to disconnect FORMS4WORK from the Fiery Controller after each print job If a new job occurs FORMS4WORK will re connect Disable this option if connecting to the Fiery Controller takes too long Default disabled 6 6 2 2 Settings Buffer Read block size Block size for read operations in KB When data are received the data are read in blocks of the specified size as long as the port supports this However this only concerns output ports that supply a response such as a bi directional printer port Normally a block size of 32 KB is used Maximum size of receive buffer Maximum size of the internal data buffer If the data that are received at the output responses from the output device cannot be processed the data are nevertheless accepted and placed in a buffer This value defines the maximum size of this buffer When the receive buffer is full no more data can be accepted until the data can be processed and the buffer is thus emptied If no value is entered here the size of the buffer is only limited by the available hard disk space Timeouts Read Timeout Timeout for data reception This value allows the time properties of FORMS4WORK for read operations to be influenced This value should only be changed by experienced users Write Timeout Timeout for data output This value allows the time properties of FORMS4WORK for write operations to be influenced This value should only be changed by experienced users Delay if data received
278. s processing of print jobs For example several print jobs that arrive at the same time are processed in parallel in several threads The efficiency of a process falls with the number of threads however and therefore if a large amount of printing has to be completed it may be beneficial to distribute the whole print control over several FORMS4WORK Manual Principles 12 4 8 5 2 5 3 5 3 1 processes to achieve greater performance Specimen Application The Situation A global company automobiles is using IBM IPDS printers and wants to replace them with modern network printers and high performance b w printers The Problem The new b w printers process PCL data and must be connected to an Ethernet network The host applications on the other hand produce IPDS data The Solution FORMS4WORK provides the link between the host and the network printer in the form of a bridge The IPDS to PCL emulation allows the print data to be converted between the two printer languages As a result of the module structure of FORMS4WORK two 110 page b w printers can be used and if necessary other printing systems can also be added Program Components System Service The system service is the core part of the FORMS4WORK It is used as an interface between the various program components In Windows NT 2000 XP it is permanently available It receives the commands from the Client application through TCP IP and sends them on to the pri
279. sachsetececivenssnct nea nenaon duneneccuteendchbbeancctneessacs Danaa Eura E araa 172 VAN 011 072 11 0 9 aaar mn r Ee See ee E E ico 172 CONTIG UP ARION nenen cecal nates iadaa aE tend aid ae cangead AAEE tad cet cc E EEE E REEE EEEE 173 Triggered Raw Byte Stream ccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeenaeeeeeeeeecneaeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeseeeaeeeeeess 176 Triggered PCL Jobs di 177 PCL Job Scanned For Text Areas ccccccecceeceeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeeenaaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeseees 179 CSV Formatted ASCII Data isis ccieccce sec a can each ek ciate ini ese ee erent 181 ASCII Formatted With Fix Column Width ccecceeeceseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeeseeeseaeeseneeeneeeeaeeeinerentens 182 Reporting To Later COMPONENMS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeseenieeeeeeeseeeiaaeee 182 Saving To ODBC Database w ccecceececceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeaaaeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeseeeeasaaaeeeeeeseeenaeeeseesenas 183 Data UM a 183 Data Table att idad added ENG 183 FORMS4WORK 6 4 6 6 4 7 6 4 8 6 4 9 6 4 10 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 6 6 6 1 6 6 2 6 6 3 6 6 4 6 6 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 6 8 Data Fil iii ae 184 Writing DOCUMENTS4WORK import fileS oooooonnninnnnnnnnnnicnnnnnconnccnnocanonccanccnnrnc nora narn cano ncnn ca nnncnnn 184 GENS Ral saint ia tdt bid 185 NN 185 AAA cepa secheenceisieis doacecceai
280. sary FORMS4WORK is able to receive print jobs as emails from a mail server To do this a POP3 account has to be prepared on a mail server using POP3 protocol All the required parameters to access these print jobs are entered on this dialog page Mail Account POP3 e Hostname Enter hostname or IP address of the mail server on which an account has been prepared for receiving print jobs If a hostname is entered here instead of an IP address resolving via DNS must be guaranteed Default empty none e Port Enter TCP port which is to be used for communication with the mail server Usually port 110 is used but others are possible Default 110 D The required TCP port is defined by the mail server e Username Enter username of the POP3 account at the mail server Default empty none e Password Enter password of the POP3 account at the mail server Default empty none Print job data must be send as attachment in MIME or UUENCODED format In the mail body definitions for parameters of the print job can be added by using keywords Each keyword is assigned a value lt Keyword gt Value An assignment as shown above must be entered within one line The following keywords are supported FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 45 JOBNAME Name of the print job as FORMS4WORK should uses DESTINATION Destination where the print job should be sent to You can uses this parameter for definition of rules with rule type De
281. se 183 184 Triggered PCL Job 177 Triggered Raw Byte Stream 176 Writing DOCUMENTS4WORK Import Files 184 185 Fiery Port 212 Disconnect after job transmission 212 IP Address 212 Logical Printer 212 Password 212 Timeout 212 Username 212 Edit Logical Printer 19 Emulation 10 51 53 Chained Emulations 53 Channel Emulation 54 Filter 10 FOL 65 Forms Processor 76 IPDS toPCL5 79 IPDS to PDF 78 PCL5 to PDF 109 PCL5 to X Metacode 115 Performance 51 Prescribe to PCL5 125 Program Interface 129 Raw to Raw 132 File Men 24 Login 24 Resources 53 Quit 24 Theory 10 Start 24 XES toPCL5 134 a X Metacode to PCL5 153 2P File Name 40 221 Error 23 File Port 221 ile Por Error messages 18 23 FileName 221 ESCON 39 E 2 Filter 10 160 206 209 211 le Pn 23 Barcode Filter 161 ES Codepage Filter 168 Debug 22 Conditional Stringchange Filter 170 Error 23 j i F 23 Field Scanner Filter 172 a Job Copier Filter 186 Information 23 List 23 Job Separator Filter 187 y Overlay Manager 206 209 211 Log levels 23 Overview 160 No 23 pe Warni 23 Post Emulation filter 10 UR Pre Emulation filter 10 Event logging 18 23 Recordchange Filter 190 Events 18 l Stringchange Filter 202 Basic information 18 Textextractor Filter 203 Debug information for troubleshooting 18 Finish 87 Extended information 18 id ps pe E da Edit Default Font 73 arning notes Fonts 72 Extended information 18 23 Page Properties 71 F Paper 68 Paper Assignment 70 Perf
282. se they will exceed the maximum length of a print line But the different parts must not be separated by those carriage control codes normally generated by FORMS4WORK because of the channel commands When the download mode is enabled the suppression of generated control codes can be switched on and off by control strings included in the data stream This selection requires to define 2 control strings which let the printer activate or de activate the download FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 60 6 3 6 2 7 function Both control strings have to be at the beginning of a print line for being recognized by FORMS4WORK e Download start Hex Enter control string to let the printer activate the download function Default 50506F6F7BD6D5 e Download end Hex Enter control string to let the printer de activate the download function Default 50506F6F7BD6C6 Bypass Enable or disable bypass Default disabled All control strings known by a connected printer can definitely arrive to the printer using the so called bypass function even if the they include non printable codes Usage of this function secures that all nonprintable codes will not be converted neither from the spooler nor from FORMS4WORK though that the sequence remains intact This function is also very useful if the input of the codes cannot be done in hexadecimal notation and the desired code is not related to any key of the keyboard For the bypass function one printable
283. sh tanh coth asinh acosh atanh acoth Logarithmic Fct In lg exp Squareroot Fct sqrt Square Fct sqr Rounding Fct round floor ceil frac Factorial fac Modulus abs Further implemented functions are LN a Natural logarithm of a base is e LGa Logarithm of a basis is 10 There is no problem to calculate with or infinite The expression 1 0 will result in INF infinite also 1 0 INF This allows e g calculation of arcus tangens of infinite tan pi 2 inf not exactly due to inaccuracies atan inf pi 2 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 176 6 4 5 2 1 Triggered Raw Byte Stream This scan method will search within any byte stream To recognize data fields trigger sequences which will always precede the data values need to be defined All field definitions are entered into the table To add or remove lines right click into the table and use the popup menu Field Name Defines the name of a data field This name needs to be unique and should not contain blanks Type Defines the type of data used for this field Data is used for job data recognized using a trigger sequence Variable is used to set a field s value using a job information field Constant is used to set a field s value always to the same constant value Trigger Sequence This defines a sequence of bytes which is always preceding the field value This string is case sensitive Characters which may not be typed in usi
284. shown below which display menus with further entries Frequently required menu actions can also be reached directly through the button bar below the main menu e File e Job e Setup e Help File New Creates one more of the following e Client Window Opens new client window An additional client window might be helpful if you are running more than one print process e Print Process Creates new print process Enter a name for the new print process e Desktop Shortcut Creates a shortcut for the current print process on the Windows desktop A desktop shortcut might be helpful if you are working with several print processes at the time Login Starts the dialog to build up the connection to the FORMS4WORK Server The FORMS4WORK Server can be monitored or administrated respectively as soon as a connection has been made Start Starts the print process with its Logical Printers for job conversion and printing Stop Ends the print process No further processing of the data is possible Active print jobs are always processed completely before the print processes are ended This can lead to delays when ending a print process Quit Closes down FORMS4WORK Client but doesn t stop a previously started print process FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 25 5 3 2 4 2 Job Print Starts sending the selected print job to the output port interface As soon as the output is complete the job will be deleted from the sp
285. side selection you can use the classical Form feed as an alternative Default Duplex page side selection Area Fill Method Select the area fill method from the pull down menu Possible values are Bitmap no conversion 240 gt 300 dpi PCL Pattern old header type PCL Pattern new header type PCL shading and rectangles Default Bitmap conversion 240 gt 300 dpi To fill an area with a gray scale pattern an IPDS host system sends this pattern to the printer PCL printers however do not support this instruction which means that it has to be simulated by the emulation Bitmap no conversion 240 gt 300 dpi uses the pattern without change and without scaling from 240 to 300 dpi This method represents a compromise between speed and accuracy Moir effects may occur in the output PCL Pattern old header type and PCL Pattern new header type are faster since a freely definable PCL character is used to generate the pattern At the edges however overlaps and flaw areas may occur depending on the printer being used PCL shading and rectangles uses the PCL command Fill Rectangle to fill the area This command is only available on fairly recent printers and is the fastest method When you output a large number of filled areas that are next to each other however banding may occur printing in several stripes since PCL only supports a maximum of eight gray scales for this command Bitmap conversion 240 gt 300 dpi is similar to the
286. sing a trigger sequence Variable is used to set a field s value using a job information field Constant is used to set a field s value FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 178 always to the same constant value Trigger Sequence This defines a sequence of bytes which is always preceding the field value This string is case sensitive Characters which may not be typed in using the keyboard can be entered with a percent sign followed by a two digit hex code e g 0Od for carriage return To use the percent sign type Offset Defines the number of bytes following the trigger sequence before the field value starts Length Defines the number of bytes after the trigger sequence and offset to be used as field value If length is set to O the trigger sequence itself will become field value if present If not the field value will be empty Example A field named Doctype with a trigger sequence as DOC an offset of 8 and a length of 4 The print job data contains a text as any text in DOCO123456789abc followed with text This will be recognized as data field Doctype with value 89ab Regular Expression Defines the syntax for a regular expression to extract field values from retrived data using a search pattern Default Value Defines the default value to be used if the trigger sequence can not be found Find This option defines which appearance of the data is to be used as field value If a unique trigger se
287. sing the settings made in the date format group of the general page As an example a scanner is defined to recognize the fields Customer ID and Sales Account The DOCUMENTS4WORK map title is set to CAPTURE Both recognized data fields are passed as text fields using IDs 1001 and 1002 The print job file itself is passed as a document field with ID 2001 Then the created import file will look as follows CHARSET ANSI FOLDER FT CAPTURE FI 1001 F1 1002 B1 2001 50003930 821 D Output 42 pcl FOLDER FT CAPTURE F1 1001 F1 1002 BI 2001 50003955 321 D Output 42 pcl Job Copier Filter Application The Job Copier filter is used to create multiple copies of processed print jobs Copies can be created parallelly or serially Parallel means the job is copied parallely to multiple destination directories You may define a list of directories which will receive a copy of the print job for further processing This filter does not modify the print job s data Serial copies are created by appending the print job several times to itself This will produced one job file containing several copies of the job in serial Configuration Define a destination directory for each copy to be created Destination Directory To add another copy of the print jobs click on the Add button and select a directory The path will be added to the list of job directories To change the destination directory click on the Edit button
288. smaller jobs also on the FORMS4WORK server multiple jobs will be created and shown 6 3 18 2 3 Miscellaneous Job name Modify The system generated job name may be modified lt NONE gt Nothing will be appended Add page count The amount of printed pages or sheets will be appended to the jobname _ lt pagecount gt Add sheet count The amount of printed pages or sheets will be appended to the jobname _ lt sheetcount gt Replace system job name with HRPTNA field of RSTACK or BANNER When a HRPTNA statement withithin the current JDL JDE is given this extracted field will be used as job name Replace system job name with extracted trigger data offset length FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 157 The job name will be replaced with a sequence triggered from the job data e g from a banner page The extracted sequence will be length bytes from the offset relative to the matching trigger end Accounting If activated a ASCII file containing job information e g number of printed pages etc will be generated within the current resource directory For each job a line with comma separated fields will be generated For advanced users only Here may be done some special settings which are usually not necessary or might be harmful for normal operation Suppress macro control commands During converting of the data stream no PCL macro commands will be used lt ESC gt amp f X It is not recommended to activate this Remove
289. ss allows full management of the FORMS4WORK including setup and configuration of print processes as well as starting ending and monitoring of printing jobs Administrator access is only available on one computer at a time FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 14 5 3 1 3 5 3 2 Operator Operator access allows starting ending and monitoring of printing jobs As Operator you can cancel or restart printing jobs Guest Guest access allows monitoring of printing jobs only Logging in Connect Click this button after you have selected a server from the server list Add Enter DNS name or IP address The Add button opens the Add Server dialog box In this dialog box you can add additional FORMS4WORK server to the server list If you do not automatically find a server in the list you can manually add the server DNS name or its IP address See Connecting to a server for more information Remove Remove selected server from server list The button will be disabled if you select a server that is currently connected or has been found automatically The FORMS4WORK Client Software The FORMS4WORK client application main window is displayed the first time a connection to the FORMS4WORK server is established The main window displays the following sub windows The Upper Window The upper window displays the logical printers currently configured for this server The following describes the buttons at the top of the main
290. stination Port Queue USER Name of the users which the print job should be assigned to EXECUTION Defines the time at which the print job should be printed The defined value must be given in the following format Day Month Year Hour Minute Second UTC The number of seconds can be dropped If utc is not added the time according to he local system time of the FORMS4WORK Servers will be used DELAY Defines an amount of time by which the output of the print job should be delayed The value can be specified using the format lt x gt lt unit gt where lt x gt is a integer and the unit is defined by one of the keywords sec hour hours day days Settings e Print mail text and attachments Select to process mail text and attachments as print jobs e Print only mail text Select to process only the mail text as a print job Attachments will be disregarded e Print only attachments Select to process only attachments as print jobs Mail text will be disregarded This is the default setting e Include header information Enable to add header information of the mail before the mail text This option is only available if Print mail text and attachments or Print only mail text is activated Default disabled e Don t delete mails from server Enable to keep mails on the mail server after they are processed After a restart of FORMS4WORK Server all mails residing on the mail server will be processed again
291. stments to be made Each XES tray number is converted into a corresponding PCL tray number Output Bins e Bin lt n gt map to lt x gt Assign a PCL5 bin name to each XES bin number by selecting an entry from the map to list field FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 144 Available bins to map to Ignore no mapping Upper bin Lower rear bin bin 1 bin 9 Default O bin map to Upper bin Input Trays e Tray lt n gt map to lt x gt Assign a PCL5 tray name to each XES tray number by selecting an entry from the map to list field Available trays to map to Ignore no mapping Paper from main tray Paper from manual input Envelop from manual input Paper from lower tray Paper from optional paper source Envelope from optional envelope feeder Tray 7 Tray 25 Default O tray map to lt Ignore gt no mapping The two languages XES and PCL5 use different names for tray mapping This parameter is available to compensate for these different names e Input tray switching Enable for input tray switching Default enabled Paper Size To Input Tray Assignment e Tray lt n gt contains lt x gt Assign a paper size to a paper input tray Available options Undefined format DIN A4 DIN A3 Lexmark DIN A5 DIN A5 User defined format When a paper size has been assigned a PCL page size command lt ESC gt amp 1 A is also sent to select the tray If no paper size has been assigned Undefined format no PC
292. string also known as a prefix may be entered in ASCII or EBCDIC characters and must not exceed a length of 20 characters Changing the entry in ASCII automatically changes the entry for EBCDIC and vice versa Default DJDE ASCII C4D1C4C5 EBCDIC DIJDE Offset Define a DJDE offset Indicates the number of bytes from the beginning of the record user s data portion until the beginning of the DJDE definition string It is a numerical value which can vary from 0 to 99 FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 120 Default 0 Define a DJDE skip Specifies the number of bytes from the beginning of the record s user data portion until the beginning of the DJDE options This numerical value must be greater than or equal to the output prefix length offset value 1 and less than 128 Default depends on the length of the ASCII string entered above RSTACK e RSTACK Definition Define a character string to classify a record as an RSTACK record The number of entered bytes must be less than 34 characters The characters may be entered both as ASCII and as EBCDIC characters Changing the entry in ASCII automatically changes the entry for EBCDIC and vice versa Default RSTACK ASCII D9E2E3C1C3D2 EBCDIC e RSTACK Offset Define the column from which the RSTACK character string starts in the data record The numerical value may be between 0 and 99 Default 1 e Generate RSTACK before each job Enable to send out a RSTACK
293. t A record with a write type control character immediately followed by a record with the Write no space control character will be processed according to the job descriptor entry option selected for overprint handling ANSI control codes for IBM tapes BS2000 Channel Input Format Each record must be terminated with lt CR gt lt LF gt record record BS2000 Channel Input Format O The record termination code may not be part of the data The record termination code depends on the configured mode ASCII or EBCDIC Record Code Code termination ASCII EBCDIC hex hex lt CR gt 0D 0D lt LF gt OA 150r 25 Record termination codes of BS2000 Channel Input Format D When Line printer Format is used as output format depending on the PCC input type configuration ASCII or EBCDIC line printer data is generated Also all Skip to channel x commands are translated into a lt FF gt only The PCC is one byte long where each bit has following function FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 197 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Channel or line feed number 0 15 1 immediate ly 0 after write 1 skip to channel n 0 space n lines PCC function of BS2000 Channel Input Format Not used O The PCC can be translated via a user defined translation table Microfocus Cobol Input Format This format was a special customer adaptation There was no reliable information or documentation about this form
294. t lt FF gt e lt CR gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR LF gt lt FF gt lt CR FF gt e lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt lt CR LF gt lt FF gt lt CR FF gt e lt CR gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt FF gt The Carriage Return command causes a carriage return the Line Feed command causes a line feed and the Form Feed command causes a form feed i e no replacements of CR LF and FF e lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt FF gt The Carriage Return command causes a carriage return line feed the Line Feed command causes a line feed and the Form Feed command causes a form feed i e CR is replaced with CR LF no replacements of LF and FF e lt CR gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR LF gt lt FF gt lt CR FF gt The Carriage Return command causes a carriage return the Line Feed command causes a carriage return line feed and the Form Feed command causes a carriage return form feed i e no replacements of CR LF is replaced with CR LF and FF is replaced with CR FF e lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt lt CR LF gt lt FF gt lt CR FF gt The Carriage Return command causes a carriage return line feed the Line Feed command causes a carriage return line feed and the Form Feed command causes a carriage return form feed i e CR is replaced with CR LF LF is replaced with CR LF and FF is replaced with CR FF Default lt CR gt lt
295. t This is also done for subsequent pages containing no trigger Destination Directory Defines a path where the partial job which will be created depending on the trigger sequence is to be saved Name Prefix This is an optional prefix added to the partial job s file name The complete file name is built as lt Prefix gt lt Job ID gt lt Trigger sequence gt lt Prefix gt is the optional string of up to 8 characters defined in this field lt Job ID gt is the optionally added job ID of the incoming print job lt Trigger sequence gt is either a constant trigger as defined or the combination of trigger sequence and variable part Premature whitespace character terminates variable part This is only used with method Scan for one trigger followed by variable data When e g the variable part is defined as a sequence of 8 characters there may be spaces within this length With this option set the space character will terminate the variable part even before the length of 8 is reached With a trigger sequence as DOC the criterion will be DOC1234 instead of DOC1234 678 when a space is found between the digits 4 and 6 This is also done for other whitespace characters as tab carriage return line feed and form feed D The number of triggers and their length are limited as follows e The length of a trigger sequence is limited to 512 characters e The possible number of trigger sequence is calculated using the following form
296. t can be controlled by this option whether feedback responses are send to the host system or not Default enabled e Send stop code to host after writing lt n gt sec Define the time in seconds after which a stop code ist send to the host This applies if a write access to the printer is not successfully completed within this time Some hosts require responses within a specific time If for some reason the printer goes offline or is turned off this might lead to problems with bi directional communication Set to O to turn off this option FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 134 Default O off D The effective time depends on the write timeout set at the output port I e if at the output port a write timeout is set to 10 sec and here 15 sec are used the second timeout after 20 sec will send the stop code This is because the first timeout after 10 sec is still in valid range of 15 sec 6 3 17 XES to PCL5 6 3 17 1 Overview The XES emulation from FORMS4WORK converts print data that were created in the XES programming language of Xerox so that they can be output on PCL5 compatible page printers 6 3 17 2 XES Commands 6 3 17 2 1 Supported commands Syntax lt ESC gt A comment lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt aX Y lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt b lt ESC gt B comment lt CR gt lt LF gt font list lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt B comment lt CR gt lt LF gt form FRM list lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ESC gt cn
297. t of resources like fonts images forms etc Resource Path Specifies the directory which contains the resources Also dynamically loaded resources are saved in this directory Resource Script Filename Specifies the name of the resource script files These files contains information about resources and must reside in the given resource path Global Contains the standard resource entries Target Contains the dynamically via data stream loaded resource entries Run emulation in static mode This controls whether the emulation is unloaded between the incoming print jobs dynamic mode or not If not static mode the emulation remains loaded for the entire life time of the print processes d This affects the behavior of downloading resources since resource script files are read and interpreted at loading time initialization of the emulation 6 3 18 2 5 Messages The emulation uses 4 types of messages Errors Warnings Messages Trace Messages which correspond to the log messages Errors Warnings Info Debug Info of the FORMS4WORK Client Please see also chapter Log Level D Due to the fact that the emulation uses the log mechanism of the FORMS4WORK Client the corresponding log message must be enabled in the Log Level Tab of the print process in order to enable a message type of the emulation FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 159 In addition every message type has a verbose level and a category to allow more flexib
298. tacode to PCL5 emulation as input data format Likewise PCL5 to X Metacode emulation produces this format as output data format There are no configuration options required for this format length info p A y record length _ nN i i Y record LSB Least significant byte MSB Most significant byte PCC Printer carriage control 1 byte D The record length 2 bytes contains the complete length of the record in bytes including the length of record length itself e g lt 03 gt lt 00 gt lt 0B gt In this case the record contains no user data only the length info and a PCC byte lt 0B gt The PCC byte is one of the following IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control codes FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 192 Code Function Code Function hex hex 01 Write no automatic space 0B Space 1 line immediately 09 Write and space 1 line after printing 13 Space 2 lines immediately 11 Write and space 2 lines after printing 19 Write and space 3 lines after printing 89 Write and skip to channel 1 after printing 91 Write and skip to channel 2 after printing 99 Write and skip to channel 3 after printing Ai Write and skip to channel 4 after printing Skip to channel 5 immediately AQ Write and skip to channel 5 after printing Skip to channel 6 immediately 18 Space 3 lines immediately 8B 93 9B A3 AB B3 Bi Write and skip to channel 6 after printing BB Skip to channel 7 immediately C3 cB D3 DB E3 03 Skip
299. te Time Kept e Converted shows number of converted pages e Printed shows number of printed pages e Size shows size of print job e Created shows when print job has been created Job management for spooled jobs is available after selection via the context menu or the job menu It is FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 22 5 3 2 2 2 possible to pause the printing of a job to continue printing to abort or re start the print job Detailed information for a selected job are shown in the job properties frame on the right hand side Active Jobs For every item in the Active Jobs list the following information is available e Name shows job name The name is extracted from the job itself or automatically created by FORMS4WORK e Status shows job status Possible entries are Deleting Error Canceled Printed Printing Byte Held Spooled Connecting Emulating Receiving Those entries can be added by Paused Delayed Delayed until Date Time Kept e Converted shows number of converted pages e Printed shows number of printed pages e Size shows size of print job e Created shows when print job has been created Job management for spooled jobs is available after selection via the context menu or the job menu It is possible to pause the printing of a job to continue printing to abort or re start the print job Detailed information for a selected job are shown in the job properties frame on the rig
300. te PCL number depending on the mapping Default 0 e Default Cassette Define the standard paper input tray The XES tray number is given in other words this number is converted to the appropriate PCL number depending on the mapping Default 1 6 3 17 3 6 Performance Data Processing e Max block size for reading Define the maximum size in kilobytes which the emulation shall attempt to read at the Input port by means of one read access If there are fewer data there only so many bytes are read as actually exist If there are already more data there the maximum number of data that will be read corresponds to this value and the remaining data are not read until the next read process D Frequent read access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB e Block size for output buffering Define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted The data processed by the emulation are passed to the output port To reduce the number of write access attempts at the output port a value can be entered here to define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted To turn off buffering set the value to 0 D Frequent write access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB Timing e Delay before next try on read error Define the delay before next try on read error If a problem
301. te printer offline 95 Smoothing 93 Stack Output with offset 87 SVI Threshold 93 Tray 86 Tray Alignment 86 Trigger 96 Unit 86 91 Whole Page Offsets 86 Width 91 IPDS to PDF 78 Job 21 22 23 Advanced Reprint 23 Cancel 22 Converted 21 Created 21 Delete 22 Keep 22 List 21 Name 21 Pause 22 Printed 21 Properties 22 Reprint 23 Size 21 Status 21 Undo keep 22 Undo pause 22 Job Copier Filter 186 Configuration 186 Job End Detection 62 Job list 21 Active Jobs 22 Printed Jobs 22 Job Management 62 96 Job Menu 25 Cancel 25 Delete 25 Keep 25 Pause 25 Print 25 Printed 25 Job monitoring 21 215 Job Name 96 Job Notification 215 Job separation 87 96 231 Job Separator Filter 187 Banner Pages 188 Configuration 187 188 189 Job Separation 187 Miscellaneous 189 Job timeout 31 Keep job 22 25 L Load Balancing 214 Local address 223 Logevent 18 23 Loglevels 18 Logging 18 23 Loggingin 12 13 14 24 Logical Printers 12 19 21 Add 19 Data conversion 19 Description 19 Edit 19 Input filter 19 Inputinterface 19 Output filter 19 Output interface 19 Properties 19 Remove 19 Setup and configuration 19 Testing 21 Theory 11 LPD Input 40 LPR Port 224 Print banner page 224 Queue 224 Send control file before data 224 Set job name as title 224 Timeout 224 MAC Address 47 48 Menus 24 25 26 27 File Menu 24 Help Menu 27 Job Menu 25 Setup Menu 26 Novell Port 41 NT La
302. tead of a line feed command to leave the bottom of the form BS 2000 Available only when BS2000 is used e Channel 12 Conversion to FF This check box allows to control a special feature designed for the Siemens printer emulations SNI 3338 39 SNI 3348 and SNI 3365 SNI2050 The print spooler of OS2000 uses Channel 12 of a Forms Control Buffer FCB as the bottom of a form generally Page turnings between header trailer pages and the print jobs will be performed by the channel commands x E3 Skip to channel 12 immediate followed by the command x 09 Write and space 1 line where the print line contains 1 single space character Enable to make FORMS4WORK convert the described command sequence into a single form feed command in the output data stream Otherwise depending on the actual line counter FORMS4WORK will perform the appropriate number of line feeds to arrive bottom of form before the top of the next page will be arrived with the subsequent write command Default disabled Bold Printing This section includes different converter functions to emphasize text during printing Impact printers like those emulated by FORMS4WORK can emphasize text by over printing the same line several times only Depending on the technology this method would not provide the same results on a laser printer To get the same effect on laser printers this text must be printed a second time slightly horizontally shifted or using a bold font instead The th
303. tem changes the IPDS media destination ID Default disabled e Split at intput tray change If enabled a new print job is generated whenever the IPDS input media source changes either after a SIMS command or upon an LCC order Use this feature if you have a PCL printer that cannot switch input paper trays within a single print job Default disabled 240 dpi IM1 Images Certain raster graphics as defined in the IPDS IM tower are sent by the host system without information about the required printing resolution dpi To print these graphics correctly IPDS to PCL5 emulation assumes 240 or 300 dpi depending on the configured printer model Some host systems are sending IM graphics instead of IOCA graphics which do not include information about resolution These IM graphics do ignore the printers resolution i e an AFP resource has been attached inline to print job data Such graphics and if necessary their positioning can be corrected using the options Enlarge Image and Stretch Position FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 99 d Raster graphics as defined in the IOCA tower will always contain information about their resolution The IPDS to PCL5 emulation is scaling these graphics so that the problem described above will not occur e Enlarge Image Enable to enlarge image Default disabled e Stretch position Enable to stretch position Default disabled Transparent Data Only Select an entry from the p
304. ter the specified number of hours Default 720 D Files may be deleted earlier if the specified maximum number of files is reached Add job name to captured filename Enable if you want the job name to be added to the captured filename The job name will be added in parenthesis to the captured filename Default enabled FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 218 6 6 2 7 Spooling Spooling is recommended if print jobs shall be re printed Input jobs are stored on the hard disk FORMS4WORK Server then automatically takes care of the output of the print jobs spooled on the hard disk Spooled jobs may manually be re printed later If this setting is not active no spooling takes place A job is printed directly without being buffered The sender will be blocked until the data have been output in full D If Spooling is enabled Page Notification is not possible and will be disabled Active Set to Active to spool input jobs i e to buffer these jobs on the hard disk Default not active Spool directory Define directory where the integrated spooler shall save the print jobs and the corresponding job information D This directory must be placed on a drive with sufficient capacity for storage Retry after lt x gt sec if busy Set interval when to retry to output again on a currently busy printer The output of a spooled print job is delayed by this time After this time a fresh attempt is made to output the data on the devi
305. terion will be highlighted Several criteria can be combined Possible criteria are Job boundary Page boundary Simplex duplex change Input tray change Output tray change Paper size media change Job separation command lt ESC gt amp liT Default disabled no criteria highlighted Include all resources in each split Enable to include all required resources within each split It is not recommended to disable this flag Default enabled Split port Select split port from the pull down menu Possible ports are e Input e Output Default Input every lt x gt page s FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 110 Enter number of pages after which a split shall be made This option is only available if Job split criterion Page boundary is selected Default every 1 page PDF output generation Compression Level Set compression level for PDF output The higher the compression level the less the size of the PDF output Levels range from 1 to 9 with 9 as the maximum compression Default OFF PDF output generation Image mask method Set image mask method This setting is used to achieve compatibility of certain color images in combination with some printer s PDF implementation The image type in question uses color palettes in combination with a transparent color value Possible values are e By Color Index Set to transfer the color image with a modified color palette without an extra transparency mask
306. ters which are equipped with exchangeable print bands The IBM 3825 is an IPDS printer When using this emulation the channel card makes a normal printer restart after the start of the channel driver The IPDS Bridge works with the IBM 3825 driver but makes no normal printer restart after the start of the channel driver The printer SNI 2050 2075 3365 are cut sheet laser printing systems which are able to print simplex duplex from several paper trays and to stack the paper into different output trays Besides those printers are able to use different fonts forms and overlays when the required resources are stored on the printers hard disk drive before Channel Address Enter channel address in hexadecimal code The channel address identifies the byte address of the emulated printer which is used with channel protocol Default AE hex for device 1 AF hex for device 2 Strip channel commands Enable to strip channel commands This switch controls whether PCC bytes PCC Printer Control Character i e control commands for line feed and form feed are passed to the emulation by the Channel Input or not The Channel Emulation and the X Metacode to PCL emulation are in need of these PCC Bytes the IPDS to PCL emulation does not know about them because line feeds and form feeds are already present in the IPDS data Default enabled FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 37 6 2 5 6 2 5 1 System Device The selection of a
307. the Events Window These messages are displayed in black This information is more detailed than the basic information default enabled e Debug information for troubleshooting Enable to log debug information for troubleshooting Use only for program diagnostics It is displayed in gray default disabled D Depending on how many options you select the volume of outputs of a log file and in the Events Window will increase or fall The use of debug information drastically reduces the processing speed of print jobs and may even lead to rejection of print jobs FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 19 5 3 2 1 3 Logical Printers Logical Printers allow print jobs that arrive at input port interfaces to be distributed to certain emulations and output port interfaces All defined Logical Printers are listed in the Logical Printers list in the main window of the FORMS4WORK client The Logical Printers list contains all defined Logical Printers In the simplest case the Logical Printer list contains a single Logical Printer which assigns all print jobs from one input interface to one emulation for data conversion and one output to print the data Edit logical printer To edit the Logical Printer double click a selected row in the list or click the Edit Logical Printer button allows Add Logical Printer Click Add Logical Printer button or select Add Logical Printer from the Setup menu to add a Logical Printer a new row
308. the default filename needs to be configured to lt Drive gt lt Directory Path gt lt jobid gt lt Extention gt where lt Drive gt lt Directory Path gt and lt Extention gt needs to be replaced with appropriate values as for example D Output lt jobid gt prn The filename must be set to lt jobid gt Recognized data fields are buffered until a record entity is recognized as complete If a data field is recognized more than once before completion of a record entity the newer value always overwrites the past As soon as a record entity is complete all data of this record is written to an DOCUMENTS4WORK import file is will be created in the same directory as the output file The filename used is the job id and therefor the same as the filename of the print job Configuration is done by defining e General Options e Data Fields FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 185 General Folder Enter the name of map title to be used for DOCUMENTS4WORK import Charset Select the charset used in the print job data You may select either ASCIT or ANSI Date Format is used to re format data fields marked as date Any date recognized is changed in its format according to the settings made here Order This defines the order of the dates parts Y stands for year M for month and D for day German date format e g are DMY as english formats are using the MDY order Separator This defines the separator character used to div
309. the host that is added by the IPDS interpreter to the printout on a fix and defined position IPDS Overlay An overlay generated on the host that is added by the IPDS interpreter with a variable or a fix offset to the printout These overlays can be requested from the host using on the IPDS commands Include Overlay or Load Copy Control The latter is often referred to as LCC or Copy Group overlays respectively Overlay Resource Overlays that are added to the print data stream not directly controlled by the host but dependent on the rules defined in the file IPDSOVER INI These overlays emerge from the output files of the Resources Printer Driver Overlay Resources are files mostly with the extension CSP that are generated by the Resources Printer Driver when printing a Windows document The Resources Printer Driver behaves similarly to a standard Windows printer driver in the Print to file mode The files generated by the driver contain a copy of the printed page as a PCL bitmap image with a resolution of 300 dpi and a file header that includes additional information on the resource name and its position and orientation on the printed page The file IPDSOVER INI contains the commands and definitions for the sequential control of the IPDS Overlay Supplements This is an ASCII text file and can be edited using any Windows text editor such as NOTEPAD EXE On the FORMS4WORK system any IPDS to PCL5 emulation in a print process ca
310. tial job contains only pages of one type e The input data stream contains one constant character sequence followed by a specified number of variable characters or digits as e g customer IDs Using the Job Separator filter the original job may be divided into several jobs where each partial job contains only pages for one customer Job Separation The Job Separator filter is suing two different methods for dividing jobs Each method requires a definition of one or more trigger sequences Select the required method then define the trigger sequences Method Scan for set of constant triggers This method is used to divide PCL print jobs by constant character sequences that are used to classify pages Each trigger sequence is used as a criterion to be searched on each page If found the page is assigned to a partial job containing only pages of this type If more than one trigger sequence is present the first to be found is significant If no trigger sequence is present the page is classified as unassigned Scan for one trigger followed by variable data This method is used to divide PCL print jobs by variable character or digit sequences present on each page There is only one trigger sequence to be defined which preceds the variable part This trigger is part of the final criterion as also the specified number of characters or digits E g a trigger sequences of DOC with a significant data length of 3 automatically generates criteria like
311. tion 166 components Barcode Filter In the PCL Scanner Configuration you have to define a name for the barcode definition Field Name This name has to be redifined later in the Barcode Definition Editor so that the Field Scanner data can be properly assigned to the correct barcode definition Additionally in the PCL Scanner Configuration you have to define a Trigger Sequence in our example the text Kd Nr This text is searched in the input data stream When this trigger sequence is detected the next text data after offset characters with the length of Length characters is reported to the Barcode Filter This text in our example the number 106047 will be printed as a barcode The record entity defined in the PCL Scanner Configuration has to be 1 Page That means the barcode is printed on every page where the according trigger sequence is detected For a detailed description how to set up the FORMS4WORK Field Scanner Filter please see the according section int the FORMS4WORK help file FORMS4WORK Barcode Filter configuration After configuring the FORMS4WORK Field Scanner Filter you have to redefine the Field name in the Barcode Definition Editor as Definition Name In this main dialog of the Barcode Filter configuration you have to select the Barcode Type and the Code Source via Drop down lists In our example we choose to print the text as a 2D Datamatrix barcode The code in our case the number 106047 is captured directly from
312. to channel 1 immediately Skip to channel 2 immediately Skip to channel 3 immediately Skip to channel 4 immediately B9 Write and skip to channel 7 after printing Skip to channel 8 immediately Ci Write and skip to channel 8 after printing Skip to channel 9 immediately C9 Write and skip to channel 9 after printing Skip to channel 10 immediately Di Write and skip to channel 10 after printing Skip to channel 11 immediately D9 Write and skip to channel 11 after printing Skip to channel 12 immediately E1 Write and skip to channel 12 after printing No operation A record with a write type control character immediately preceded by a record with the Write no automatic space control character is processed according to the option selected for overprint handling IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control codes Additionally we enhanced the IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control codes in order to support channel commands in the range of O 15 for online jobs The X Metacode to PCL5 emulation supports also following additional codes Code Function Code Function hex hex 81 Write and skip to channel 0 after printing 83 Skip to channel O immediately E9 Write and skip to channel 13 after printing EB Skip to channel 13 immediately Fi Write and skip to channel 14 after printing F3 Skip to channel 14 immediately FQ Write and skip to channel 15 after printing FB Skip to channel 15 immediately enhanced IBM 1403 IBM 3211 machine control codes BARR
313. tport gt Destination port as queue name from LPD protocol lt destaddress gt Specific device if defined in Logical Printer lt jobid gt Job ID lt creationtime gt Start time of job lt starttime gt Emulation time of job This field also supports user defined variables acquired using the Field Scanner filter D The Field Scanner filter must be part of the license to be used Miscellaneous This page contains some global options concerning the Job Separator filter Scan PJL data for trigger If this option is set the PJL data part of the print job is also scanned for trigger sequences Add job id to names of job files When this option is set the ID of the incoming print job is added to the names of the partial print jobs to be created The complete file name is built as lt Prefix gt lt Job ID gt lt Trigger sequence gt lt Prefix gt is an optional string of up to 8 characters lt Job ID gt is the job ID of the incoming print job lt Trigger sequence gt is either a constant trigger as defined or the combination of trigger sequence and variable part D If a second job is processed after another this avoids overwriting created partial job files As a result the name is different because of the different job id If this option is not set the names will be the same and newer created jobs will overwrite previously created jobs Add job information data to job files If sending print jobs to a FORMS4WORK input port add
314. tream contains special characters such as umlauts e g If a certain character string is found in the data stream for instance English a Stringchange is triggered to replace the umlauts with other character strings e g ae Configuration The Conditional Stringchange filter requires four pieces of information to replace or remove a character or a character string e Character or character string Trigger that causes one or more Stringchanges e Character or a character string to be replaced Search for e Character or a character string which is to replace the source Replace with or empty if the source is to be removed e Consideration to low or high case letters If Data contains Shows a list of all the defined strings that will trigger a Stringchange Add Add and define one or more new triggers see Definition of a trigger Edit Edit the highlighted trigger s see Definition of a trigger Remove Remove the highlighted trigger s see Definition of a trigger Ignore Case Enable to ignore case of string This allows to define whether the replacement is to be completed taking case into account in other words whether abc and Abc or just abc is to be replaced The setting applies for all replacements FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 171 6 4 4 3 Default disabled Search for Shows a list of all the defined source character strings for replacements in other words which ch
315. trol file which contains information about the job such as job name job size etc is sent to the remote printer server before job data Default On Filesize O supported The printer needs not to be informed about the size of the job The printing may start even if the total size of the job is not known yet Default On Override filesize The printer has to be informed about the size of the job before the data is sent If the total size is not known at the beginning because the host is still sending data some printers accept a filesize of 0 If your printer does not accept a filesize of 0 but you don t want to spool the complete job before printing it you can try to enable this option If enabled a filesize of about 2 GB is assumed Some printers will accept this even if the final job size will be smaller FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 225 Default Off Filesize needed The printer has to be informed about the size of the job before the data is sent The printing will not start before the total size of the job is known Default Off 6 6 9 Fiery 6 6 9 1 Fiery Output see Fiery Properties Index 227 Index A Access levels 13 Accounting 17 Active Jobs 22 Adapter 47 48 Add Logical Printer 19 Address 15 Administrator 16 Advanced Reprint 23 Alternative Devices 214 AOS Trigger 87 B Backup configuration 26 Banner page 224 Barcode Filter 161 Barcode Filter and Field Scanner Barcode SIMM
316. ts of the printing system which is really connected to FORMS4WORK the data codes can pass FORMS4WORK in a transparent way or can be converted to ASCII e No Translation Select No Translation for a code conversion table where the default settings keep all codes untouched If necessary modify the translation table using the button Edit e EBCDIC to ASCII FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 57 6 3 6 2 4 Select EBCDIC to ASCII to convert all received data codes to ASCII If necessary modify the translation table using the button Edit Control Codes Control Codes hexadecimal This group includes the settings of the control codes form feed FF carriage return CR and line feed CR LF Here you can specify the hexadecimal codes being used by FORMS4WORK in the output data stream to perform the paper advance of the connected printer e FF Control Code Enter the corresponding control code Default OC e CR Control Code Enter the corresponding control code Default OD e CR LF Control Code Enter the corresponding control code Default OA e Ignore Space Enter the space characters that shall be ignored When this switch is activated by defining the hexadecimal code of the space character used by the host FORMS4WORK will reduce the resulting output data stream by those space characters where the content of the whole print line consists only of this single space character Default empty none Lines Per In
317. ttempted The data processed by the emulation are passed to the output port To reduce the number of write access attempts at the output port a value can be entered here to define the minimum number of kilobytes which must exist for output before a write access is attempted To turn off buffering set the value to 0 d Frequent write access attempts with few data will reduce the system performance Default 32 KB Timing e Delay before next try on read error Define the delay before next try on read error If a problem occurs at the input port during reading the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next read attempt This prevents a slow input port slowing down the system by frequently repeated read attempts Default 1000 msec e Delay before next try on write error Define the delay before next try on write error If a problem occurs at the output port during writing the data the emulation waits for the number of milliseconds set here before its next write attempt This prevents a slow output port slowing down the system by frequently repeated write attempts Default 10 msec e Timeout for shutdown Define the time in milliseconds which the Print process shall wait for completion of the emulation thread If the set time has elapsed before the emulation thread has been terminated correctly by itself it will be terminated by the Print process D Ensure that you set an adequate time to allo
318. uires a numeric argument between 0 and 255 The condition MEDIASOURCE will become true if the host sends for the corresponding sheet a control command for the paper feed with the corresponding number D Dependent on the host the default tray is in most cases either tray one or tray two According to the printer model set in the IPDS emulation only a limited number of paper feed trays can be used By defining the assignment the IPDS interpreter enables the use of several logical paper feed trays that chose the same real paper feed tray In combination with MEDIASOURCE it is possible to create virtual form paper feed Example MEDIASOURCE 2 pastes the overlay when paper from slot 2 shall be used MEDIADESTINATION MEDIADESTINATION requires a numeric argument between 0 and 255 The condition MEDIADESTINATION will become true if the host sends for the corresponding sheet a control command for the paper output tray with the corresponding number D Dependent on the host the default tray is in most cases either tray one or tray two According to the printer model set in the IPDS emulation only a limited number of paper output trays can be used By defining the assignment the IPDS interpreter enables the use of several logical paper output trays that chose the same real paper output tray In combination with MEDIASOURCE it is possible to create virtual form output trays Example MEDIADESTINATION 2 pastes the overlay when paper shall be
319. ula Total of lengths of all trigger number of trigger 1 lt 32767 Banner Pages Each partial job created by the Job Separator filter may be optionally enclosed with banner and or trailer pages Add banner page If this option is set a banner page is added to each partial print job created by the Job Separator filter Add trailer page If this option is set a trailer page is added to each partial print job created by the Job Separator filter Paper tray FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 189 6 4 7 4 Here the paper tray is defined where the paper is drawn for the banner and trailer pages The paper tray for banner pages may be set to a different tray as for trailer pages Orientation Here the orientation of the banner and trailer pages is defined The orientation for banner pages may be set to different as for trailer pages User defined banner text This is an optional field for adding user specified text to the banner and trailer pages Any text entered here will be printed to each banner and each trailer page Additionally variables can be used within this field When typing in the arbitrary text variables are enclosed with lt and gt as lt myvariable gt Predefined variables are lt jobname gt Name of the job lt jobnamenoext gt Name of the job if filename without file extension lt srcaddress gt Address of senders as IP address or Novell queue name lt username gt Name of user lt des
320. ulations The resulting data stream may be used for further processing and consists of pure printable data which may contain ASCII control codes like lt CR gt lt LF gt or lt FF gt depends on configuration of the filter FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 204 6 4 10 2 Configuration The default settings of the Textextractor filter are set to generate a ASCII formatted output that will represent approximately the printable page layout of the origin PCL data stream 6 4 10 2 1 Optimize Extract also text within macros When active the printable data within a PCL macro will be inserted to the output at each macro execute or call Detect simulated bold printing and remove multiple characters words Some applications might print the same text elements twice or more at slightly the same X position in order to simulate bold printing on a laser printer e g lt ESC gt 8 f0SBolded text lt ESC gt amp f1S lt ESC gt amp a 3HBolded text Such a sequence would result into printable output like Bolded textBolded text To avoid these multiple text strings activate the detect bold option Sort lines in ascending Y order The printable data will be send to the output in dependance of the Y position of the text element from top of page to bottom of page Otherwise the text elements are given out at the scope they are encountered Combine lines within threshhold When active all text elements on a Y position threshhold in 1 300 I
321. ull down menu In IPDS data streams the command Alternate Offset Stacker AOS can be used to place printed pages with an offset in the printer s output bin The JOG OUTPUT command can be inserted to the FORMDEF file on the host system to add the AOS command to IPDS data This way it is possible to separate different print jobs Other settings in Job Management as Group Boundary detection can be used too The IPDS to PCL5 emulation supports adding of necessary PCL or PJL commands for specific printer types In Job separation and finisher commands can be configured which commands should be sent to the printer Possible commands are e PCL Job Separation results in a PCL command for job separation The sequence ESC8liT will be sent to the printer This is applicable for printers which do not support PJL e PCL Reset results in a PCL reset command i e the sequence ESC E Fonts and macros sent to the PCL printer before will still be available as they are set to permanent after loading to the printer This is also applicable for printers which do not support PJL e PJL Standard will send a sequence of PCL Universal Exit Language PJL Job End Enter Language PCL and PCL Reset to the printer This is useful for printers which automatically select their emulation between Postscript PCL and other printer languages Sending this sequence will assure a proper start of the PCL interpreter of the printer default Xerox Nxx Serie
322. ull down menu This option will extract text data from the IPDS Write Text Transparent Data command using different methods IPDS data is used here as an encapsulation for other type of data which will be processed by an other emulation behind IPDS to PCL5 if necessary e off default Select to not affect the IPDS to PCL5 emulation e data only Select to let the IPDS to PCL5 emulation not generate printer commands but print text data extracted from IPDS Write Text Transparent Data command without any conversation instead e data LF Like data only but each block of data will have a line feed Hex Ox0A attached e valid channel order data LF Like data LF but data blocks will get printed only if the first byte is a valid ANSI channel command 0x40 OxFO 0x60 0x4E OxF1 OxF2 OxF3 OxF4 OxF5 OxF6 OxF7 OxF8 OxF9 OxC1 OxC2 OxC3 Space 1 line before printing Space 2 lines before printing Space 3 lines before printing Suppress Space before printing Skip to Skip to Skip to Skip to Skip to Skip to Skip to Skip to Skip to Skip to Skip to Skip to Default off channel 1 and print channel 2 and print channel 3 and print channel 4 and print channel 5 and print channel 6 and print channel 7 and print channel 8 and print channel 9 and print channel 10 and print channel 11 and print channel 12 and print FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 100 Enlarge GOCA raster images
323. unt is known Please note that the page counting of a raw emulation must be activated in the configuration Jobs with unknown page count will be sent to the default device D If the FORMS4WORK license does not include Clustering only the Use if error occurred method is FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 215 6 6 2 4 available Add Click here to add an alternative device to the list Edit Click here to edit an alternative device Delete Click here to delete the selected alternative device from the list Move up Click here to move the selected alternative device to a position above This will increase its priority of usage If using the Page count method the position is not relevant Move down Click here to move the selected alternative device to a position below This will decrease its priority of usage If using the Page count method the position is not relevant Redirect after x min if busy If a connect to a device fails it will be retried within the given amount of time If a connect was not successful after this time the job will be reprinted using the next alternative device Default 0 0 off Redirect complete job missing pages after x min if no print activity If no progress of the print job is detected within the given amount of time the job will be canceled and be reprinted using the next alternative device It is recommended that Job Monitoring is enabled A job may only be reprint
324. urce when the backside of a duplex sheet is reached SIDE BACK checks for a logical condition The sheet was marked from the host as duplex and the back of the sheet will be edited If the host marks the page as simplex the condition cannot become true because there is no back of the sheet in the print job In this case use SIDE SIMPLEXBACK Example SIDE BACK SIMPLEXBACK FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 106 Pastes an additional printed page that contains the chosen overlay resource to the output data stream after a simplex printed page on the same sheet The corresponding ID number must be marked in the definition as ADDBACKSIDE If there is more than one overlay to be included on one page the RULE with SIMPLEXBACK has to be the last one in the sequence of rules because SIMPLEXBACK will cause a form feed in the print data stream output Example SIDE SIMPLEXBACK FORMNAME Requires an alphanumeric argument If the host sends an IPDS Group Boundary command in the data stream that contains a FORMS parameter this keyword can be used to check for the forms name sent with FORMS FORMNAME requires a PSF on the host that supports Group Boundary FORMNAME is case sensitive D FORMNAME CSPSTRING and FINDSTRING may not used together in one and the same rule Example FORMNAME sTD pastes the overlay if the form name is set to default in the AS 400 print job properties The default form name on the host can be linked to
325. using PCL5 printers as with Xerox printers e Visible window short edge offset FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 138 Define a value to move the image area downwards in portrait format in steps of 1 100 inch Default 0 00 inch e Visible window long edge offset Define a value to move the image area to the right in portrait format in steps of 1 100 inch Default 0 00 inch e Vector short edge offset Define a value to move the print area downwards in portrait format in steps of 1 100 inch Default 0 00 inch e Vector long edge offset Define a value to move the print area to the right in portrait format in steps of 1 100 inch Default 0 00 inch D Please ensure that the parameters have been allocated to portrait format and the relevant edges in portrait format do not change The long edge in portrait format remains the long edge even in landscape format Scaling In some cases it is not sufficient to simply move the print area The best solution in these cases is to adjust the XES form to the printable area of the PCL5 printer by means of scaling Scaling e Scaling short edge Define the percentage reduction in the horizontal direction in portrait format and the vertical direction in landscape format e Scaling long edge Define the percentage reduction in the vertical direction in portrait format and the horizontal direction in landscape format If you wish to output a document in portrait format the parameter Sca
326. using the PJL job command With Xerox Nxx and DSC finisher Full Page mode will be activated in addition e User Defined supports definition of an arbitrary byte sequence Characters that cannot be entered FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 88 using the keyboard are specified with a preceding character and a two character hexadecimal code E g to enter the ASCII character lt ESC gt type ib The character itself is entered as In addition the job name can be added to this sequence by using the place holder s Example To send the PCL Universal Exit Language Sequence lt ESC gt 12345xX the input should be 1b 12345x The previously shown PJL sequence can be extended by additional PJL commands i g PJL SET EDGETOEDGE 0N 0D 0A to turn on Full Page mode as long as they are supported by the printer Default PJL Standard Media Type Hole Puncher Stack Output with offset These are additional job finishing and processing options Select as necessary Depending on the options installed with the printer some of these features may not be supported by the printer Default Off Face down printing Select Face up or Face down printing Default Face up Page order Select Page 1 n to print the job from the first to the last page Select Page n 1 to print the job from the last to the first page Default Page n 1 Misc PCL Features e Send IPDS variable spaces as PCL positioning command Disa
327. ut Interface e Condition of usage e Emulation e Output Interface Input Interface The required input interface for the print job is to be selected here The list contains all the existing defined by the user Condition of usage In keeping with the selected condition the required criterion is to be selected or entered here Emulation The required emulation for the print job is to be selected here The list contains all the existing defined by the user Output Interface The required output interface for the print job is to be selected here The list contains all the existing defined by the user Destination Device Default device as configured in output port No specific destination address is to be defined instead the default destination defined in the output is to be used e Device as delivered by protocol Some input protocols supply a destination address in the data stream at which the data are to be output If for example data are received using the LPD LPR protocol the data stream contains the name of the destination printer If this is the actual name of the destination printer it may be used The destination device at which the print job is finally output is therefore not decided until the system is running If the destination address supplied by the protocol is a virtual output device that does not really exist this option should not be selected In this case by selecting Default device as configured in output p
328. ut tray N UP a logical page corresponds to a sheet The sheet counter makes it easier to find the correct place for an overlay in mixed print jobs This is done by counting the printed sheets after a test print Counting and duplex printing When printing duplex double sided a sheet contains 2 N logical pages with N being the number of combined pages on one sheet normally 1 The IPDS Overlay Supplement can distinguish between front and back pages Tumble and Calendar duplex or long edge and short edge binding respectively will be treated equally Counting and N UP printing In the N UP printer mode of the IPDS combination output tray the host prints several pages on one sheet i e when doing 3 UP printing 3 logical pages per front and back page Empty parts of pages are also counted The Overlay Supplement only counts the actually printed sheets not the IPDS pages Resetting the sheet counter The internal sheet counter starts with 1 and will be reset at the beginning of a new print job or with a RULE and RESETCOUNTER Definitions assign an ID number to a resource In most cases the resource can be used under this ID number For a better overview it is suggested to put the definitions at the top of the IPDSOVER INI Definitions must start with the keyword DEFINE and may contain two or more combinations of keywords and arguments The keyword s ID and FILENAME must be contained in a definition too ID ID requi
329. utomatic Further XES job commands e g lt ESC gt X generate no PCL job commands e g lt ESC gt E or lt ESC gt 12345X This method can increase printing speed of some PCL printers with optional output trays finisher Shift Logical Page If this option has been activated the emulation automatically moves the visible window if a position has been occupied outside the window limits A manual adjustment of the parameters and is not necessary in this case D Some printer types from various manufacturers may create an undesirable print image if this parameter has been activated Fonts Compress PCL Bitmap Fonts The PCL bitmap fonts are sent to the printer in a compressed format This may be useful if the font resources are to be stored externally on the printer and the memory there is limited for example with a 2MByte flash DIMM Print Font List with Example A specimen text is printed in the appropriate font on the font status page XES command lt ESC gt cspstat lt CR gt lt LF gt Exclude Font ID s This allows individual definition of intervals of PCL font ID s that should not be used by the emulation With the default setting the emulation starts for PCL fonts by the assignment of the ID 0 and continues in ascending order to 32767 If for example 30 100 and 450 500 is defined here the emulation no longer uses fonts with ID s 30 100 and 450 500 Macros FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 153 6 3 18 6 3 1
330. w the emulation thread to terminate by itself The set value should not generally be changed Default 5000 msec Bidirectional Communication e Produce ACK NAK responses Enable to produce ACK NAK responses FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 65 6 3 7 6 3 7 1 When processing print jobs which are received through a Channel Input Port and when processing IPDS print jobs usually it is necessary to send feedback responses to the host system In other situations these responses might not be applicable For highest flexibility it can be controlled by this option whether feedback responses are send to the host system or not Default enabled e Send stop code to host after writing lt n gt sec Define the time in seconds after which a stop code ist send to the host This applies if a write access to the printer is not successfully completed within this time Some hosts require responses within a specific time If for some reason the printer goes offline or is turned off this might lead to problems with bi directional communication Set to O to turn off this option Default O off D The effective time depends on the write timeout set at the output port I e if at the output port a write timeout is set to 10 sec and here 15 sec are used the second timeout after 20 sec will send the stop code This is because the first timeout after 10 sec is still in valid range of 15 sec Jobs e Split Job after lt n gt pages Enter the page
331. whenever a error message usually red occur during processing the job NOTE Any data after a error condition will be discarded D The operator must abort the failing job at the host and restart the printprocess STOP START on the FORMS4WORK server before any new job is released at the host Split jobs Activates job splitting There are multiple split criterias which may be combined Report boundary Splits jobs on given report boundaries e g BANNER or RSTACK criteria Page boundary Splits jobs on every given page count ROFFSET detection Splits jobs at page boundary whenever a ROFFSET criteria will be true Collated copy change Splits jobs at page boundary whenever the copy count changes within collated mode Finishing change Splits jobs at page boundary whenever the finishing device changes OTEXT WAIT Splits jobs at page boundary whenever a DJDE OTEXT WAIT command is encountered Trigger string Splits jobs at page boundary whenever the given trigger string matches within the job data Include resources in each split When activated all necessary resources are included in each part of the splitted jobs It is not recommended to deactivate this option Split port Output The jobs will be splitted at the output port i e the printer receives multiple smaller jobs but on the FORMS4WORK server only one job will be shown Input The jobs will be splitted at the input port i e the printer receives multiple
332. will be sent Tip With Kentek K40 printers Full Page mode can be activated using ID 1026 for A4 sized paper FORMS4WORK Manual Configuration 92 Std Input Tray Duplex Input Tray Adjust input tray mapping to printer The host system that sends IPDS data can request the printer with a SIMS command to select its paper source from various trays The numbers of the trays are mapped to the corresponding trays of the PCL printer Since however there are various designs of PCL printers this gives you an opportunity to tailor this image to your specific printer There are two trays you can have the paper pulled from Standard input tray selects the paper tray for simplex jobs and simplex pages in mixed plex jobs Duplex input tray selects the tray for duplex pages This is useful if your printer pulls in paper in different positions for simplex and duplex e g simplex has to be face down and duplex face up The Automatic ID 0 tray selection discards the tray number information from the output and lets the printer choose the paper tray depending solely on the paper size information Default IPDS tray 0 maps to printer tray 1 IPDS tray 1 maps to printer tray 2 and so on Rotate Define the rotation of all pages sent to the selected paper tray This might be useful if the printer allows feeding of large paper formats in one orientation only Possible settings are e 90 e 180 e 270 Default 0 no rotat
333. window e Start Logical Printers Clicking this button starts the printing process The Job List window appears You can not add or remove a logical printer e Stop Logical Printers When enabled the Stop Logical Printers icon shows red Click the button to stop the printing process e Edit Logical Printer With a printer name highlighted click this button to access the Edit Logical Printer window where you can edit properties for each of the characteristics of the printer e Add Logical Printer Click this button to add a new logical printer e Remove Logical Printer With a printer name highlighted click this button to remove the printer The Events Window The lower part of the main window shows a list of events Initially the Event view only shows the time that the FORMS4WORK Client has been launched As soon as a connection has been made to the FORMS4WORK Server any messages from the server and its active logical printers will be shown in the Events window The message color coding indicates their order of significance A difference is made between the following levels e Error messages are shown in red FORMS4WORK Manual Program Components 15 5 3 2 1 5 3 2 1 1 e Warning messages are shown in blue e Information is issued in black lettering e Debug messages are issued in gray Setup and Configuration Server From the Setup menu select Server to access server configuration Server properties and options refer

FORMS4WORK Version 1.5 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents